BMW - 7 Series - Owners Manual - 2022 - 2022

LINK: CONTENT & A-Z The Ultimate Driving Machine® OWNER'S MANUAL. BMW 7 SERIES. Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 WELCOME TO BMW. Owner's Manual. Thank you for choosing a BMW. The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest: Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW. Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important notes on ve‐ hicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features availa‐ ble in your BMW. The manual also contains information designed to enhance operating reliability and traffic safety, and to contribute to maintaining the value of your BMW. At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most current resource. After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Soft‐ ware Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest information. You can find supplementary information in the additional brochures in the ve‐ hicle literature. We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride. 3 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 TABLE OF CONTENTS After a vehicle software update – such as, a Remote Software Upgrade – the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest infor‐ mation. NOTES Information ......................................................................................................................... 6 Owner's Manual media ................................................................................................ 14 QUICK REFERENCE Entering ............................................................................................................................ 16 Set-up and use ............................................................................................................... 20 On the road ...................................................................................................................... 24 CONTROLS Dashboard ........................................................................................................................ 30 Sensors of the vehicle .................................................................................................. 35 Operating state of the vehicle .................................................................................... 39 iDrive .................................................................................................................................. 42 BMW Remote Software Upgrade ............................................................................. 59 General settings ............................................................................................................. 63 Personal settings ........................................................................................................... 68 Connections .................................................................................................................... 73 Opening and closing ..................................................................................................... 82 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel .......................................................................... 112 Transporting children safely ..................................................................................... 131 Driving ............................................................................................................................. 137 Displays .......................................................................................................................... 155 Lights .............................................................................................................................. 175 Safety .............................................................................................................................. 183 Driving stability control systems .............................................................................. 219 Driver assistance systems ........................................................................................ 223 Driving comfort ............................................................................................................. 275 Climate control ............................................................................................................. 278 4 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Interior equipment ....................................................................................................... 295 Storage compartments .............................................................................................. 310 Cargo area ..................................................................................................................... 316 DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving ......................................................................... 322 Saving fuel ..................................................................................................................... 328 MOBILITY Refueling ........................................................................................................................ 334 Wheels and tires .......................................................................................................... 336 Engine compartment ................................................................................................. 367 Operating materials .................................................................................................... 370 Maintenance ................................................................................................................. 377 Replacing components .............................................................................................. 379 Breakdown Assistance .............................................................................................. 383 Vehicle Care .................................................................................................................. 390 REFERENCE Technical data .............................................................................................................. 396 Appendix ........................................................................................................................ 399 Everything from A to Z ............................................................................................... 400 © 2021 Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft Munich, Germany Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich. US English ID7 VI/21, Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling. 5 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Information NOTES Information Using this Owner's Manual Orientation The fastest way to find information on a particu‐ lar topic is by using the index. An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in the first chapter. Validity of the Owner's Manual Production of the vehicle At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most current resource. Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ ences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. After a software update in the vehicle After a vehicle software update, such as via Re‐ mote Software Upgrade, the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest in‐ formation. Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment, and Communication can be obtained as a printed book from the service center. Additional sources of information Service center A service center will be glad to answer questions at any time. Internet Vehicle information and general information on BMW, for instance, on technology, are available on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com. Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐ scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐ cle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be dis‐ played on the Control Display. BMW Driver’s Guide app The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐ scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐ cle. The app can be displayed on smartphones and tablets. BMW Driver’s Guide Web Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suitable in‐ formation for the selected vehicle. If possible, only equipment and functions that are actually in‐ stalled in the vehicle will be explained. Driver’s Guide Web can be displayed in any current browser. The topics are also discussed in the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. 6 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Information Symbols and displays Symbols in the Owner's Manual Icon Meaning Precautions that must be followed in order to avoid the possibility of injury to yourself and to others as well as serious damage to the vehicle. Measures that can be taken to help protect the environment. "..." Texts in vehicle used to select individual functions. ›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the voice activation system. ››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice activation system. Action steps Action steps to be carried out are presented as a numbered list. The steps must be carried out in the defined order. 1. First action step. 2. Second action step. NOTES Vehicle equipment and options This Owner's Manual describes all models and all standard, country-specific and optional equip‐ ment that is offered in the model series. There‐ fore, this Owner's Manual also describes and il‐ lustrates features and functions that are not available in a vehicle, for example because of the selected optional equipment or the country-spe‐ cific version. This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. For any options and equipment not described in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supplementary Owner's Manuals. Your BMW service center is happy to answer any questions that you may have about the features and options applicable to your vehicle. Status of the Owner's Manual Basic information Enumerations Enumerations without mandatory order or alter‐ native possibilities are presented as a list with bullet points. ▷ First possibility. ▷ Second possibility. Icons on vehicle components This symbol on a vehicle component indicates that further information on the component is available in the Owner's Manual. The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a pol‐ icy of constant development that is conceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to embody the highest quality and safety standards. In rare cases, therefore, the features described in this Owner's Manual may differ from those in your vehicle. Validity of the Owner's Manual Production of the vehicle At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most current resource. Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ ences may exist between the printed Owner's 7 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 NOTES Information Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. tronics, requires suitable maintenance and repair work. Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you entrust corresponding procedures to a BMW center. If you choose to use another serv‐ ice facility, BMW recommends use of a facility that performs work, e.g., maintenance and repair, according to BMW specifications with properly trained personnel, referred to in the Owner's Manual as "another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop". After a software update in the vehicle After a vehicle software update, such as via Re‐ mote Software Upgrade, the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest in‐ formation. For Your Own Safety Intended use Heed the following when using the vehicle: ▷ Owner's Manual. ▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove stickers. ▷ Technical vehicle data. ▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where the vehicle is driven. ▷ Vehicle documents and statutory documents. Warranty Your vehicle is technically configured for the op‐ erating conditions and registration requirements applying in the country of first delivery, also known as homologation. If your vehicle is to be operated in a different country it might be neces‐ sary to adapt your vehicle to potentially differing operating conditions and registration require‐ ments. Noncompliance with homologation re‐ quirements in a certain country may affect war‐ ranty coverage. Please consult the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Booklet for further information on warranty matters. Maintenance and repairs Advanced technology, for instance the use of modern materials and high-performance elec‐ If work is performed improperly, for instance maintenance and repair, there is a risk of subse‐ quent damage and related safety risks. Improperly performed work on the vehicle paint‐ work can lead to a failure or fault of components, e.g., the radar sensors, and thereby result in a safety risk. Parts and accessories BMW recommends the use of parts and acces‐ sory products approved by BMW. Approved parts and accessories, and advice on their use and installation are available from a BMW center. BMW parts and accessories have been tested by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW vehi‐ cles. BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐ sories. BMW does not evaluate whether each individual product from another manufacturer can be used with BMW vehicles without presenting a safety hazard, even if a country-specific official approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate whether these products are suitable for BMW vehicles under all usage conditions. California Proposition 65 Warning For vehicles sold in California, the law requires vehicle manufacturers to provide the following warning: 8 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Information NOTES ▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Warning ▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty. Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Automo‐ bile components and parts, including compo‐ nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐ cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, cer‐ tain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐ lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐ pounds. Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of California to cause can‐ cer. Wash your hands after handling. Used en‐ gine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. Warning Operating, servicing and maintaining a passen‐ ger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine ex‐ haust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐ ductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine ex‐ cept as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your ve‐ hicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. Service and warranty We recommend that you read this publication thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the follow‐ ing warranties: ▷ Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty. ▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. ▷ California Emission Control System Limited Warranty. Detailed information about these warranties is listed in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Book‐ let. Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and designed to meet the particular operating condi‐ tions and homologation requirements in your country and continental region in order to deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle is oper‐ ated under those conditions. If you wish to oper‐ ate your vehicle in another country or region, you may be required to adapt your vehicle to meet different prevailing operating conditions and ho‐ mologation requirements. You should also be aware of any applicable warranty limitations or exclusions for such country or region. In such case, please contact Customer Relations for fur‐ ther information. Maintenance Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the road safety, operational reliability and the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Specifications for maintenance measures: ▷ BMW Maintenance system. ▷ Maintenance Booklet, available online and ac‐ cessible via a QR code in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Booklet. ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. If the vehicle is not maintained or is improperly maintained, this could result in serious damage to the vehicle. A failure to maintain your vehicle or improper maintenance may affect your warranty coverage. Please consult the New Vehicle Limited War‐ ranty Booklet for further information on warranty matters. 9 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Information NOTES Refer to section on engine oil change regarding recommended service intervals for oil changes. Data memory General information Electronic control devices are installed in the ve‐ hicle. Electronic control units process data they receive from vehicle sensors, self-generate or exchange with each other. Some control units are necessary for the vehicle to function safely or provide assistance during driving, for instance driver assistance systems. Furthermore, control units facilitate comfort or infotainment functions. Information about stored or exchanged data can be requested from the manufacturer of the vehi‐ cle, in a separate booklet, for example. Personal reference Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, the vehicle owner can be identified with the vehi‐ cle identification number, license plate and corre‐ sponding authorities. In addition, there are other options to track data collected in the vehicle to the driver or vehicle owner, for instance, via the ConnectedDrive account that is used. Operating data in the vehicle Control units process data to operate the vehicle. For example, this includes: ▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its indi‐ vidual components, e.g., wheel rotational speed, wheel speed, deceleration, lateral ac‐ celeration, engaged safety belt indicator. nical information. Information about the vehicle condition, component usage, maintenance rec‐ ommendations, events or faults can be stored temporarily or permanently. This information generally documents the state of a component, a module, a system, or the sur‐ rounding area, for instance: ▷ Operating states of system components, for instance, fill levels, tire pressure, battery sta‐ tus. ▷ Malfunctions and faults in important system components, for instance lights and brakes. ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special driving situations such as airbag deployment or en‐ gagement of the driving stability control sys‐ tems. ▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events. The data is required to perform the control unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves to detect and correct malfunctions, and helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle functions. The majority of this data is stored temporarily and is only processed within the vehicle itself. In some circumstances the vehicle may store some data for an additional but limited period of time. When servicing, for instance during repairs, serv‐ ice processes, warranty cases, and quality assur‐ ance measures, this technical information can be read out from the vehicle together with the vehi‐ cle identification number. A dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop can read out the in‐ formation. The socket for OBD Onboard Diagno‐ sis required by law in the vehicle is used to read out the data. The processed data is only processed in the ve‐ hicle itself and generally volatile. The data is not stored beyond the operating period. The data is collected, processed, and used by the relevant organizations in the service network. The data documents technical conditions of the vehicle, which can be used to determine vehicle maintenance status, and facilitate quality im‐ provement. Electronic components, e.g. control units and ve‐ hicle keys, contain components for storing tech‐ Fault and event memories in the vehicle can be reset when a dealer’s service center or another ▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain sensor signals. 10 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Information qualified service center or repair shop performs repair or servicing work. Data entry and data transmission into the vehicle General information Depending on the vehicle equipment, comfort and individual settings can be stored in the vehi‐ cle and modified or reset at any time. For example, this includes: ▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel posi‐ tions. ▷ Chassis and climate control settings. If necessary, data can be transferred to the en‐ tertainment and communication system of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone. This includes the following depending on the re‐ spective equipment: ▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐ tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system. ▷ Address book data for use in conjunction with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system. ▷ Entered navigation destinations. ▷ Data on the use of Internet services. This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or is found on a device that has been connected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at any time. This data is only transmitted to third parties upon personal request as part of the use of online services. The transmission depends on the se‐ lected settings for the use of the services. Incorporation of mobile devices Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile de‐ vices connected to the vehicle, for instance smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle control elements. NOTES The sound and picture from the mobile device can be played back and displayed through the multimedia system. Certain information is trans‐ ferred to the mobile device at the same time. De‐ pending on the type of incorporation, this in‐ cludes, for instance position data and other general vehicle information. This optimizes the way in which selected apps, for instance naviga‐ tion or music playback, work. There is no further interaction between the mo‐ bile device and the vehicle, such as active access to vehicle data. How the data will be processed further is deter‐ mined by the provider of the particular app being used. The extent of the possible settings de‐ pends on the respective app and the operating system of the mobile device. Services General information If the vehicle has a wireless network connection, this enables data to be exchanged between the vehicle and other systems. The wireless network connection is realized via an in-vehicle transmit‐ ter and receiver unit or via personal mobile devi‐ ces brought into the vehicle, for instance smart‐ phones. This wireless network connection enables 'online functions' to be used. These in‐ clude online services and apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or by other providers. Services from the vehicle manufacturer Where online services from the vehicle manufac‐ turer are concerned, the corresponding functions are described in the appropriate place, for in‐ stance the Owner's Manual or manufacturer's website. The relevant legal information pertaining to data protection may also be found on the manufacturer’s website. Personal data may be used to perform online services. Data is ex‐ changed over a secure connection, for instance with the IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer intended for this purpose. 11 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 NOTES Information Any collection, processing, and use of personal data above and beyond that needed to provide the services must always be based on a legal permission, contractual arrangement or consent. It is also possible to activate or deactivate the data connection as a whole. That is, with the ex‐ ception of functions and services required by law such as Assist systems. Services from other providers When using online services from other providers, these services are the responsibility of the rele‐ vant provider and subject to their data privacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle manu‐ facturer has no influence on the content ex‐ changed during this process. Information on the way in which personal data is collected and used in relation to services from third parties, the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be ob‐ tained from the relevant service provider. Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐ corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐ tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understand‐ ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. This data can help provide a better understand‐ ing of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐ corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐ tions and no personal data, for instance name, gender, age, and crash location, are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforce‐ ment, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐ ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu‐ facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the in‐ formation if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. Vehicle identification number General information Depending on the national-market version, the vehicle identification number is located in differ‐ ent positions in the vehicle. This chapter de‐ scribes all possible positions for the series. Engine compartment The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were op‐ erating. ▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were fastened. ▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal. ▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling. The engraved vehicle identification number can be found in the engine compartment, on the right-hand side of the vehicle. 12 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Information Right nameplate NOTES iDrive It is also possible to display the vehicle identifica‐ tion number via iDrive. Additional information: Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number, refer to page 74. Reporting safety defects The vehicle identification number can be found on the nameplate, on the right-hand side of the vehicle. For US customers The following only applies to vehicles owned and operated in the US. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the Na‐ tional Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone 1-800-831-1117. Left nameplate The vehicle identification number can be found on the nameplate, on the left-hand side of the vehicle. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in in‐ dividual problems between you, your dealer, or BMW of North America, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about mo‐ tor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. Windshield For Canadian customers The vehicle identification number can also be found behind the windshield. Canadian customers who wish to report a safetyrelated defect to Transport Canada, Defect In‐ vestigations and Recalls, may call the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety. 13 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Owner's Manual media NOTES Owner's Manual media Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest in‐ formation. Printed Owner's Manual Concept The printed Owner's Manual describes all stand‐ ard, country-specific, and optional features of‐ fered with the series. General information General information The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ ment, and Communication can be obtained as a printed book from the service center. Media at a glance Supplementary Owner's Manuals You can use various media formats to call up the content in the Owner's Manual. The following Owner's Manual media formats are available: Also follow the Supplementary Owner's Manuals, which are included in addition to the onboard lit‐ erature. ▷ Printed Owner's Manual. Validity of the Owner's Manual Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle Production of the vehicle Principle At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most current resource. Due to updates after the editorial deadline, differ‐ ences may exist between the printed Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically de‐ scribes features and functions found in the vehi‐ cle. Notes on updates can be found in the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle. Selecting the Owner's Manual ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. After a software update in the vehicle After a vehicle software update, such as via Re‐ mote Software Upgrade, the Integrated Owner's The Integrated Owner's Manual can be displayed on the Control Display. 1. Press the button. 2. "CAR" 3. "Owner's Manual" 4. Select the desired method of accessing the contents. 14 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Owner's Manual media NOTES Scrolling through the Owner's Manual Turn the Controller, until the next or previous contents are displayed. Context help General information The Integrated Owner's Manual can be ac‐ cessed from any menu. Depending on the se‐ lected function, either the associated description or the main menu of the Integrated Owner's Manual will be displayed. Opening via iDrive Change directly to the Options menu from the function on the Control Display: 1. Press the button. 2. "Help" Opening when a Check Control message is displayed Directly from the Check Control message on the Control Display: "Owner's Manual" 15 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Entering QUICK REFERENCE Entering Opening and closing Buttons on the vehicle key 1 Unlocking Buttons for the central locking system Overview Buttons for the central locking system. 2 Locking 3 Opening the trunk lid 4 Panic mode, pathway lighting Unlocking the vehicle Press the button on the vehicle key. Depending on the settings, either only the driv‐ er's door or all vehicle access points are un‐ locked. If only the driver's door is unlocked, press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points. Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ cle key after unlocking. The windows and the glass sunroof are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed. Locking Press the button with the front doors closed. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. Unlocking Press the button. Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐ self in a dangerous situation. ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds. ▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession. To switch off the alarm: press any button. Locking the vehicle 1. Close the driver's door. 2. Press the button on the vehicle key. All vehicle access points are locked. 16 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Entering Comfort Access QUICK REFERENCE Opening and closing the trunk lid with no-touch activation Principle The vehicle can be accessed without operating the vehicle key. Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient. The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's inte‐ rior. Unlocking the vehicle Principle The trunk lid can be opened and closed with notouch activation using the vehicle key you are carrying. Performing the foot movement 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐ prox. one arm's length away from the rear of the vehicle. 2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driving direction and immediately pull it back. With this movement, the leg must pass through the ranges of both sensors. Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely. Locking the vehicle Trunk lid Opening Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a closed vehicle door with your finger for approx. 1 second without grasping the door handle. ▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button on the outer side of the trunk lid. ▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐ hicle key for approx. 1 second. 17 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 QUICK REFERENCE Entering Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. Driver's door Closing Press the button on the inside of the trunk lid. Displays, control elements In the vicinity of the steering wheel 1 Seats, comfort features 2 Safety switch 3 Power windows 4 Exterior mirrors 5 Central locking system 6 Opening/closing trunk lid Switch console 1 Light switch element 2 Turn signal indicator, high beams 3 Instrument cluster 4 Wipers 5 Start/Stop button Indicator/warning lights 1 Selector lever The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐ ety of combinations and colors. 2 Controller 3 Parking brake, Automatic Hold Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐ tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready state is turned on. 4 Parking assistance systems 5 Driving Dynamics Control iDrive Principle iDrive is the operating concept of the infotain‐ ment system and includes a large number of functions. 18 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Entering QUICK REFERENCE Buttons on the Controller Button Function Go to the main menu. Go to the Media/Radio menu. Go to the Communication menu. Go to navigation map. Go to destination input menu for navi‐ gation. Go to the previous display. Go to the Options menu. Voice control Activating the voice control system Press the button on the steering wheel. Say the command. Ending voice control Press the button on the steering wheel or ›Cancel‹. 19 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Adjusting the distance: manual head restraints Electrically adjustable seats ▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐ straint toward the rear. ▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the front. 1 Thigh support 2 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt 3 Upper backrest After setting the distance, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly. 4 Backrest width 5 Lumbar support 6 Backrest tilt, head restraint Adjusting the head restraint Adjusting the height Press switch up or down. Adjusting the distance: power head restraints The head restraint is automatically repositioned when the upper backrest is adjusted. Side extensions Fold the side extensions forward to increase lat‐ eral support. 20 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Set-up and use Adjusting the exterior mirrors QUICK REFERENCE Storing 1. Set the desired position. 2. Press the button. The writing on the button lights up. 3. Press the desired button 1 or 2 at the door while the writing is lit. A signal sounds. Calling up settings Press the desired button 1 or 2. 1 Adjusting 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Folding in and out Adjusting the steering wheel Electrical steering wheel adjustment Infotainment Radio Buttons and functions Depending on the country and equipment ver‐ sion, the radio has the following buttons. Button Function Press: turns sound output on/ off. Turn: adjusts the volume. Change the entertainment source. Press the switch to adjust the forward/back posi‐ tion and height of the steering wheel to the seat position. Memory function Press once: changes the sta‐ tion/track. / Press and hold: fast forward/ rewind the track. Principle The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐ essary, retrieved using the memory function: ▷ Seat position. Programmable memory but‐ tons. / ▷ Exterior mirror position. ▷ Steering wheel position. ▷ Height of the Head-up Display. Changeover of waveband/satel‐ lite radio. 21 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE Button 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. Function Eject CD/DVD. 4. "New device" 5. "Phone calls and audio" The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display. Menu Apps. Navigation destination input Entering a destination via the search 1. Press the button on the Controller. "Where to?" 2. 3. Enter at least two letters or characters. Select point of interest categories from the points of interest menu as needed. The search term may be completed automat‐ ically in orange lettering. Move the Controller up to accept the sug‐ gested search term. 4. 6. Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the mobile device, and con‐ firm that the two match. 7. A Bluetooth connection is established. The mobile device is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list. Using the telephone Accepting a call Depending on the equipment, incoming calls can be answered in several ways. ▷ Via iDrive: "Accept" Select the icon, if needed. A list of the results is displayed. ▷ 5. If necessary, "Filter" / Press the corresponding button on the steer‐ ing wheel. 6. "Show results" ▷ Via the selection list in the instrument cluster: 7. Select the desired entry. Use the thumbwheel on the steering wheel to select: "Accept" 8. If necessary, "Start guidance" Connecting a mobile phone General information ▷ Via touchscreen: tap on the corresponding entry on the Control Display. After the mobile phone is connected once to the vehicle, the mobile phone can be operated using iDrive and the steering wheel buttons. Dialing a number Connecting the mobile phone via Bluetooth 3. "Dial number:" Connect entirely on the front or rear Control Dis‐ play. 5. 1. "COM" 1. "COM" 2. If necessary, "Telephone" 4. Enter the numbers. Select the icon. The connection is estab‐ lished via the mobile phone to which this function has been assigned. 2. "Mobile devices" 22 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE Establish the connection via the additional tele‐ phone: 1. Press the button. 2. "Call via" Apple CarPlay© preparation Principle CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice control and iDrive. Functional requirements ▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. ▷ Corresponding mobile contract. ▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data must be activated on the iPhone. ▷ Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice control are activated on the iPhone. ▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle. Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay 1. "COM" 2. "Mobile devices" 3. "New device" 4. "Phone calls and audio" The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display. 5. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle. A control number is displayed. 6. Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the mobile device, and con‐ firm that the two match. 7. "Use Apple CarPlay" The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐ played in the device list. 23 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 On the road QUICK REFERENCE On the road Driving Releasing With drive-ready state switched on: Drive readiness Press the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set. Turning on drive readiness The LED and indicator light turn off. The parking brake is released. Parking 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. Turning off drive-ready state Steptronic transmission: 1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐ hicle stopped. The parking brake is automatically set if the vehi‐ cle is being held by Automatic Hold and the drive-ready state is switched off or the vehicle is exited. Steptronic transmission Engaging selector lever position D, N, R 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The engine is switched off. 3. Set the parking brake. Auto Start/Stop function The Auto Start/Stop function switches the en‐ gine off automatically while stationary to save fuel. The engine starts automatically under the following preconditions: Steptronic transmission: ▷ By releasing the brake pedal. ▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on the accelerator pedal. Parking brake Setting Pull the switch. The LED on the switch and the indicator light in the instrument cluster are illuminated. ▷ Gear position D. ▷ Neutral N. ▷ R is reverse. With the driver's safety belt fastened, briefly push the selector lever in the desired direction, past a resistance point, if needed. The selector lever re‐ turns to the center position in each case. To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear position or reverse, maintain pres‐ sure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start. 24 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 On the road A selector lever lock prevents the inadvertent shifting to selector lever position R or the inad‐ vertent shifting from selector lever position P. QUICK REFERENCE Steptronic transmission, Sport program and manual mode Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary. Releasing the selector lever lock Activate the Sport program/manual mode: Press the selector lever to the left from selector lever position D. Manual mode: ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ward. Press the button. ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards. Engaging P Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary. End the sport program/manual mode: Press the selector lever to the right. Turn signal, high beams, headlight flasher Turn signal Press button P. ▷ Blinking: press the lever past the resistance point. ▷ Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap the lever up or down. ▷ Brief blinking: press the lever to the resist‐ ance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to blink. 25 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 On the road QUICK REFERENCE High beams, headlight flasher Icon Function Right roadside parking light. Left roadside parking light. Window wiper system Press the lever forward or pull it backward. Turn on window wiper system ▷ High beams on, arrow 1. The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on. ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. Lights and lighting Light functions Icon Function Press the lever up until the desired position is reached. Night vision. ▷ Resting position of the wipers: position 0. ▷ Rain sensor: position 1. ▷ Normal wiper speed: position 2. Lights off. Daytime driving lights. Parking lights. ▷ Fast wiper speed: position 3. Turn off the window wiper system and flick wipe Automatic headlight control. Adaptive light functions. Low beams. Instrument lighting. Press the lever down. 26 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 On the road ▷ Turn off: press the lever down until it reaches the 0 position. QUICK REFERENCE Cleaning the windshield ▷ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0 position. Activate/deactivate rain sensor Pull the lever. Climate control Activate: press the lever up once from its 0 posi‐ tion, arrow 1. Deactivate: press the lever back into the 0 posi‐ tion. Automatic climate control Icon Function Temperature. Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity Air conditioning. Maximum cooling. AUTO program. Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever. Air recirculation mode. Air flow, manual. Intensity AUTO program. Air distribution, manual. SYNC program. Defrost function. 27 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 On the road QUICK REFERENCE Icon Function Wheels and tires Rear window defroster. Tire pressure specifications Active seat ventilation. The tire inflation pressure specifications can be found in the tire inflation pressure table in the printed Owner's Manual. Seat heating. After correcting the tire pressure Seat and armrest heating. With runflat tires: Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Ambient air package. Intermediate stop With Tire Pressure Monitor: The corrected tire inflation pressures are applied automatically. Make sure that the correct tire set‐ tings have been made. Refueling With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐ sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. Fuel cap Checking the tire pressure 1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure and correct it as needed: ▷ At least twice a month. ▷ Before embarking on an extended trip. Cleaning the wheels 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap. The friction during hard braking may produce brake dust and make the rims dirty. Brake dust can be removed by cleaning the rims. BMW rec‐ ommends using vehicle care and cleaning prod‐ ucts from BMW. Electronic oil measurement Functional requirements Gasoline For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ taining metal must not be used. A current measured value is available after ap‐ prox. 30 minutes of normal driving. Displaying the engine oil level 1. "CAR" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Engine oil level" 28 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 On the road Different messages appear on the Control Dis‐ play depending on the engine oil level. Pay atten‐ tion to these messages. Adding engine oil QUICK REFERENCE Breakdown Assistance BMW Roadside Assistance 1. "APPS" 2. "Installed apps" General information 3. "BMW Assist" Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready state before adding engine oil. 4. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance" Adding engine oil ConnectedDrive A voice connection is established. Concierge service The BMW Assist Concierge service offers infor‐ mation on events, filling stations or hotels, and provides phone numbers and addresses. Many hotels can be booked directly by the BMW Con‐ cierge service. The Concierge service is part of the optional BMW Assist Response Center. Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. Observe the quantity to be added in the mes‐ sage. Take care not to add too much engine oil. Observe recommended engine oil types. 1. "COM" 2. "BMW Assist" 3. If necessary, select the entry for the Con‐ cierge Service. A voice connection to the Concierge service is established. Teleservices Providing assistance Teleservices are services that help to maintain vehicle mobility. Hazard warning flashers Teleservices can comprise the following serv‐ ices: ▷ BMW Roadside Assistance. ▷ BMW Accident Assistance. ▷ Teleservice Call. ▷ Teleservice Report. ▷ Teleservice Battery Guard. ▷ Your dealer’s service center. The button is located in the center console. 29 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Dashboard CONTROLS Dashboard Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. In the vicinity of the steering wheel 1 Seating comfort features Front passenger seat functional‐ ity 114 3 Safety switch for the windows and roller sunblinds 106 4 Power windows 104 Memory function 125 Massage function 127 2 5 Exterior mirror adjustment button 123 6 Lights Roller sunblind in the rear win‐ dow 106 30 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Dashboard CONTROLS Night Vision 199 Automatic High Beam Assis‐ tant 178 Light switch 175 Widgets 157 Trip data 171 Lights off 9 Shift paddles Automatic headlight control 175 10 Steering wheel buttons, left Daytime driving lights 177 Manual Speed Limiter 223 Parking lights 176 Depending on the equipment: Automatic headlight control 175 Cruise control on/off 225 Adaptive light functions 177 Automatic High Beam Assis‐ tant 178 Low beams 176 Depending on the equipment: Active Cruise Control on/off 227 Instrument lighting 180 With steering and traffic jam assis‐ tant 237: Right roadside parking light 176 Cruise control, distance control and lane guidance on/off Left roadside parking light 176 Cruise control: to store the speed 7 Central locking system 92 Unlocking Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug‐ gested speed 235 Pause or continue cruise control Active Cruise Control: increase dis‐ tance Locking 8 Steering column stalk, left Turn signal 145 High beams, headlight flasher 146 Active Cruise Control: reduce dis‐ tance Cruise control rocker switch 11 Instrument cluster 155 12 Steering wheel buttons, right 31 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Dashboard CONTROLS Selection lists 170 Wipers 146 Volume, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Rain sensor 147 Cleaning the windshield 148 Voice activation system 50 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 14 Auto Start/Stop function 137 Thumbwheel for selection lists 170 13 Steering column stalk, right Turning drive readiness state on/ off 137 15 Horn, entire surface 16 Steering wheel heating 125 17 Adjusting the steering wheel 125 18 Unlocking the hood 369 19 Opening and closing the trunk lid 97 20 Glove compartment 311 32 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Dashboard CONTROLS In the vicinity of the center console 1 Control Display 45 9 Parking assistance systems 246 2 Ventilation 282 3 Hazard warning system 383 Panorama View 266 Intelligent Safety 187 Air suspension level adjust‐ ment 275 4 Glove compartment 310 5 Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐ tion 6 10 Driving Dynamics Control 140 SPORT driving mode COMFORT driving mode 6 Automatic climate control 278 7 Controller with buttons 46 8 ECO PRO driving mode Parking brake 142 ADAPTIVE driving mode Automatic Hold 144 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol 219 11 Steptronic transmission selector lever 149 33 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Dashboard CONTROLS In the vicinity of the headliner 1 Emergency Call, SOS 385 2 Glass sunroof 108 3 Indicator light, front passenger air‐ bag 186 4 Reading lights 180 5 Depending on the vehicle equip‐ ment: opening the rear sun protec‐ tion 108 Depending on the vehicle equip‐ ment: closing the rear sun protec‐ tion 108 6 Interior lights 180 34 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Sensors of the vehicle CONTROLS Sensors of the vehicle Vehicle features and options Cameras Front camera This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Front camera Overview Depending on the equipment, the following cam‐ eras and sensors are installed in the vehicle: Cameras behind the windshield ▷ Front camera. ▷ Cameras behind the windshield. ▷ Top view cameras. ▷ Rearview camera. ▷ Infrared camera. ▷ Front radar sensor. ▷ Radar sensors, side, front. ▷ Radar sensors, side, rear. The cameras are located in the area of the inte‐ rior mirror. ▷ Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear bumpers. ▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side. Keep the vehicle cameras and sensors, as well as surrounding areas, clean and unobstructed. 35 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Sensors of the vehicle Top view cameras System limits of the cameras The cameras may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following sit‐ uations: ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. ▷ On steep hills, in steep depressions or in tight curves. ▷ When the camera field of view is covered, for instance by a fogged up windshield or labels. One camera is located at the bottom of each ex‐ terior mirror housing. ▷ If the camera lens is dirty or damaged. ▷ With exterior mirrors folded in. ▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong reflections, e.g., because of a setting sun. Rearview camera ▷ When it is dark outside. Does not apply to the infrared camera of the Night Vision. ▷ Infrared camera of the Night Vision: at very high outside temperatures. ▷ Camera behind the windshield: if the camera has overheated and been temporarily switched off due to excessively high temper‐ atures. The camera is located in the handle of the trunk lid. ▷ Camera behind the windshield: during cali‐ bration of the camera immediately after vehi‐ cle delivery. If applicable, a Check Control message will be displayed when the system limits are reached. Infrared camera Radar sensors Front radar sensor The infrared camera of the Night Vision is lo‐ cated in the radiator grille. The radar sensor is located in the front bumper. 36 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Sensors of the vehicle Radar sensors, side, front CONTROLS If applicable, a Check Control message will be displayed when the system limits are reached. Ultrasound sensors Ultrasound sensors in the front/ rear bumpers The radar sensors are located in the bumper. The ultrasound sensors of the Park Distance Control PDC are lo‐ cated in the bumpers. Radar sensors, side, rear Ultrasonic sensors, side The radar sensors are located in the bumper. System limits of the radar sensors The radar sensors may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations: ▷ If sensors are dirty, such as due to icing. ▷ If sensors are covered, such as by labels, films or a number plate baseplate. ▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in‐ stance due to parking damage. ▷ If the radiation range of the sensors is cov‐ ered, e.g., by protruding cargo. ▷ When the field of view of the sensors is cov‐ ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow hills, vehicles or trailers. ▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in the area of the sensors. The ultrasound sensors of the Automatic Parking Assistant are located on the side of the vehicle. System limits of the ultrasonic sensors The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐ urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the following situations: ▷ In case of dirty sensors. ▷ In case of covered sensors, such as due to la‐ bels. ▷ If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in‐ stance due to parking damage. ▷ After improper paint work on the vehicle in the area of the sensors. ▷ For small children and animals. ▷ On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the road. 37 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Sensors of the vehicle ▷ For persons with certain clothing, for instance jacket. ▷ In case of external interference of the ultra‐ sound, for instance from passing vehicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic sources. ▷ Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high relative atmospheric humidity, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, extreme heat, or strong wind. ▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other vehicles. ▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects. ▷ With moving objects. ▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as ledges. ▷ With objects with corners, edges, and smooth surfaces. ▷ With objects with a fine surface structure such as fences. ▷ For objects with porous surfaces. ▷ With small and low objects, for instance boxes. ▷ With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in foam material. ▷ With plants and bushes. ▷ In automatic car washes. ▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed bumps. ▷ Due to heavy exhaust. ▷ Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of the vehicle is not taken into account by the ultrasonic sensors. If applicable, a Check Control message will be displayed when the system limits are reached. 38 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Operating state of the vehicle CONTROLS Operating state of the vehicle Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. General information Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in one of the three states: ▷ Idle state. Safety information Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: ▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. Warning ▷ Standby state. Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: ▷ Drive-ready state. Idle state ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. Principle ▷ Releasing the parking brake. When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched off. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ dows. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. General information The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening from the outside and after exiting and locking. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ing and lock the vehicle. Automatic idle state For instance, the idle state is automatically es‐ tablished under the following conditions: 39 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Operating state of the vehicle CONTROLS ▷ After several minutes, if no operation takes place on the vehicle. Display in the instrument cluster OFF is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster. The drivetrain is switched off and standby state switched on. ▷ If the charge state of the vehicle battery is low. ▷ Depending on the setting via iDrive: when one or both front doors are opened after driv‐ ing when exiting the vehicle. In some situations, the idle state is not set auto‐ matically, for instance during a phone call or when the low beams are switched on. Drive readiness Principle Establishing idle state when opening the front doors Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to starting the engine. After a trip, the sleep mode can be established by opening the front doors. For this purpose, the driver and front passenger must exit the vehicle. General information 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" 4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door" Some functions, such as DSC Dynamic Stability Control, can only be used with drive-ready state switched on. Safety information DANGER Manual idle state To establish idle state in the vehicle after com‐ pletion of trip: Press and hold the button on the radio until the OFF indicator on the instrument cluster goes out. Standby state If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐ sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐ tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐ closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐ late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐ ficient ventilation. Warning Principle When standby state is switched on, most func‐ tions can be used while the vehicle is stationary. Desired settings can be adjusted. General information An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing. In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: The vehicle is in the standby state after the front doors are opened from the outside. 40 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Operating state of the vehicle CONTROLS ▷ Set the parking brake. Additional information: ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. Power gauge, refer to page 165. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. The activated drive readiness is indicated in the instrument cluster, depending on the equipment, by the display of information required for driving or the READY display. NOTICE Repeated attempts to start the vehicle or re‐ peated starting of the vehicle in rapid succes‐ sion can cause the starter to overheat. This also results in unburned or inadequately burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Avoid repeated starting of the vehicle, particularly repeated starting in rapid succession. Display in the instrument cluster Turning off drive-ready state Steptronic transmission 1. Engage selector lever position P with the ve‐ hicle stopped. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The engine is switched off. The vehicle switches into standby state. 3. Set the parking brake. Turning on drive readiness Principle Drive-ready state is switched on via the Start/Stop button. Steptronic transmission 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is activated automatically for a brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine starts. Most of the indicator/warning lights in the instru‐ ment cluster light up for a varied length of time. Gasoline engine Depending on the motorization, the full drive power may not be available for approximately 30 seconds after starting the engine. In this case, the vehicle will not accelerate as usual. 41 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 iDrive CONTROLS iDrive Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐ tionary. Input and display Main menu General information The main menu is divided into two areas. The left area contains menu items that can be used to call up all the iDrive functions. The right area contains widgets that provide quick access to certain functions. Operating concept Principle iDrive is the operating concept of the infotain‐ ment system and includes a large number of functions. General information These functions can be operated as follows: ▷ Via the Controller. Media/Radio ▷ Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. All functions of the entertainment system, e.g., radio stations or connection with external devices. ▷ Depending on the equipment: with the ges‐ ture control. Communication ▷ Via the touchscreen. Phone and message functions, e-mail and calendar, and also the connection and manage‐ ment of mobile devices, such as smartphones. Safety information Warning Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐ uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the Navigation Access to the navigation system, destination input and traffic bulletins. Configurable map views and other functions, such as points of in‐ terest and areas to be avoided. 42 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 iDrive My Car Information about vehicle status and trips. Access to the Integrated Owner's Manual and also administration of driver profiles and range of adjustments for vehicle and iDrive. Apps Management of apps, access to apps and ve‐ hicle functions. Additional apps and vehicle func‐ tions can be purchased from the BMW Store. Widgets Widgets provide quick access to fre‐ quently used functions. The configured widgets display dynamic contents such as the navigation map, and serve as interfaces at the same time. Letters and numbers Letters and numbers can be selected when mak‐ ing the destination input, for example. Letters and numbers can be entered using the Controller, the touchpad, touchscreen or voice control. The keyboard's display changes auto‐ matically. Icon Function Change between capital and lower-case letters. CONTROLS ▷ Only those letters and numbers are offered during entry for which data is available. ▷ Destination search: place names can be en‐ tered in all languages that are available in iDrive. Activating/deactivating the functions Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐ tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the menu item activates or deactivates the function. Function is activated. Function is deactivated. Status information General information The status field can be found in the upper area of the Control Display. Status information is dis‐ played in the form of symbols. Radio symbols Icon Meaning HD Radio station is being received. Satellite radio is switched on. Enter a blank space. Switching between languages. Use voice control. Telephone symbols Icon Meaning Confirm entry. Incoming or outgoing call. Slide the input area to the left or right. Missed call. Entry comparison When entering names and addresses, the choice is narrowed down with every letter and number and added automatically as needed. Entries are continuously compared with data stored in the vehicle. Signal strength of mobile phone net‐ work. Network search. Mobile phone network is not available. The critical charge state of the mobile phone has been reached. 43 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 iDrive CONTROLS Icon Meaning Icon Meaning Roaming is active. Information. Locating is active. Stop. SMS text message received. Data protection. Message received. Destination guidance active. Reminder. Passengers on board. Sending not possible. Do not disturb. Programmable memory buttons Entertainment symbols Icon Meaning General information Depending on the vehicle equipment: CD/DVD drive. Bluetooth audio. USB device. The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐ grammable memory buttons and called up di‐ rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation des‐ tinations, phone numbers and menu entries. Overview Connected Music. WLAN. Apple CarPlay. Android Auto. Other symbols Icon Meaning Programmable memory buttons Check Control message. Sound output active. Sound output deactivated. Voice activation system active. Request for the current vehicle posi‐ tion. Storing a function A function can be stored on a programmable memory button. A button with a stored function can be overwritten with another function. Checking the current vehicle position. 1. Select function via iDrive, for instance radio station. Driver profile. 2. Notifications. Service notifications. Press and hold the desired button until the displayed bar on the Control Display has loaded completely. 44 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 iDrive Control Display Executing a function Press the button. Safety information The function will work immediately. This means, for instance that the number is dialed when a phone number is selected. Displaying the key assignment Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves or use objects. The assignment of the buttons is displayed in the upper area of the Control Display. Deleting all button assignments All button assignments can be deleted. 1. Press and hold buttons 1 and ously for approx. 5 seconds. CONTROLS simultane‐ 2. "OK" Control Display and Controller Principle The iDrive functions are displayed on the Control Display. The Control Display can be operated us‐ ing the Controller, touchpad, and touchscreen. Overview NOTICE Objects in the area in the front of the Control Display can shift and damage the Control Dis‐ play. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not place objects in the area in front of the Control Dis‐ play. Switching on/off automatically The Control Display is turned on automatically when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the control display is needed for operation. In certain situations, the Control Display is switched off automatically, for instance if no op‐ eration is performed on the vehicle for several minutes. Switching on/off manually The Control Display can also be switched off manually. 1. Tip the Controller up. 2. "Screen off" Press the Controller or any button on the Con‐ troller to switch it back on again. System limits In the case of very high temperatures on the Control Display, for instance due to intense solar radiation, the brightness may be reduced down to complete deactivation. Once the temperature is reduced, for instance through shade or air con‐ ditioning, the normal functions are restored. 1 Control Display with touchscreen 2 Controller with buttons and touchpad 45 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS iDrive Controller Buttons on the Controller Button Function General information The buttons can be used to open the menus di‐ rectly. The Controller can be used to select menu items and enter the settings. Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the Controller. Operation ▷ Turn to switch between menu items, for ex‐ ample. Go to the main menu. Go to the Media/Radio menu. Go to the Communication menu. Go to navigation map. Go to destination input menu for navi‐ gation. Go to the previous display. Go to the Options menu. ▷ Press to select a menu item, for example. Operating via the Controller Opening the main menu Press the button. ▷ Tilt in four directions to switch between dis‐ plays, for example. The main menu is displayed. 46 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 iDrive Selecting a menu CONTROLS Adjusting contents 1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu item is highlighted. Depending on the equipment, the contents of menus "MEDIA", "COM" and "NAV" can be ad‐ justed, for instance to remove the entries of functions that are not used from the menu. 2. Press the Controller. 1. Select the menu. Selecting menu items 2. "Personalize menu" Select a widget 1. Move the Controller in the main menu to the right. 2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget is selected. 3. Press the Controller. It is also possible to select widgets in the instru‐ ment cluster. Adjusting the menu 3. Select the desired setting. Changing between displays After a menu item is selected, for instance "Settings", a new display appears. ▷ Tilt the Controller to the left. The current display closes and the previous display is shown. ▷ Press the button. The previous display re-opens. Adjusting widgets The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu. It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐ ets and switch between pages. The adjustments can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐ tionary. 1. Select the desired page in the main menu. Only the currently selected page can be ad‐ justed. ▷ Tilt the Controller to the right. The new display opens. An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened. Going to the Options menu Press the button. 2. Tip the Controller up. The "Options" menu is displayed. 3. "Adjust main menu" The menu consists of various areas, for instance: 4. Select the desired adjustment: ▷ "MEDIA": control options for the selected main menu. ▷ Symbol and select desired widget: add new widget. The requested widget will be inserted in the relevant position. A maximum of four widgets can be displayed per page. ▷ ▷ "Help": help for the selected menu. ▷ "Control display off": system settings. Entering letters and numbers Select icon: delete selected widget. ▷ Add new page: "Add page". Input ▷ Delete selected page: "Delete page". 1. Turn the Controller: select letter or number. ▷ Adjust the content of the widget: select widget. 2. : confirm entry. 5. "Done" 47 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 iDrive CONTROLS Entering special characters Deleting Icon Function Input Operation Press the Controller: delete letter or number. Delete a charac‐ ter. Swipe to the left on the touchpad. Hold the Controller down: delete all let‐ ters or numbers. Enter a blank space. Swipe to the right in the center of the touchpad. Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the up‐ per area of the touchpad. Enter an under‐ score. Swipe to the right in the lower area of the touchpad. Using alphabetical lists For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, the letters for which an entry exists can be dis‐ played in a text box. 1. Turn the Controller to the left or right quickly. 2. Select the first letter of the desired entry. The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐ played in the list. Operation via touchpad General information Some iDrive functions can be operated using the touchpad on the Controller. Using the map The map in the navigation system can be moved via the touchpad. Function Operation Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐ rection. Enlarge/shrink map. Drag in or out on the touch‐ pad with fingers. Display menu. Tap once. Selecting functions Using alphabetical lists 1. "CAR" Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries per‐ mit a direct jump to letters for which an entry ex‐ ists. 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" Enter the first letter on the touchpad. 4. "Touchpad" 5. Select the desired setting. Entering letters and numbers ▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on the Control Display. ▷ Always enter associated characters, such as accents or periods so that the letter can be clearly recognized. ▷ The set language determines what input is possible. Where necessary, enter special characters via the Controller. The first entry of the entered letter is displayed in the list. Operation via touchscreen General information The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐ screen. You can tap on menu items and widgets. Touch the touchscreen with your fingers. Do not use any objects. 48 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 iDrive Opening the main menu Tap on the icon. CONTROLS ▷ To show the display bar, pull down the dis‐ play bar at the top edge of the screen. ▷ To hide the display bar, pull up the display bar at the top edge of the screen. Changing between displays After a menu item is selected, a new display opens. An arrow indicates that additional displays can be opened. ▷ Swipe to the left. The main menu is displayed. Adjusting widgets ▷ Tap arrow. The new display opens. The widgets can be adjusted in the main menu. It is possible to create multiple pages with widg‐ ets and switch between pages. The adjustments can only be performed when the vehicle is sta‐ tionary. Entering letters and numbers 1. Select the desired page in the main menu. Only the currently selected page can be ad‐ justed. 2. Enter desired letters and numbers. 2. Tap the icon in the main menu. 3. Select the desired adjustment: ▷ ▷ Input 1. When approaching the touchscreen, a key‐ board appears on the Control Display. Deleting Icon Function Tap icon and select desired widget: add new widget. Tapping the icon: deletes the letter or number. The requested widget will be inserted in the relevant position. A maximum of four widgets can be displayed per page. Tapping and holding the icon all letters: deletes all letters or numbers. Tap icon: delete selected widget. ▷ Add new page: tap "Add page". ▷ Delete selected page: tap "Delete page". ▷ Adjust content of the widget: tap center of widget. 4. Tap "Done". Showing/hiding the display bar In the upper area of the Control Display, it is pos‐ sible to show or hide a display bar with additional functions. Using the map The navigation map can be moved using the touchscreen. Function Operation Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐ rection. Enlarge/shrink map. Drag in or out with the fin‐ gers. Display menu. Tap once. 49 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 iDrive CONTROLS Using alphabetical lists For alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries, the letters for which an entry exists can be dis‐ played in a text box. 1. Tap the letter in front of the list. A letter box is displayed. 2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry. BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant Principle The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a per‐ sonal assistant that enables natural voice opera‐ tion of various vehicle functions. The Personal Assistant simplifies the operation of the vehicle with the automation of processes and habits. General information ▷ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is availa‐ ble depending on the national-market ver‐ sion. ▷ The system includes special microphones on the driver side and the front passenger side. ▷ Say commands at a normal volume. Speaking directly into the microphone does not im‐ prove the speech recognition. ▷ Say the commands and numbers fluently as well as with normal volume, emphasis, and speed. ▷ ›...‹ identifies commands that can be spoken. Functional requirements ▷ A language that is supported by the Personal Assistant must be set via iDrive. Setting the system language, refer to page 64. Enter the following settings to access the full range of functions: ▷ "Online speech processing" is activated. ▷ All settings under "BMW ConnectedDrive" activated. ▷ Activation word is activated. ▷ The Driver profile is activated. ▷ "Synchronize driver profile" under "Personalization" is activated. ▷ Relevant ConnectedDrive Services pur‐ chased from the ConnectedDrive Store. Activating the voice control system General information There are various methods for activating the voice control feature: ▷ Press the button on the steering wheel. The microphone on the driver's side is active. ▷ Say the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or a personal wake word. The microphones on the driver's or front pas‐ senger's side are active with the following voice control, depending on where the activa‐ tion word was spoken. Then say the command. The activation word and the command can be spoken without pause in one sentence. No other commands may be avail‐ able. In this case, operate the function via iDrive. Button on the steering wheel 1. Press the button on the steering wheel briefly. 2. Say the command. ▷ Always say commands in the configured sys‐ tem language. 50 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 iDrive Wake word General information Speaking the wake word ›Hello BMW‹ or the per‐ sonal wake word will start the system. CONTROLS Supported voice assistants can be used with a connected smartphone in the vehicle. In addition to the preset or personal activation word, the ac‐ tivation word from connected third-party provid‐ ers can be used. 1. "CAR" Preset wake word The preset wake word ›Hello BMW‹ can be acti‐ vated and deactivated. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant" 5. "Voice control" 2. "Settings" 6. "Third-party providers" 3. "General settings" 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant" 7. Select the desired setting. Ending voice control 5. "Voice control" 6. "Wake word" ▷ 7. "Wake word" Press the button on the steering wheel again. Personal wake word ▷ ›Cancel‹ In addition to a preset activation word ›Hello BMW‹, a personal activation word can be set up in the active driver profile. The personal activa‐ tion word can also be changed or deleted. ▷ Tilt the Controller to the right or left. The activation word should consist of multiple syllables to ensure good recognition. An addition, such as ›Hello‹ is not necessary. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant" ▷ Press the Controller. Possible commands General information Most contents on the Control Display can be spoken as commands, e.g. menu items or list en‐ tries. Say list entries as shown. Instructions can be issued or questions can be asked where the Personal Assistant provides support. 5. "Voice control" Function examples 6. "Wake word" 7. "Personal wake word" 8. "Set wake word" 9. Select the desired setting. Activation word from third-party providers Vehicle status and vehicle information ▷ ›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹ ▷ ›Show me the sport displays.‹ ▷ ›Open Owner's Manual.‹ Depending on the national-market version, some third-party providers provide digital voice assis‐ tants, e.g., Siri, Amazon Alexa or Google Assis‐ tant. 51 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 iDrive CONTROLS Navigation Menu items ▷ ›Drive me to 300 Chestnut Ridge Road, Woodcliff Lake in New Jersey.‹ The commands of the menu items are spoken just as they are selected via the Controller. ▷ ›Take me home.‹ 1. Activating the voice control system. ▷ ›Are there any traffic messages?‹ 2. ›MEDIA‹ 3. ›Presets‹ Communication For example, when a mobile phone is connected, calls can be started or SMS can be sent. The stored stations are displayed on the Control Display. ▷ ›Call John Doe on cell phone.‹ Help for voice control ▷ ›Dial the number 1 8 0 0 8 3 1 1 1 1 7.‹ ▷ ›Voice commands‹: to have the available spo‐ ken commands announced. ▷ ›New text message to John Doe: I'll be right there.‹ Entertainment ▷ ›What song is this?‹ ▷ ›Play Blue Suede Shoes by Elvis Presley‹ ▷ ›Next title.‹ ▷ ›General information on voice control‹: have information on the operating principle of the voice control announced. ▷ ›Help‹: have help for the current menu read out loud. Settings Climate control ▷ ›Turn off the air conditioning.‹ Setting the voice control ▷ ›Activate fresh air.‹ You can set the system to use standard dialog or a short version. ▷ ›I'm cold.‹ Windows and light The short version of the voice control plays back short messages in abbreviated form. ▷ ›Open the windows automatically.‹ 1. "CAR" ▷ ›Delete activation point for automatic power window.‹ 2. "Settings" ▷ ›Ambient lighting.‹ 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant" Owner's Manual via voice operation You can ask simple questions about vehicle functions and the operation of the vehicle. The voice control system and the feedback it provides does not replace the printed or Integrated Owner's Manual. The speech recog‐ nition and quality of the feedback may vary. ›How can the passenger airbag be deactivated‹ 3. "General settings" 5. "Voice control" 6. "Response length" 7. Select the desired setting. Speaking during voice output It is possible to answer during inquiries of the voice activation system. The function can be de‐ activated if inquiries are often undesirably inter‐ The Personal Assistant returns feedback. When stationary, the section of the integrated Owner's Manual is displayed on the Control Display. 52 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 iDrive rupted, for instance due to background noise or conversations in the vehicle. 1. "CAR" The voice activation of the smartphone is ac‐ tivated. 2. 2. "Settings" CONTROLS Release the button. If activation is successful, a confirmation ap‐ pears on the Control Display. 3. "General settings" 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant" 5. "Voice control" 6. "Speaking during voice output" Online speech processing Online voice processing improves the quality of the speech recognition and search results for points of interest. To use the functions, data is transmitted to a service provider via an encrypted connection and stored locally there. 1. "CAR" Automating routines General information The Personal Assistant can automate routines, for instance the automatic activation of the seat heating from a specific outside temperature. Rules are created for this purpose, which can be activated and deactivated at any time. Activate/deactivate 1. "APPS" 2. "Settings" 2. "Installed apps" 3. "General settings" 4. If necessary, "Personal assistant" 5. "Voice control" 6. "Online speech processing" Adjusting the volume Turn the volume button during the voice guid‐ ance until the desired volume is set. The volume remains constant even if the volume of other audio sources is changed. Using the voice activation of the smartphone Depending on the device, a smartphone con‐ nected to the vehicle can be used via voice con‐ trol. The device must be connected via Apple Car‐ Play or Android Auto. 3. "Personal assistant" 4. "Automate habits" 5. Select the desired setting. Experience Modes Principle The Experience Modes combine different vehi‐ cle functions in the car's interior to an overall ex‐ perience. General information For example, the selection of a mode harmonizes the ambient light and seat climate control. Functional requirements ▷ The Experience Modes app is installed in the vehicle. ▷ Drive-ready state is switched on. 1. Press and hold the button on the steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds. 53 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 iDrive CONTROLS Activate/deactivate System limits 1. "CAR" ▷ The Personal Assistant provides information about vehicle functions that may not be in‐ stalled in the vehicle. 2. "Experience Modes" 3. Select the desired mode. The mode can be deactivated: "End" This also applies to safety-related functions and systems. ▷ Certain noises can be detected and may lead to problems. Keep the doors, windows, and glass sunroof closed. Adjusting the mode 1. "CAR" 2. "Experience Modes" ▷ Noises from the front passenger or the occu‐ pants can impair the system. Avoid making other noise in the vehicle while speaking. 3. Select the desired mode. 4. "Settings" 5. Select the desired setting. ▷ Major language dialects can cause problems with the speech recognition feature. Caring Car Principle ▷ A poor data connection influences the re‐ sponse time of the Personal Assistant and the Search. Different vehicle functions in the car's interior are harmonized for the driver in a short-term pro‐ gram. BMW Gesture Control General information Principle By selecting a program, the interior lighting, cli‐ mate control and music selection will be ad‐ justed. A program takes 3 minutes. Several iDrive functions can be operated by hand motion using BMW Gesture Control. Overview Activate/deactivate 1. "CAR" 2. "Caring Car" 3. Select the desired program. The program can be stopped prematurely: "End program" Adjusting a program 1. "CAR" 2. "Caring Car" 3. Select the desired program. 4. "Music settings" 5. Select the desired setting. The camera in the headliner detects gestures that are carried out in the area of the center con‐ sole at the height of the Control Display. Activate/deactivate 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 54 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 iDrive CONTROLS 3. "General settings" Carrying out gestures 4. "Gesture control" ▷ Perform gestures underneath the interior mir‐ ror and next to the steering wheel. 5. "Gesture control" ▷ Execute gestures clearly. Settings ▷ The gestures can also be executed from the front-passenger side. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Gesture control" 5. Select the desired setting. Possible gestures Gesture Operation Function Move index finger forward and backward in the di‐ rection of the screen. Accept call. Select a highlighted entry in a list during voice control. Confirm pop-up. Move hand across the width of the Control Display in the direction of the front-passenger side. Reject call. Close pop-up. End voice control. Slowly move hand clockwise in a circular pattern with the index finger stretched out forward. Increase the volume. Gesture is detected after one circular motion. Slowly move forearm counterclockwise in a circular Reduce the volume. pattern with the index finger stretched out forward. Gesture is detected after one circular motion. Pinch with thumb and index finger and move hand horizontally to the right or left. Surround View: turn camera view. This gesture can only be exe‐ cuted while the vehicle is sta‐ tionary. 55 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 iDrive CONTROLS Gesture Operation Function Move stretched out index and middle finger for‐ ward. Individually assignable gesture. Move fist with thumb extended to the left back and forth. Reverse Skip function. Move fist with thumb extended to right left back and forth. Forward Skip function. Stretch out five fingers, form a fist and stretch five fingers out again. Individually assignable gesture. The previous title is played. The next title is played. Assigning gesture individually System limits General information Gesture recognition by the camera in the head‐ liner can be disturbed by the following circum‐ stances: Two gestures can be assigned individually and can be configured for certain functions, such as: ▷ The camera lens is covered. ▷ Destination guidance to home address. ▷ Objects are located on the interior mirror. ▷ Mute/Playback ▷ The camera lens is dirty, clean camera lens. ▷ Control Display on/off Sensors and camera lenses, refer to page 393. Select function 1. "CAR" ▷ The gesture is executed outside of the de‐ tection range. 2. "Settings" ▷ Wearing of gloves or jewelry. 3. "General settings" ▷ Smoking in the car's interior. 4. "Gesture control" 5. "Function assignment gesture 1" or "Function assignment gesture 2" 6. Select the desired setting. 56 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 iDrive BMW Touch Command CONTROLS Operation Operation on BMW Touch Command Principle BMW Touch Command is a tablet that can be used to operate important vehicle functions. On BMW Touch Com‐ mand Tap on the icon. General information Depending on the equipment version, BMW Touch Command is located in the rear console or in the center armrest in the rear. Tap on the icon. Tap on the icon. The following functions can be used: ▷ Audio sources in the front. ▷ Interior lighting. ▷ Seat settings for front passenger seat and seats in the rear. ▷ Sun protection. ▷ Climate control in the rear. ▷ Rear-seat entertainment. Function Display the main menu. Back. Adjusts the vol‐ ume. Drag up or down. Scroll. Tap the screen. Confirm the se‐ lection. Connecting BMW Touch Command Turn on BMW Touch Command. The connection is established automatically. If the connection is not established automatically, scan the QR code on the Control Display with the BMW Touch Command. Overview Display QR code via iDrive manually: 1. "COM" 2. "Mobile devices" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. 4. "New device" 5. "Internet, apps", "via Wi-Fi®" 1 BMW Touch Command 2 Turning on/off 3 Ejecting Charging the rechargeable battery BMW Touch Command can be charged in the rear center armrest. Insert BMW Touch Command into the tray with the screen facing upward. To charge the re‐ chargeable battery, insert BMW Touch Com‐ mand with the charging socket to the left. Selecting menu items 1. Tap on the icon. 57 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 iDrive CONTROLS The main menu is displayed. 2. Select the desired menu item. 3. Select the desired setting. Settings Displays Settings, such as brightness, can be entered. 1. Tap on the icon. 2. Tap the icon in the status field. 3. "Brightness" 4. Slide the bar to the right or left until the de‐ sired setting is displayed. Device information Information about the device can be displayed in the settings: ▷ License information. ▷ Version. ▷ Data protection statement. 58 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. BMW Remote Software Upgrade ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ dows. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ing and lock the vehicle. Functional requirement ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract. ▷ The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has been activated. ▷ Cellular network reception. Principle ▷ A consent for the transmission of the corre‐ sponding data was given in the Data Protec‐ tion menu. Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up‐ date the entire software of the vehicle. This makes new functions, functional enhancements or quality improvements available. Standby must be turned on to search for a soft‐ ware upgrade. Search for an upgrade General information Automatic search BMW recommends performing the Remote Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes availa‐ ble. The vehicle regularly searches for updates in the background. Safety information Manual search 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Warning 3. "General settings" Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. 4. "Remote Software Upgrade" 5. "Search for upgrades" 6. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. 59 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 BMW Remote Software Upgrade CONTROLS Download of an upgrade successfully, the information about the version can be displayed on the Control Display. Automatic download This information is also available in the Connec‐ tedDrive customer portal. The available data for Remote Software Upgrade is automatically loaded into the vehicle. The download does not require an approval. Displaying information Display in the vehicle: Via BMW app If an upgrade is available, information about the new software version is displayed in the BMW app. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" The data for the upgrade can then be down‐ loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an ex‐ isting WLAN connection. 4. "Remote Software Upgrade" The data can then be transmitted from the mo‐ bile device to the vehicle. www.bmw-connecteddrive.com. This transmission method accelerates the down‐ load of the data, for instance in areas with limited mobile network availability. 1. Download the upgrade in the BMW app to the smartphone. 2. Follow the instructions in the BMW app. 3. Establish connection to the vehicle. ▷ iOS: connect Bluetooth audio and WLAN. ▷ Android: connect WLAN. The data transfer of the upgrade from the mobile device to the vehicle occurs in the background only while driving. 4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play. Additional information: 5. "Info about version" Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal: Installing the upgrade General information ▷ The installation of the upgrade may result in a deletion of software changes such as per‐ formance increases that have not been instal‐ led by the manufacturer of the vehicle. ▷ The installation may take approx. 20 minutes. ▷ The installation cannot be terminated. ▷ The vehicle cannot be used during the instal‐ lation. ▷ The vehicle can be exited during the installa‐ tion. ▷ The installation does not occur until the con‐ sent was given. Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle, refer to page 73. Prerequisites for the installation Information about the version ▷ The outside temperature is above 14 ℉/-10 ℃. General information ▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. The information about the version contains a de‐ scription of the updates that are included in the Remote Software Upgrade. During the download and after the installation has been completed ▷ Hazard warning system is switched off. ▷ The battery is sufficiently charged. ▷ Selector lever position P is engaged. 60 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 BMW Remote Software Upgrade ▷ Engine is turned off and sufficiently cooled down. ▷ Automatic engine start for pre-conditioning is not activated via iDrive. If applicable, follow the notes for further prerequi‐ sites on the control display. If the prerequisites are not met, such as a suffi‐ cient vehicle battery charge state, the upgrade will not be offered for installation. Pay attention to an offer for installation, for in‐ stance after extended driving. Preparing the vehicle ▷ Park the vehicle safely away from the public road. ▷ Cellular network reception must be ensured so that a fault message can be sent, for in‐ stance if the installation is terminated. ▷ Close the windows. ▷ Close the glass sunroof. ▷ Close the trunk lid. ▷ Remove energy consuming devices, such as a mobile phone. ▷ The vehicle key must be located in the vehi‐ cle for the consent for installation. ▷ Switch off the exterior lighting. ▷ Remove connected devices from the OBD socket. Starting installation The upgrade can be installed when all prerequi‐ sites have been met. 1. "CAR" CONTROLS Functional limitations During the upgrade, the majority of functions is temporarily unavailable, for instance: ▷ Hazard warning system. ▷ Central locking system and, if necessary, Comfort Access. ▷ Parking lights. ▷ Horn. ▷ Alarm system. ▷ Emergency call. ▷ Power windows. ▷ Operation of the tailgate. ▷ Glass sunroof. ▷ Checking the fuel filler flap lock. The driver's door can be locked and unlocked from the outside using the integrated key. After successful upgrade The vehicle can be used again immediately. Booked services, such as RTTI or Remote Serv‐ ices, will be reactivated automatically during the next trip. After an extended stationary period, charge the vehicle battery with an extended drive. Malfunction In the event of a malfunction, follow the instruc‐ tions on the control display or in the BMW app. If the malfunction cannot be remedied, contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified serv‐ ice center or repair shop. Validity of the Owner's Manual 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Remote Software Upgrade" 5. "Start upgrade now" Production of the vehicle At the time of production at the plant, the printed Owner's Manual is the most current resource. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play. 61 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS BMW Remote Software Upgrade After a software update in the vehicle After a vehicle software update, such as via Re‐ mote Software Upgrade, the Integrated Owner's Manual for the vehicle will contain the latest in‐ formation. 62 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 General settings CONTROLS General settings Vehicle features and options Setting the time format This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. 3. "General settings" Time Setting the time zone 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 4. "Date and time" 5. "Time format:" 6. Select the desired setting. Automatic time setting Depending on your vehicle's optional features, the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are updated automatically. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 1. "CAR" 3. "General settings" 2. "Settings" 4. "Date and time" 3. "General settings" 5. "Automatic time setting" 4. "Date and time" 5. "Time zone:" 6. Select the desired setting. Date Setting the time Setting the date 1. "CAR" 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Date and time" 4. "Date and time" 5. "Time:" 5. "Date:" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired hours are displayed. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired day is displayed. 7. Press the Controller. 7. Press the Controller. 8. Turn the Controller until the desired minutes are displayed. 8. Make the settings for the month and year. 9. "OK" 9. "OK" 63 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 General settings CONTROLS Setting the date format 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" data to analyze the attention of the driver. This system supports various vehicle assistance sys‐ tems, e.g.: ▷ Fatigue alert. 3. "General settings" ▷ Steering and traffic jam assistant with Ex‐ tended Traffic Jam Assistant. 4. "Date and time" 5. "Date format:" 6. Select the desired setting. Activating/deactivating Language 2. "Settings" Setting the system language 4. "Driver Attention Camera" 1. "CAR" 3. "General settings" 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 5. Select the desired setting. System limits 3. "General settings" The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully functional in the following situations: 4. "Language" 5. Select the desired setting. ▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered by the steering wheel rim. Setting the units of measurement ▷ When the driver is wearing infrared imperme‐ able sunglasses. Depending on the country version, you can set the units of measurement for some values, for in‐ stance consumption, distances, and tempera‐ ture. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Trip data settings Principle The intervals in which the trip data will be reset can be configured. 3. "General settings" Resetting trip data 4. "Units" 1. "CAR" 5. Select the desired menu item. 2. "Settings" 6. Select the desired setting. 3. "General settings" 4. "Reset trip data" Driver Attention Camera 5. Select the desired setting. Principle A camera that monitors driver activity is located in the instrument cluster. The camera evaluates the head position and eye opening and uses the 64 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 General settings Speed warning Principle The speed warning can be used to set a speed limit. A warning will be issued when this speed limit is exceeded. General information The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed ex‐ ceeds the set speed limit again, after it has drop‐ ped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h. CONTROLS Activating/deactivating pop-ups For some functions, pop-ups are displayed auto‐ matically on the Control Display. Some of these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Pop-ups" 5. Select the desired setting. Adjusting Control Display 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" Brightness 4. "Speed warning" 1. "CAR" 5. "Warning at:" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired speed is displayed. 7. Press the Controller. 2. "Settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Control display" 5. "Brightness at night" Activate/deactivate 6. Press the Controller. 1. "CAR" 7. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐ ness is set. 2. "Settings" 8. Press the Controller. 3. "General settings" Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ness settings may not be clearly visible. 4. "Speed warning" 5. "Speed warning" Accept current speed as the speed warning 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" Reset vehicle data All individual settings can be reset to the factory settings when the drive-ready state is switched off. 1. "CAR" 4. "Speed warning" 5. "Select current speed" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Reset vehicle data" 5. "Reset vehicle data" 65 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 General settings CONTROLS When the stored settings in a driver profile are synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account, these settings will remain in the ConnectedDrive account. 3. Select desired notifications. Notifications Settings Principle The menu centrally displays all notifications arriv‐ ing in the vehicle in form of a list. 4. Press the button. 5. Select the desired setting. It is possible to set which notifications are per‐ mitted and which notifications will be displayed at the start of the trip and at the completion of the trip. 1. Tip the Controller up. General information 2. "Notifications" The following notifications can be displayed: 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. ▷ Traffic messages. 4. "Settings" ▷ Check Control messages. 5. Select the desired setting. ▷ Messages on service notifications. ▷ Communication messages, for example emails, SMS text messages or reminders. ▷ Messages, for instance from the BMW app. ▷ Messages from the manufacturer of the vehi‐ cle, for instance technical information or im‐ portant customer information. The number of notifications is additionally dis‐ played in the status field. Go to notifications Display, notifications General information The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistants allows the configuration of the range of messages that will be displayed. Depending on the situation, the desired condition can be activated. Condition Description "Do not disturb" Incoming calls and non-critical notifications are not displayed. Icon is shown in the status information with the number of messages. 1. Tip the Controller up. 2. "Notifications" 3. Select desired notification. Delete notifications All notifications, except Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manufacturer, can be deleted from the list. Check Control messages or messages from the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as long as they are relevant. 1. Tip the Controller up. 2. "Notifications" "Passenger on board" Private contents, such as mes‐ sages, will not be displayed di‐ rectly. Icon is shown in the status information with the number of messages. Activate/deactivate 1. Tip the Controller up. 2. "Notifications" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. 66 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 General settings CONTROLS 4. "Notification display" 5. Select the desired setting. 67 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Personal settings CONTROLS Personal settings Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Deleting personal data in the vehicle Principle Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores per‐ sonal data, such as stored radio stations. This personal data can be permanently deleted using iDrive. General information Depending on the equipment, the following data is deleted: ▷ Driver profile settings. Data protection ▷ Stored radio stations. Data transmission ▷ Travel and trip computer information. ▷ Stored programmable memory buttons. ▷ Navigation, for instance stored destinations. Principle ▷ Phone book. The vehicle offers different services, whose use requires a data transfer to BMW or a service pro‐ vider. The data transmission can be deactivated for some services. ▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies. ▷ Office data, for instance voice memos. ▷ Login accounts. ▷ Linking vehicle and ConnectedDrive account. General information When the data transmission is deactivated, the respective service cannot be used. Only make these settings while stationary. Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up to 15 minutes. Functional requirement Data can only be deleted while stationary. Settings The data transfer can be configured in different stages or individually for separate services. 1. "CAR" Deleting data The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted when the vehicle is reset to the factory settings. Additional information: 2. "Settings" Reset vehicle data, refer to page 65. 3. "General settings" 4. "Data privacy" 5. Select the desired setting. 68 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Personal settings Driver profiles Principle Driver profiles can be created to store personal vehicle settings. If the vehicle is used by multiple drivers, each driver can create his personal driver profile. When a driver profile is selected, the vehi‐ cle will automatically apply the stored settings in the driver profile. General information Three personal driver profiles can be created. CONTROLS ▷ Switching the driver profile. ▷ Starting the set-up assistant. This option is offered in new vehicle for a lim‐ ited period of time. As soon as the engine is started or any button is pressed, the Welcome screen will be hidden. Setup assistant The setup assistant is offered in new vehicles for a limited period of time on the Welcome screen to configure the most important settings for the vehicle. In addition, a guest profile is available that can be selected by any driver. The guest profile is active when a personal driver profile has not been se‐ lected. "Getting started" Select to start the set-up assis‐ tant. Changes to the vehicle settings are automatically stored in the active driver profile or in the guest profile. 1. "CAR" The recognition via a vehicle key can be as‐ signed to a driver profile so that the vehicle will apply the settings as soon as the driver unlocks the vehicle. As soon as the vehicle recognizes the vehicle key, the corresponding driver profile will be activated. ConnectedDrive countries: The settings stored in the driver's profile can be synchronized with the personal BMW ConnectedDrive account. It is thereby possible to use these settings in other BMW vehicles as well. Functional requirements When a driver profile is created, switched or de‐ leted, the vehicle must move at a maximum of walking speed. Welcome screen After the Control Display is switched on, the Wel‐ come screen will be displayed. The following actions can be carried out on the Welcome screen: The set-up assistant can be started via iDrive at any time. 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Getting started" The driver is guided step by step through the fol‐ lowing functions: ▷ Setting the system language. ▷ ConnectedDrive countries: If the set-up assistant was opened in the guest profile: create driver profile. ▷ Pairing mobile devices with the vehicle. ▷ If the set-up assistant was opened from an al‐ ready defined driver profile: set up personal assistant. ▷ Depending on whether the set-up assistant was opened from an already defined driver profile or a guest profile: set up services or confirm the explanation for the transmission of vehicle related data. ▷ Set up other methods for use. The selected settings are stored in the active driver's profile. 69 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Personal settings CONTROLS Guest profile ▷ "Via My BMW app" The guest profile can be activated by any driver. Vehicle settings that are entered when the guest profile is active will be stored in the guest profile. Scanning the displayed QR code will accept the access data for the ConnectedDrive ac‐ count from the BMW app. In the following cases the guest profile is auto‐ matically active: ▷ "Log in" ▷ A driver profile has not been created yet. ▷ "New registration" ▷ No driver profile has been assigned to the ve‐ hicle key that was used to unlock the vehicle. The following limitations apply: ▷ The guest profile cannot be renamed. ▷ It is not possible to assign the recognition to the guest profile. ▷ It is not possible to assign a PIN to the guest profile. ▷ ConnectedDrive countries: It is not possible to synchronize with a ConnectedDrive ac‐ count. The guest profile is selected on the Welcome screen or via iDrive: 1. "CAR" 2. "Driver profiles" As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile image can be tapped in the top status bar. 3. "Guest" 4. "OK" Creating a driver profile 1. "CAR" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile image can be tapped in the top status bar. 4. "Add driver profile" Non-ConnectedDrive countries: A name must be entered for the driver profile. ConnectedDrive countries: An existing Connec‐ tedDrive account must be assigned to a driver profile. The following options are available for this purpose: The access data must be entered via iDrive. Scan the displayed QR code and follow the instructions on the smartphone. Selecting recognition 1. "CAR" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile image can be tapped in the top status bar. 4. "Driver recognition" 5. "with vehicle key" The vehicle key that is recognized in the car's interior is assigned to the driver profile. If mul‐ tiple vehicle keys are detected, the unin‐ tended vehicle keys must be removed from the car’s interior. 6. "Activate linkage" As soon as the vehicle recognizes the vehicle key, the corresponding driver profile will be acti‐ vated. If the vehicle key is not carried with you or the vehicle key is not recognized, the driver pro‐ file can only be selected on the Welcome screen when a PIN has been set up. Setting up a PIN A driver profile with recognition cannot be acti‐ vated without vehicle key. In this case, a PIN can be set up to activate the driver profile. Countries in which ConnectedDrive is not availa‐ ble: If a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not known, the driver profile cannot be activated. Countries in which ConnectedDrive is available: If a PIN was not set up or the PIN is not known, the driver's profile can be activated with the access 70 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Personal settings data of the corresponding ConnectedDrive ac‐ count. 1. "CAR" If the guest profile is active, the driver profile will be selected on the Welcome screen or via iDrive. A PIN may have to be entered. 2. "Driver profiles" 1. "CAR" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. 2. "Driver profiles" As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile image can be tapped in the top status bar. As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile image can be tapped in the top status bar. 4. "Driver recognition" 3. Select driver profile. 5. "using PIN" 4. "OK" Changing/canceling the recognition function If another vehicle key is assigned to a driver pro‐ file, the current assignment must be canceled first. 1. "CAR" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile image can be tapped in the top status bar. CONTROLS All settings stored in the selected driver profile are automatically applied. Switching synchronization with the ConnectedDrive account on/off The settings stored in the driver's profile are synchronized with the personal ConnectedDrive account. This means that it is possible to use the personal settings in other BMW vehicles with ConnectedDrive access as well, if this function is supported. The synchronization with the ConnectedDrive account is enabled when a driver profile is cre‐ ated or via iDrive: 4. "Driver recognition" 5. "with vehicle key" 6. "Activate linkage" When the vehicle and vehicle key will be handed over, such as for maintenance, carry out the fol‐ lowing steps first: ▷ Setting up PIN. ▷ Canceling recognition using the vehicle key. 1. "CAR" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile image can be tapped in the top status bar. ▷ Switching to the guest profile. 4. "Settings" The handed over vehicle key can then no longer be used to access the personal driver profile. 5. "Synchronize driver profile" Selecting a driver profile Renaming a driver profile Depending on the recognition setting, the driver profile will be selected automatically. Non-ConnectedDrive countries: 6. "Synchronize driver profile" 1. "CAR" 2. "Driver profiles" As an alternative for Steps 1 and 2, the profile image can be tapped in the top status bar. 71 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Personal settings CONTROLS 3. Select driver profile. ▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort Access. 4. "Settings" ▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not locked and unlocked. 5. Enter a profile name. Select the icon. 6. ConnectedDrive countries: The name of the driver profile is transferred from the ConnectedDrive account. Changes for the profile name must be made in the Connected‐ Drive account. Selecting a profile picture 1. "CAR" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile image can be tapped in the top status bar. ▷ When multiple vehicle keys are located in the outer area on the driver's side of the vehicle. ConnectedDrive countries: A driver profile can only be created and synchronized with the ConnectedDrive account when the vehicle has cellular network reception. The use of personal settings that are stored in the ConnectedDrive account in other vehicles is subject to technical limitations. For example, set‐ tings may be stored for a system that is not avail‐ able, or available in a non-compatible version, in other vehicles. 4. "Avatar" 5. Select the desired profile picture. ConnectedDrive countries: The profile image is transferred from the Con‐ nectedDrive customer portal or the BMW app. Deleting the driver profile 1. "CAR" 2. "Driver profiles" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. As an alternative for Steps 1 to 3, the profile image can be tapped in the top status bar. 4. "Settings" 5. "Remove driver profile" 6. Select the desired driver profile. 7. "Delete now" ConnectedDrive countries: If the driver profile was synchronized with a ConnectedDrive ac‐ count, the stored data in the ConnectedDrive ac‐ count will be retained. System limits A clear detection of the desired vehicle key may not be possible in the following cases, e.g.: 72 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Connections CONTROLS Connections Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle Principle General information Various connection types are available for using mobile devices in the vehicle. The connection type to select depends on the mobile device and the desired function. The following overview shows possible functions and the suitable connection types for them. The scope of functions depends on the mobile de‐ vice. Function Connection type Making calls via the hands-free sys‐ tem. Bluetooth. Symbol in the device list Using phone functions via iDrive or touchscreen. Other functions, e.g. Contacts or SMS. Playing music from the smartphone or the audio player. Bluetooth audio. WLAN in the vehicle: WLAN. Using apps in the vehicle. Wi-Fi hotspot: WLAN. Using the vehicle Internet access. Screen Mirroring: WLAN. Showing the smartphone display on the Control Display. USB port: USB. Playing music or videos from a USB device. 73 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Connections CONTROLS Function Connection type Apple CarPlay: Bluetooth and WLAN. Symbol in the device list Using apps via iDrive and via voice op‐ eration. Android Auto: Bluetooth and WLAN. Using apps via iDrive and via voice op‐ eration. The following connection types require one-time pairing with the vehicle: Displaying the vehicle identification number and software part number ▷ Bluetooth. When looking for compatible devices, you may have to state the vehicle identification number and the software part number. These numbers can be displayed in the vehicle. ▷ WLAN. Paired devices are automatically recognized later on and connected to the vehicle. 1. "COM" Safety information 2. "Mobile devices" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. Warning 4. "Settings" Operating the integrated information systems and communication devices while driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Only use the systems or devices when the traffic sit‐ uation allows. As warranted, stop and use the systems and devices while the vehicle is sta‐ tionary. Compatible devices General information Information on mobile devices compatible with the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/ bluetooth. Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed or deviating software versions. 5. "Bluetooth® info" 6. "System information" Managing mobile devices General information ▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are auto‐ matically recognized and reconnected when standby state is switched on. ▷ After stored content on the SIM card or the mobile phone, such as contacts, has been detected, the data is transmitted to the vehi‐ cle and can be used via iDrive. ▷ For some devices, certain settings are neces‐ sary, for instance authorization; see the oper‐ ating instructions of the device. Displaying the device list All devices paired with or connected to the vehi‐ cle are displayed in the device list. 74 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Connections A maximum of four devices can be connected to the vehicle via Bluetooth, and a maximum of ten devices can be connected to the vehicle via WLAN. A maximum of 20 devices will be de‐ tected. ▷ "Disconnect device" 1. "COM" ▷ "Delete device" 2. "Mobile devices" An icon to the right of the device name indicates, for which function the device is used. When the icon is displayed in white, this function is actively connected to the vehicle. The icon is displayed in gray when the function of the device is inactive. Icon Meaning CONTROLS functions may be deactivated on a device already connected. The device remains paired and can be connected again. The device is disconnected and removed from the device list. ▷ "Connection mode" Select a connection mode, for instance Apple CarPlay. ▷ "Telephone" Set telephone. ▷ "Bluetooth® audio" Telephone. Bluetooth audio. WLAN in the vehicle, Wi-Fi hotspot. Apps. Screen Mirroring. Apple CarPlay. Playback of music files on external devi‐ ces such as audio devices or mobile phones via Bluetooth®. ▷ "Apps" With the installed BMW app, apps from the smartphone can be displayed in the vehicle. ▷ "Wi-Fi®" Connects the device with the WLAN in the vehicle. Android Auto. Configuring the device Functions can be activated or deactivated for paired and connected devices. The scope of functions depends on the mobile device. Follow the information on the Control Display. 1. "COM" Priority of the phones When multiple mobile phones are connected to the vehicle, you can specify the priority of the mobile phones for reconnection. 1. "COM" 2. "Mobile devices" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. 2. "Mobile devices" 3. Select the desired device. 4. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Connect device" The functions that were assigned to the device before disconnecting are assigned to the device when it is reconnected. The 4. "Settings" 5. "Priorities for telephones" 6. Select the desired device. 7. Select the desired priority by sliding. 75 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Connections CONTROLS Bluetooth connection Frequently Asked Questions Functional requirements All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ pected. ▷ Compatible device with Bluetooth interface. Compatible devices, refer to page 74. In this case, the following explanations can help: ▷ The vehicle key or BMW display key is in the vehicle. Why could the mobile phone not be paired or connected? ▷ The device is ready for operation. ▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices con‐ nected to the mobile phone or vehicle. ▷ Bluetooth is switched on in the vehicle and on the device. ▷ The pairing readiness is displayed on the Control Display. ▷ Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility, may be required on the device; refer to the operat‐ ing instructions of the device. Activate Bluetooth In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connections with other devices. Delete the Bluetooth connection from the de‐ vice list on the mobile phone and start a new device search. Too many Bluetooth devices with the same function are paired. ▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode or has only a limited remaining battery life. 1. "COM" 2. "Mobile devices" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. Charge the mobile phone and deactivate the power-save mode where required. 4. "Settings" Why does the mobile phone no longer react? 5. "Bluetooth®" ▷ The applications on the mobile phone do not function anymore. 6. Select setting. Switch the mobile phone off and on again. Connecting the device 1. "COM" 2. "Mobile devices" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. 4. "New device" 5. "Phone calls and audio" The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display. 6. Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the mobile device, and con‐ firm that the two match. ▷ Too high or too low ambient temperature for mobile phone operation. Do not subject the mobile phone to extreme ambient temperatures. Why can telephone functions not be used via iDrive? ▷ Phone functions are not configured for the mobile phone. Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐ phone function. Why are no or not all telephone book entries dis‐ played or why are they incomplete? 7. A Bluetooth connection is established. The mobile device is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list. 76 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Connections ▷ Transmission of the telephone book entries is not yet complete. ▷ It is possible that only the telephone book en‐ tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card are transmitted. ▷ It may not be possible to display telephone book entries with special characters. ▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts from social networks. ▷ The number of phone book entries to be transmitted is too high. ▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for in‐ stance due to stored information such as memos. Reduce the data volume of the contact. ▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as audio source or as telephone. Configure the mobile phone and connect it with the telephone function. ▷ Contact was created in the contact list of the phone after the last synchronization. Synchronize contacts again: "Reload contacts" How can the telephone connection quality be improved? ▷ Adjust the strength of the Bluetooth signal on the mobile phone, depending on the mobile phone. ▷ Insert the mobile phone into the wireless charging tray. ▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone sepa‐ rately in the sound settings. If all points in this list have been checked and the required function is still not available, contact Customer Relations, a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. CONTROLS WLAN connection General information For certain applications, such as apps, the data exchange between smartphone and vehicle oc‐ curs via WLAN. Functional requirements ▷ Standby state is switched on. ▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐ terface. Activate WLAN in the vehicle 1. "COM" 2. "Mobile devices" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. 4. "Settings" 5. "Wi-Fi®" Wi-Fi hotspot Principle Compatible devices with WLAN interface can use the Internet connection of the vehicle via the Wi-Fi hotspot. General information Up to ten devices can be connected to the WiFi hotspot simultaneously. Functional requirements ▷ Compatible device with activated WLAN in‐ terface. Compatible devices, refer to page 74. ▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle. ▷ Internet use is activated for the vehicle. ▷ Registration and data contract with a service provider where required. ▷ Standby state is switched on. 77 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Connections CONTROLS Connecting a device to the Internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. Using the Internet for the first time via the WiFi hotspot requires registration and possibly a data volume purchase from a service provider. 5. "Internet connection" Depending on the country version, data volume can be purchased via the connected mobile de‐ vice or from the ConnectedDrive Store. Screen Mirroring 1. "COM" General information 2. "Mobile devices" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. 4. "New device" 4. "Settings" 6. Select the desired setting. Screen Mirroring enables mirroring (outputting) of the smartphone display on the Control Dis‐ play. Functional requirements 5. "Internet, apps" Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐ played on the Control Display. 6. Activate Internet usage via WLAN if neces‐ sary. "Open settings" 7. Activate Internet usage. ▷ Compatible smartphone with Screen Mirror‐ ing interface. Compatible devices, refer to page 74. ▷ Screen Mirroring is activated on the smart‐ phone. ▷ WLAN is activated on the vehicle. "Internet connection" 8. Tilt the Controller to the left. 9. Search for WLAN networks on the mobile de‐ vice. Select network name on the device. Pairing a smartphone with Screen Mirroring 1. "COM" 10. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐ nect. 2. "Mobile devices" The device is displayed in the device list. 4. "New device" Additionally, a QR code will be displayed on the Control Display. Alternatively, this QR code can be used to pair the mobile device with the hot‐ spot. 5. "Screen Mirroring" All devices connected via the hotspot use this data volume. Deactivating Internet usage via the Wi-Fi hotspot Internet usage may be deactivated if the data volume is used up, for instance. 1. "COM" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. The WLAN name of the vehicle is displayed on the Control Display. 6. Search for WLAN devices in the surrounding area of the smartphone. The WLAN name of the vehicle appears on the device display. Select the WLAN name of the vehicle. 7. Confirm the connection via iDrive. The device is connected and displayed in the device list. 2. "Mobile devices" 78 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Connections Apple CarPlay© preparation Principle CarPlay allows certain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice control and iDrive. Functional requirements ▷ Compatible iPhone, iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. CONTROLS Operation For more information, refer to the Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment, Communication. Frequently Asked Questions All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ pected. In this case, the following explanations can help: ▷ Corresponding mobile contract. The iPhone has already been paired with Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is set up, Car‐ Play can no longer be selected. ▷ Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice control are activated on the iPhone. ▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the device list. ▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data must be activated on the iPhone. ▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle concerned from the list of stored connections under Bluetooth and under WLAN. Compatible devices, refer to page 74. ▷ Booking the ConnectedDrive service: smart‐ phone integration. ▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehi‐ cle. Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay 1. "COM" ▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device. If the steps listed have been carried out and the required function is still not available: contact Customer Relations, a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Android Auto© preparation 2. "Mobile devices" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. 4. "New device" Principle 5. "Phone calls and audio" Android Auto allows the operation of certain functions of a compatible smartphone via voice control and iDrive. The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display. 6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle. A control number is displayed. 7. Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the mobile device, and con‐ firm that the two match. 8. "Use Apple CarPlay" General information The range of services offered depends on the country. Functional requirements ▷ Compatible Android smartphone: Samsung or Google smartphone with Android 10 or an The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and dis‐ played in the device list. 79 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Connections CONTROLS Android smartphone with Android 11, regard‐ less of the manufacturer. ▷ Compatible devices, refer to page 74. ▷ Corresponding mobile contract. ▷ Bluetooth and WLAN are enabled on the smartphone. ▷ The smartphone must support a 5 Ghz WiFi connection. ▷ If necessary, the setting for mobile data must be activated on the smartphone. ▷ WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the vehi‐ cle. Pairing a smartphone with Android Auto 1. "COM" 2. "Mobile devices" 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. Frequently Asked Questions All requirements are met and all required steps were completed in the specified order. Despite that, the mobile device does not function as ex‐ pected. In this case, the following explanations can help: The smartphone has already been paired with Android Auto. When a new connection is set up, Android Auto can no longer be selected. ▷ Delete the smartphone concerned from the device list. ▷ On the smartphone, delete the vehicle con‐ cerned from the list of stored connections under Bluetooth and under WLAN. ▷ Pair the smartphone as a new device. If the steps listed have been carried out and the required function is still not available: contact Customer Relations, a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 4. "New device" 5. "Phone calls and audio" The vehicle's Bluetooth name is displayed on the Control Display. 6. On the mobile device, search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity and select the vehicle. A control number is displayed. 7. Compare the control number displayed on the Control Display with the control number on the display of the mobile device, and con‐ firm that the two match. 8. "Use Android Auto" 9. If necessary, finish the setup on the mobile device. USB connection General information The following mobile devices can be connected to the USB port: ▷ Mobile phones. ▷ Audio devices such as MP3 players. ▷ USB storage devices. Common file systems are supported. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended formats. The smartphone is connected to the vehicle and displayed in the device list. A connected USB device will be supplied with charge current via the USB port if the device supports this. Follow the maximum charge cur‐ rent of the USB port. Operation The following uses are possible on USB ports with data transmission: For more information, refer to the Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's Manual for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment, Communication. ▷ Playing music files. ▷ Playing videos. Follow the following when connecting: 80 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Connections ▷ Do not use force when plugging the connec‐ tor into the USB port. CONTROLS Additional information: USB port, refer to page 302. ▷ Use a flexible adapter cable. ▷ Protect the USB device against mechanical damage. ▷ Due to the large number of USB devices available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐ teed that every device is operable on the ve‐ hicle. ▷ Do not expose USB devices to extreme envi‐ ronmental conditions, such as very high tem‐ peratures; refer to the operating instructions of the device. ▷ Due to the many different compression tech‐ niques, proper playback of the media stored on the USB device cannot be guaranteed in all cases. ▷ To ensure proper transmission of the stored data, do not charge a USB device via the on‐ board socket, when it is connected to the USB port. ▷ Depending on how the USB device is being used, settings may be required on the USB storage device, refer to the operating instruc‐ tions of the device. Not compatible USB devices: ▷ USB hard drives. ▷ USB hubs. ▷ USB memory card readers with multiple slots. ▷ HFS-formatted USB devices. ▷ Devices such as fans or lamps. Functional requirement Compatible device with USB port. Additional information: Compatible devices, refer to page 74. Connecting the device Connect the USB device using a suitable adapter cable to a USB port. The USB device is displayed in the device list. 81 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS Opening and closing Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Vehicle key General information The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle keys with integrated key. Each vehicle key contains a replaceable battery. Depending on the equipment and country ver‐ sion, various settings can be configured for the button functions. A driver profile with personal settings can be as‐ signed to a vehicle key. To provide information on maintenance recom‐ mendations, the service data is stored in the ve‐ hicle key. To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting the vehicle. burns. There is an injury hazard or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key and batteries out of reach for children. Immediately seek medical help if there is any suspicion that a battery or button cell has been swallowed or is located in any part of the body. Warning People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside. Warning For some country versions, unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge. Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it. Warning Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. Safety information ▷ Releasing the parking brake. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ dows. Warning The vehicle key has a button cell battery. Bat‐ teries or button cells can be swallowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries within two hours, for example, due to internal burns or chemical ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. 82 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ing and lock the vehicle. CONTROLS If, due to the settings, only the driver's door and fuel filler flap were unlocked, press the button on the vehicle key again to unlock the other vehicle access points. In addition, the following functions are executed: ▷ If a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle key, this driver profile will be activated and the settings that are stored in it will be applied. Overview ▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless they were manually switched off. ▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out. If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the button in the car's interior, they will not be folded out when unlocking. ▷ The rear sun protection of the glass sunroof is moved into the position where it was prior to locking. 1 Unlocking 2 Locking Stationary climate control through Remote Engine Start 288 3 Opening the trunk lid 4 Panic mode, pathway lighting Unlocking General information The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking us‐ ing the vehicle key depends on the following set‐ tings: ▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked when the button is pressed for the first time. ▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed with a light signal or a sound signal. ▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the vehicle is being unlocked. Welcome lights, refer to page 176. Unlocking the vehicle Press the button on the vehicle key. ▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐ tion is switched off. ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be switched off. After opening one of the front doors, the vehicle is ready for operation. The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness. Convenient opening Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ cle key after unlocking. The windows and the glass sunroof with sun protection are opened, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed. Locking General information The behavior of the vehicle during locking using the vehicle key depends on the following set‐ tings: 83 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS ▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with a light signal or a sound signal. ▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the hazard warning flashers are switched on. ▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking. Locking the vehicle 1. Close the driver's door. 2. Press the button on the vehicle key. The following functions are executed: ▷ All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap are locked. ▷ The rear sun visor of the glass sunroof is closed. ▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐ tion is switched on. This prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or the door openers. ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be switched on. If the drive-ready state is still switched on when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn honks twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must be switched off by means of the Start/Stop button. With Comfort Access: convenient closing Closing Press and hold the button on the vehicle key in the area close to the vehicle after locking. The windows and the glass sunroof with sun protection are closed, as long as the button on the vehicle key is pressed. The exterior mirrors are folded in unless they were folded in during locking. The exterior mir‐ rors are not folded in when the hazard warning flashers are switched on. Switching on the interior and exterior lighting Press the button on the vehicle key with the vehicle locked. The function is not available for the first 10 sec‐ onds after locking. ▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless they were manually switched off. Interior lights, refer to page 180. ▷ Depending on the settings, parts of the exte‐ rior lighting will be switched on. The light functions may depend on the ambient brightness. Trunk lid General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. Safety information Warning With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing. Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ try version, it is possible to specify whether the trunk lid can be unlocked with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. Selector lever position P must be engaged to open the trunk lid with the vehicle key. 84 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing Safety information CONTROLS Integrated key, refer to page 91. Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing. 2. Place the integrated key underneath the bat‐ tery compartment cover, arrow 1, and lift the cover with a lever movement of the integrated key, arrow 2. NOTICE During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing. 3. Push battery in arrow direction using a pointed object and lift it out. Opening Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ cle key for approx. 1 second. Switching pathway lighting on Press and hold the button on the vehi‐ cle key for approx. 1 second. It is possible to adjust the duration of the path‐ way lighting feature. Additional information: Pathway lighting, refer to page 177. Replacing the battery NOTICE Improper batteries in the vehicle key can dam‐ age the vehicle key. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Al‐ ways replace the discharged battery with a bat‐ tery with the same voltage, the same size and the same specification. 4. Insert a type CR 2032 3V battery with the positive side facing up. 5. Press the cover closed. 6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key until the integrated key engages. Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐ er’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point. Additional vehicle keys Additional vehicle keys are available from a serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle key. 85 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS Loss of vehicle keys A lost vehicle key can be disabled and replaced by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Switching the drive-ready state on via emergency detection of the vehicle key If the lost vehicle key has an assigned driver pro‐ file, the connection to this vehicle key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can then be assigned to the driver profile. Malfunction General information A Check Control message is displayed. Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal‐ function under the following circumstances: ▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. ▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission tow‐ ers or other equipment with high transmitting power. ▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐ jects. Do not transport the vehicle key together with metal objects. ▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehicle key. Do not carry the vehicle key in close proximity to other electronic devices. ▷ Fault of radio transmission by a charging process of mobile devices, for instance charging of a mobile phone. ▷ The vehicle key is located in direct proximity of the tray for wireless charging tray. Place the vehicle key in a different location. In the case of interference, the vehicle can also be unlocked and locked from the outside with the integrated key. Additional information: Integrated key, refer to page 91. It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready state if the vehicle key has not been detected. Proceed as follows in this case: 1. Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐ tention to the display in the instrument clus‐ ter. 2. If the vehicle key is detected: Turn on drive-ready state within 10 seconds. If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly change the position of the vehicle key and repeat the procedure. Frequently Asked Questions What precautions can be taken to be able to open a vehicle with an accidentally locked in ve‐ hicle key? ▷ The options provided by the Remote Serv‐ ices of the BMW app include the ability to lock and unlock a vehicle. This requires an active BMW Connected‐ Drive contract and the BMW app must be in‐ stalled on a smartphone. ▷ Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center. An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is required. 86 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing BMW display key General information Thescope of delivery of the BMW display key in‐ cludes an additional mechanical key. If the dis‐ play key is used, the mechanical key should be carried with you, for instance in the wallet. The mechanical key is used like the integrated key. The display key supports all functions of the standard vehicle key. In addition, the following functions are also avail‐ able: CONTROLS Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it. Warning Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. ▷ Display status of doors and windows. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. ▷ Display status of the alarm system. ▷ Display service information. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ dows. ▷ Call up range with available fuel. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. ▷ With parked-car heating: operate parked-car heating. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. Without parked-car heating: operate pre-ven‐ tilation. ▷ Pre-conditioning through Remote Engine Start ▷ Remote Control Parking. Additional information: There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ing and lock the vehicle. Overview Integrated key, refer to page 91. Safety information Warning People or animals in the vehicle can lock the doors from the inside and lock themselves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so that the vehicle can be opened from the outside. 1 Opening the trunk lid 2 Unlocking 3 Press and hold or press three times in quick succession: panic mode Press briefly: pathway lighting Warning For some country versions, unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge. 4 Locking 5 Park button 87 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS If the information area contains more than one page, then page indicators are shown beneath the information. 6 Display 7 Back 8 Turn the display on/off A solid indicator denotes the current 9 Micro-USB charging interface page. Reception range Swipe to the right or left with a finger to change between the pages. The number of available display key functions depends on the distance from the vehicle. If further information is available on a page, tap the appropriate icon. ▷ When you are in close proximity to the vehi‐ cle, all functions of the display key are availa‐ ble. To return to the original page: icon beneath the display. ▷ The status information can be called up in the extended reception range. With parked-car heating: the parked-car heat‐ ing can be operated. Without parked-car heating: the pre-ventila‐ tion can be operated. ▷ Outside of the reception range of the vehicle, you can display the last transmitted status in‐ formation from the vehicle. tap on the Lower status line The lower status line indicates whether or not the display key is within reception range. ▷ "Connected": the display key is within recep‐ tion range. ▷ "Updated": the display key is not within re‐ ception range. It indicates when the last data transfer from the vehicle took place. Turning on/off The icon is shown on the display if one of the buttons is pressed outside of the reception range. The display will go out automatically after a brief period to conserve battery power. Display Hiding the display on the display manually: press the button on the left side of the display key. To show the display: General information The display is divided into the upper status line, the information area, and the lower status line. Upper status line The upper status line displays the following infor‐ mation: ▷ / Vehicle secured/vehicle unsecured. ▷ Set time in the vehicle. ▷ Charge state of the display key battery. 1. Press the button on the left side of the dis‐ play key. 2. Then, swipe with your finger from bottom to top to unlock the screen lock. To turn off the display to increase the usable bat‐ tery life: 1. If necessary, cancel the screen lock. 2. Press and hold the button on the left side of the display key for longer than 4 seconds. 3. "OK" Information area To turn the display on: The information area can be used to access in‐ formation and perform additional functions. Press the button on the left side of the display key. 88 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing Operating concept Depending on the vehicle equipment, there are up to five main menus providing access to the sub-menus. Main menu "Security information" Information/Function / Door status. Alarm system status. After alarm triggering: date, time, and reason for triggering the alarm. Window status. Glass sunroof status. "Vehicle information" Maintenance indicators of Condition Based Service CBS. Status of the roadside parking lights. "Mobility info" Range with available fuel. "Preconditioning setting" With parked-car heating: operate parked-car heat‐ ing. Without parked-car heat‐ ing: operate pre-ventila‐ tion. Stationary climate control through Remote Engine Start. "R/C parking" Remote Control Parking. Display key battery General information Follow the following information: ▷ If the charge state of the display key battery declines, the display is switched off automati‐ cally. The battery must be recharged so that the display can be switched back on. The op‐ CONTROLS erability of the standard buttons is retained until the battery is completely discharged. ▷ Charge the battery for at least three hours before using the display key for the first time or if the key has not been used for an ex‐ tended period. ▷ The display key can be used while it is being charged via the USB port. If the battery is fully discharged, it may take some time before the display key can be used again. ▷ Due to the large number of USB chargers available on the market, it cannot be guaran‐ teed that every charger will function properly. The charging time depends on the charger used. ▷ Charging via the USB port may heat up the charger and the display key. Charging in the wireless charging tray may heat up the tray and the display key. At higher temperatures, the charge current through the display key may be reduced, and in isolated cases the charge process may be interrupted temporarily. ▷ When inserting the display key into the wire‐ less charging tray, make sure there are no objects between it and the wireless charging tray. Safety information Warning When charging a device that meets the Qi standard in the wireless charging tray, any metal objects located between the device and the tray can become very hot. Placing storage devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards, cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal transmission, between the device and the tray may impair the card function. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. When charging mobile devices, make sure there are no objects between the device and the tray. 89 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Opening and closing Charging Malfunction Via USB General information Connect the display key via the micro-USB charging interface to a USB port. A Check Control message is displayed. In the center console BMW display key detection by the vehicle may malfunction under the following circumstances: ▷ The battery of the display key is discharged. ▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission tow‐ ers or other equipment with high transmitting power. ▷ Shielding of the display key due to metal ob‐ jects. ▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity. 1. Open the tray cover. 2. Place the display key into the middle of the wireless charging tray in front of the cup hold‐ ers. Ensure that the display is facing up. 3. Close the tray cover. LED displays Color Meaning Blue The display key is charging. ▷ Fault of radio transmission by a charging process of mobile devices, for instance charging of a mobile phone. Do not transport the display key together with metal objects or electronic devices. In the case of interference, the vehicle can also be unlocked and locked from the outside with the mechanical key. Turning on drive readiness via emergency detection of the BMW display key The blue LED stays illuminated once the inserted display key is fully charged. Orange The display key is not charging. Temperature on the display key pos‐ sibly too high or foreign object in charging tray. Red The display key is not charging. Contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop. It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready state if the display key has not been detected. Proceed as follows in this case: 1. Hold the display key with its rear against the marked area on the steering column. Pay at‐ 90 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing tention to the display in the instrument clus‐ ter. 2. If the display key is detected: Turn on drive-ready state within 10 seconds. If the display key is not detected, slightly change the position of the display key and repeat the procedure. Resetting the BMW display key If the charged display key cannot be turned on anymore or if the display does not respond to entries anymore, the display key can be reset. CONTROLS NOTICE The door lock is permanently joined with the door. The door handle can be moved. When pulling the door handle with the integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ erty, among other potential damage. Remove the integrated key before pulling the external door handle. Removing Press and hold the following buttons on the dis‐ play key at the same time for at least 10 seconds until the display is switched off and then on again: ▷ ▷ Integrated key Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the integrated key, arrow 2. General information The driver's door can be locked and unlocked without the vehicle key using the integrated key. Depending on the national-market version, the integrated key also fits the glove compartment. Safety information Warning For some country versions, unlocking from the inside is only possible with special knowledge. Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐ cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐ tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when there are people in it. 91 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Opening and closing Locking/unlocking via the door lock 1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with one hand. Alarm system The activated alarm system is triggered when the door is opened, if the vehicle has been un‐ locked via the door lock. The alarm system is not switched on if the vehi‐ cle is locked with the integrated key. Buttons for the central locking system General information 2. Guide one finger of your other hand from the back under the cover and push the cover out. In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning sys‐ tem and interior lights come on. Overview 3. Use the thumb of the hand on the door han‐ dle to push the cover toward the rear of the vehicle. 4. Remove the cover. 5. Unlock or lock the door lock using the integrated key. Buttons for the central locking system. Locking Press the button with the front doors closed. ▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. ▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft when locking. Unlocking Press the button. The other doors must be unlocked or locked from the inside. 92 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing Unlocking Opening ▷ CONTROLS Press the button to unlock all the doors. Pull the door opener above the armrest. ▷ Front doors: pull the door handle on the door to open the door. The other doors remain locked. ▷ Back doors: pull twice on the door handle on the door to be opened; the first time unlocks the door, the second time opens it. The other doors remain locked. General information The behavior of the vehicle during unlocking via the Comfort Access depends on the following settings: ▷ If the unlocking of the vehicle is confirmed with a light signal or a sound signal. ▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the vehicle is being unlocked. Unlocking the vehicle Comfort Access Principle The vehicle can be accessed without operating the vehicle key. Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your pants pocket, is sufficient. The vehicle automatically detects the vehicle key when it is in close proximity or in the car's inte‐ rior. General information Comfort Access supports the following func‐ tions: ▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle from the door handle. ▷ Convenient closing. ▷ Touchless unlocking and locking of the vehi‐ cle. ▷ Opening trunk lid. Grasp the handle of a vehicle door completely. In addition, the following functions are executed: ▷ If a driver profile was assigned to the vehicle key, this driver profile will be activated and the settings that are stored in it will be applied. ▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless they were manually switched off. ▷ Folded in exterior mirrors are folded out. If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the button in the car's interior, they will not be folded out when unlocking. ▷ Opening and closing the trunk lid with notouch activation. ▷ The rear sun protection of the glass sunroof is moved into the position where it was prior to locking. Functional requirements ▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐ tion is switched off. ▷ To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be outside of the vehicle near the doors. ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be switched off. ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not possible until after approx. 2 seconds. 93 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Opening and closing Locking Convenient closing General information Safety information The behavior of the vehicle during locking via the Comfort Access depends on the following set‐ tings: ▷ If the locking of the vehicle is confirmed with a light signal or a sound signal. ▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded in when the vehicle is locked. The exterior mirrors are not folded in when the hazard warning flashers are switched on. Warning With convenient closing, body parts can be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear during convenient closing. Closing ▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking. Locking the vehicle Close the driver's door. Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a closed vehicle door with your finger and hold it there without grasping the door handle. Touch the grooved surface on the handle of a closed vehicle door with your finger for approx. 1 second without grasping the door handle. The following functions are executed: ▷ All doors, the trunk lid, and the fuel filler flap are locked. ▷ The rear sun visor of the glass sunroof is closed. ▷ With anti-theft protection: Anti-theft protec‐ tion is switched on. This prevents the doors from being unlocked using the lock buttons or the door openers. ▷ With alarm system: The alarm system will be switched on. In addition to locking, the windows and glass sunroof with sun protection will be closed. The exterior mirrors are folded in unless they were folded in during locking. The exterior mir‐ rors are not folded in when the hazard warning flashers are switched on. Opening the trunk lid General information If you open the trunk lid via Comfort Access, locked doors will not be unlocked. To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. 94 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing Safety information CONTROLS Selector lever position P must be engaged for touchless opening of the trunk lid. Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing. NOTICE During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing. If the vehicle key is in the sensor area, the trunk lid may open or close inadvertently if you unin‐ tentionally move your foot or if a foot movement is detected. The sensor has an approximate range of 5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐ cle. If you open the trunk lid with no-touch activation, locked doors will not be unlocked. Contactless opening and closing of the trunk lid must be activated in the settings. Safety information Warning Opening During no-touch activation, vehicle parts may be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas sys‐ tem. There is a risk of injury. When moving your foot, make sure you have a firm stance and do not touch the vehicle. Warning Press the button on the outer side of the trunk lid. Opening and closing the trunk lid with no-touch activation Principle The trunk lid can be opened and closed with notouch activation using the vehicle key you are carrying. Two sensors detect a forward-directed foot motion in the central rear area and the trunk lid is opened or closed. Body parts can be jammed when operating the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing. NOTICE During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing. General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. 95 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Opening and closing Settings ▷ Ice, snow or slush on the rear of the vehicle. Contactless opening and closing of the tailgate can be switched on or off. ▷ Dirt or road salt on the rear of the vehicle. Performing the foot movement Movement in the range of the sensors may cause unintended opening or closing of the cargo area, for instance due to water running own when cleaning the vehicle or with heavy rainfall. To prevent such unintended opening or closing of the cargo area in such cases, keep the vehicle key at a sufficient distance from the rear of the vehicle. 1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at ap‐ prox. one arm's length away from the rear end. Touchless unlocking and locking of the vehicle 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" 4. "Tailgate" 2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the driving direction and immediately pull it back. With this movement, the leg must pass through the ranges of both sensors. Principle The vehicle will be unlocked when the driver ap‐ proaches the locked vehicle with the vehicle key. When the driver walks away from the unlocked vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be locked. General information The vehicle will be unlocked when an authorized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking zone. The unlocking zone is located within a radius of approx. 3 ft/1 m around the door handles. Opening Perform the foot movement described earlier. Before the trunk lid opens, the hazard warning system flashes. Closing Perform the foot movement described earlier. The hazard warning system flashes and an acoustic signal sounds. Moving your foot again will stop the closing mo‐ tion, and moving it one more time after that will re-open the trunk lid. The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key leaves the locking zone. The locking zone is located within a radius of ap‐ prox. 7 ft/2 m around the door handles. If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking zone for an extended period of time without move‐ ment, the vehicle will be locked automatically. If a passenger is detected in the front passenger seat during locking and the safety belt of the front passenger is engaged in the safety belt buckle during locking: ▷ The vehicle will be locked but not secured against theft. ▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked. System limits The detection of the foot movement may be lim‐ ited due to the following external conditions: 96 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing The behavior of the vehicle during touchless un‐ locking/locking depends on the following set‐ tings: ▷ If the automatic unlocking is active. ▷ If the automatic locking is active. ▷ If only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap or all access to the vehicle will be unlocked. Only driver's door and fuel filler flap: the driv‐ er's door and fuel filler flap will only be un‐ locked when the driver approaches the vehi‐ cle on the driver's side. All vehicle entry points: the vehicle will be un‐ locked regardless of the side on which the driver approaches the vehicle. ▷ If the unlocking and locking of the vehicle is confirmed with a light signal or a sound sig‐ nal. ▷ If the welcome light is switched on when the vehicle is being unlocked. ▷ If pathway lighting is activated during locking. ▷ If the exterior mirrors are automatically folded out and in when the vehicle is unlocked and locked. Functional requirements ▷ The drive-ready state must be turned off. ▷ Unlocking: when entering the unlocking zone, the doors and trunk lid must be closed. ▷ Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the doors and trunk lid must be closed. ▷ For touchless locking of the vehicle, no sec‐ ond vehicle key can be located in a radius of six meters around the vehicle. ▷ If the vehicle has been in the idle state for several days, touchless unlocking/locking is not possible until after the vehicle has been driven. Locking after Remote Control Parking In the following situations, lock the vehicle with the vehicle key: CONTROLS ▷ After Remote Control Parking. ▷ After the initial trip, after the vehicle was man‐ euvered out of the parking space with Re‐ mote Control Parking. Malfunction Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal‐ function under the following circumstances: ▷ The battery of the vehicle key is discharged. For replacing the battery, refer to page 85. ▷ Fault of the radio link from transmission tow‐ ers or other equipment with high transmitting power. ▷ Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ob‐ jects. Do not transport the vehicle key together with metal objects. ▷ Fault of the radio link from mobile phones or other electronic devices in direct proximity to the vehicle key. Do not carry the vehicle key in close proximity to other electronic devices. Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the locking request detection on the door handles. In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key or use the integrated key. Additional information: Integrated key, refer to page 91. Trunk lid General information To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area. Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ try version, it is possible to specify whether the trunk lid can be unlocked with the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors will respond to this. 97 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Opening and closing Selector lever position P must be engaged to open the trunk lid with the vehicle key. Opening and Closing It may not be possible to open the trunk lid when the vehicle is in valet parking mode. Opening Additional information: From the outside Valet parking mode, refer to page 100. Safety information Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing. NOTICE During opening, the trunk lid pivots back and up. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the trunk lid is clear during opening and closing. ▷ Unlock the vehicle and then press the button on the outer side of the trunk lid. ▷ With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key with you and press the button on the outer side of the trunk lid. ▷ Press and hold the button on the ve‐ hicle key for approx. 1 second. Depending on the setting, the doors may also be unlocked. From the inside Press the button in the storage compart‐ ment of the driver's door. Interruption of the opening procedure The opening operation is interrupted: ▷ When the vehicle starts moving. ▷ By pressing the button on the outer side of the trunk lid. Pressing again closes the trunk lid. ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the trunk lid. Pressing again closes the trunk lid. 98 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing ▷ By pressing the button on the vehicle key. Pressing again continues the opening mo‐ tion. ▷ By pressing or pulling the button in the driv‐ er's door. Pressing again continues the open‐ ing motion. CONTROLS Malfunction In the event of an electrical malfunction, operate the unlocked trunk lid manually with a slow and smooth motion. Trunk emergency unlocking Closing From the outside ▷ Press the button on the inside of the trunk lid. With Comfort Access: ▷ Press the button on the inside of the trunk lid. Pull the handle inside the cargo area. The vehicle will be locked after closing the trunk lid. The driver's door must be closed for this purpose and the vehicle key must be out‐ side of the vehicle in the area of the trunk lid. The trunk lid unlocks. From the inside Pull and hold the button in the storage compartmenr of the driver's door. The vehicle key must be located inside the vehi‐ cle for this function. An acoustic signal sounds before the trunk lid is closed. Interruption of the closing procedure Soft-close automatic function Safety information Warning Body parts can be jammed while operating the doors. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the doors is clear dur‐ ing opening and closing. The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐ lowing situations: Closing ▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky movement. To close the doors, push lightly. ▷ By pressing the button on the outer side of the trunk lid. Pressing again re-opens the trunk lid. Closing occurs automatically. ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the trunk lid. Pressing again re-opens the trunk lid. ▷ By releasing the button in the driver's door. Pulling again and holding continues the clos‐ ing motion. 99 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS Valet parking mode Via the vehicle settings Principle 2. "Settings" In the valet parking mode, the Control Display is disabled. The operation via iDrive is no longer possible. 3. "General settings" E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle is handed over for valet parking. Activating the valet parking mode General information General information In the valet parking mode, it is not possible to change vehicle settings via iDrive. Personal pro‐ files cannot be changed. Personal data cannot be displayed. Before activating the valet parking mode, a PIN must be set up to be able to deactivate the valet parking mode at a future time. Additionally, the following actions are carried out: ▷ The volume of the audio system is limited. ▷ The integrated Universal Remote Control is deactivated. ▷ DSC cannot be switched off. ▷ Depending on the vehicle, the trunk lid can be locked and disconnected from the central locking system. Functional requirements ▷ At least one driver profile has been created. 1. "CAR" 4. "Valet parking mode" The procedure for entering the PIN varies de‐ pending on the active driver profile. Driver profile with PIN A PIN has been stored for the active driver pro‐ file. It is not necessary to enter another PIN. 1. "Lock tailgate as well" The trunk lid will be locked and disconnected from the central locking system. 2. "Activate now" ▷ A driver profile or the guest profile is active. Driver profile without PIN ▷ At least one driver profile has an assigned ConnectedDrive account. A PIN must be assigned to the driver profile. Accessing the menu for the valet parking mode 1. "PIN" 2. Enter PIN. 3. "Lock tailgate as well" 4. "Activate linkage" Via the switch-off screen 5. "Activate now" After switching off drive-ready state the switchoff screen will be displayed. Select the entry for the valet parking mode on the switch-off screen. Guest profile The guest profile is the active driver profile. A PIN must be entered. Via the display bar at the upper edge of the Control Display 1. "PIN" 1. Tip the Controller up. 2. Enter PIN. 2. "Valet parking mode" 3. "Lock tailgate as well" 100 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing The trunk lid will be locked and disconnected from the central locking system. 4. "Activate now" This PIN can be used once to deactivate the valet parking mode for the active guest pro‐ file. Deactivating valet parking mode General information The lock screen of the valet parking mode is dis‐ played on the Control Display. The deactivation of the valet parking mode de‐ pends on which driver profile is selected on the lock screen. Driver profile with PIN Regardless of which driver activated the valet parking mode, a driver can deactivate the valet parking mode by entering his/her PIN. 1. Select driver profile. Guest profile In the guest profile, the valet parking mode can only be deactivated if the valet parking mode was activated in the guest profile. 1. Select guest profile. 2. Enter the PIN that was specified during acti‐ vation. If the PIN has been forgotten, the valet parking mode must be deactivated via a personal driver profile. Settings General information Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ try version, various settings for opening and clos‐ ing are possible. These settings are stored for the driver profile currently used. 2. Enter the assigned PIN for the driver profile. Unlocking and locking If you forgot the PIN, the valet parking mode must be deactivated by entering the assigned ConnectedDrive access data. Doors Driver profile without PIN The valet parking mode was activated by another person. To deactivate the valet parking mode, a driver without a PIN has to enter the access data for his ConnectedDrive account. 1. Select driver profile. 2. Enter the ConnectedDrive access data as‐ signed to the driver profile. CONTROLS 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Key button settings" 4. Select the icon. 5. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Driver's door only" Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Pressing again unlocks the entire vehicle. ▷ "All doors" The entire vehicle is unlocked. Confirmation signals from the vehicle 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 101 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" Trunk lid 4. Deactivate or activate the desired confirma‐ tion signals: Trunk lid and doors ▷ "Flash when locking/unlocking" Unlocking is signaled by blinking twice, locking by blinking once. ▷ With alarm system: "Sound when locking/unlocking" Unlocking is confirmed with two sound signals, locking is confirmed with one sound signal. Folding mirrors in automatically 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" You can set up if only the trunk lid will be un‐ locked or if the doors will also be unlocked when the trunk lid is unlocked Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ try version, this setting may not be offered. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Key button settings" Select the icon. 4. The text next to the icon indicates the current setting. 5. Select the desired setting: 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" 4. "Fold mirrors in when locked" Automatic unlocking ▷ "Tailgate" Depending on the equipment, the trunk lid will be unlocked or opened. ▷ "Tailgate and door(s)" 1. "CAR" Depending on the equipment, the trunk lid will be unlocked or opened and the doors are unlocked. 2. "Settings" 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" 4. Select the desired setting: 5. ▷ "Unlock doors when in Park" ▷ "Unlock at end of trip" After drive-ready state is switched off by pressing the Start/Stop button, the locked vehicle is automatically unlocked. Automatic locking ▷ "Tailgate opens only when vehicle is unlocked." The vehicle must be unlocked before the trunk lid can be used with the vehicle key. ▷ "Lock tailgate button" The operation of the trunk lid via the vehi‐ cle key is disabled. Comfort Access 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Touchless locking and unlocking 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" 4. "Lock in a few minutes" The vehicle locks automatically after a while if no door is opened after unlocking. Contactless locking and unlocking can be switched on or off. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" 4. "Comfort access" 102 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS Establishing idle state after opening the front doors Opening the doors with the alarm system switched on 1. "CAR" The alarm system is triggered when a door is opened if the door was unlocked using the integrated key in the door lock. 2. "Settings" 3. "Doors/ vehicle access" 4. "Turn off vehicle after opening door" Idle state, refer to page 39. Opening the trunk lid with the alarm system switched on The trunk lid can be opened even when the alarm system is switched on. Alarm system General information When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm system reacts to the following changes: ▷ Opening a door, the hood or the trunk lid. ▷ Movements in the car's interior. ▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance, dur‐ ing attempts at stealing a wheel or when tow‐ ing the vehicle. After the trunk lid is closed, it is locked and moni‐ tored again provided the doors are locked. The hazard warning system flashes once. Panic mode You can trigger the alarm system if you find your‐ self in a dangerous situation. ▷ Press the button on the vehicle key and hold for at least 3 seconds. ▷ Disconnected battery voltage. ▷ Briefly press the button on the vehicle key three times in succession. ▷ Improper use of the socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis. To switch off the alarm: press any button. ▷ Locking the vehicle while a device is con‐ nected to the socket for the OBD OnboardDiagnosis. Indicator light on the interior mirror The alarm system signals these changes visually and acoustically: ▷ Acoustic alarm: Depending on local regulations, the acoustic alarm may be suppressed. ▷ Visual alarm: By flashing of the hazard warning system and headlights, where required. Do not modify the system to ensure function of the alarm system. ▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every 2 sec‐ onds: The alarm system is switched on. Turning on/off The alarm system is switched on or off as soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehicle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort Access. ▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every 2 seconds: Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or trunk lid are 103 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS not correctly closed. Correctly closed access points are secured. Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor When the still open access points are closed, the interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen‐ sor will be switched on. Press the button on the vehicle key within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle is locked. ▷ The indicator light goes out after unlocking: The vehicle has not been tampered with. ▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking un‐ til drive-ready state is switched on, but no longer than approx. 5 minutes: An alarm has been triggered. The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐ onds and then continues to flash. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor are switched off until the vehicle is locked again. Ending the alarm ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key. Tilt alarm sensor The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm system responds in situations such as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehicle is towed. Interior motion sensor The windows and the glass sunroof must be closed for the system to function properly. Avoiding unintentional alarms General information The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthorized action occurred. Possible situations for an unwanted alarm: ▷ In automatic car washes. ▷ In duplex garages. ▷ During transport on trains carrying vehicles, at sea or on a trailer. ▷ With animals in the vehicle. ▷ When the vehicle is locked after start of fuel‐ ing. The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion sen‐ sor can be switched off in such situations. ▷ Unlock the vehicle with the integrated key and activate the drive-ready state via emer‐ gency detection of the vehicle key. Malfunction, refer to page 86. ▷ With Comfort Access: when carrying the ve‐ hicle key, grasp the driver's door or front pas‐ senger door handle completely. Power windows General information The windows can be opened with the vehicle key from the outside as well as closed with Com‐ fort Access. With Comfort Access: The windows can be closed from the outside via Comfort Access. When a window is often opened in the same po‐ sition, this task can be performed by the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. For instance when the same parking garage is frequently used. Additional information: ▷ Vehicle key, refer to page 82. ▷ BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to page 50. 104 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing Safety information Closing ▷ Pull the switch to the resistance point. Warning When operating the windows, body parts and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the windows is clear during opening and closing. Overview CONTROLS The window closes while the switch is being held. ▷ Pull the switch beyond the resist‐ ance point. The window closes automatically if the door is closed. Pulling again stops the motion. Jam protection system Principle The jam protection prevents objects or body parts becoming jammed between the door frame and window while a window is being closed. General information Power windows If resistance or a blockage is detected while a window is being closed, the closing action is in‐ terrupted. Safety switch Safety information Functional requirements The windows can be operated under the follow‐ ing conditions. ▷ Standby state is switched on. Warning Accessories on the windows such as antennas can impact jam protection. There is a risk of in‐ jury. Do not install accessories in the area of movement of the windows. ▷ Drive readiness is switched on. The vehicle key must be in the car's interior. Opening ▷ Press the switch to the resistance point. The window opens while the switch is being held. ▷ Closing without the jam protection system In case of danger from the outside or if ice might prevent normal closing, proceed as follows: 1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and hold it there. Press the switch beyond the resist‐ ance point. The window opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion. 105 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS 2. The window closes with limited jam protec‐ tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific threshold, closing is interrupted. Rear window roller sunblind Pull the switch past the resistance point again within approx. 4 seconds and hold it there. General information The window closes without jam protection. Safety switch The safety switch in the driver's door can be used to prevent children from operating the roller sunblind using the switches in the rear, for in‐ stance. Additional information: Principle Safety switch, refer to page 106. With the safety switch, it is possible to disable particular functions in the rear. This makes sense, for instance if children or animals are car‐ ried in the rear. Safety information If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the safety function is switched off automatically. General information The following functions can be disabled by pressing the safety switch: NOTICE When operating the roller sunblind, objects stored on the rear shelf may damage the roller sunblind. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the roller sunblind is clear during the operation. ▷ Seat adjustments in the rear. ▷ Opening and closing of the rear windows us‐ ing the switches in the rear. Overview driver's door ▷ Operation of the roller sunblind in the rear window using the switches in the rear. ▷ Operation of the roller sunblinds in the side windows using the switches in the rear. ▷ Operation of the rear sun protection using the switches in the rear. Turning on/off Button for the roller sunblind. Press the button. The LED lights up if the safety function is switched on. 106 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing Overview of rear doors CONTROLS Roller sunblinds, rear side windows General information The safety switch in the driver's door can be used to prevent children, for instance from oper‐ ating the roller sunblinds using the switches in the rear. Additional information: Button for the roller sunblind. Safety switch, refer to page 106. Overview Operation Press the button to open the closed roller sunblind or to close the open roller sunblind. If the button is pressed again during the move‐ ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo‐ site direction. Hold the button down to operate the roller sun‐ blinds on the rear window and on the side win‐ dows at the same time. BMW Touch Command The roller sunblind can also be operated using BMW Touch Command. System limits If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐ blind after having activated it consecutively a number of times, the overheating protection mechanism is active. The system is blocked for a limited time to prevent overheating. Let the sys‐ tem cool. The roller sunblind cannot be moved at low inte‐ rior temperatures. Buttons for the roller sunblinds. Operation Press the button to open the closed roller sunblind or to close the open roller sunblind. If the button is pressed again during the move‐ ment, the roller sunblind is moved in the oppo‐ site direction. BMW Touch Command The roller sunblinds can also be operated using BMW Touch Command. System limits If you are no longer able to move the roller sun‐ blinds after having activated them consecutively a number of times, the overheating protection mechanism is active. The system is blocked for a 107 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS limited time to prevent overheating. Let the sys‐ tem cool. Overview The roller sunblinds cannot be moved at low in‐ terior temperatures. Glass sunroof General information The glass sunroof and the sun protection are op‐ erated using the same switch. Depending on equipment: The rear sun protec‐ tion is operated using separate buttons. The glass sunroof can be opened from the out‐ side with the vehicle key and also closed with Comfort Access. With Comfort Access: The glass sunroof can be closed from the outside via Comfort Access. 1 Opening/closing the glass sunroof/ front sun protection. 2 Depending on the vehicle equipment: close the rear sun protection. 3 Depending on the vehicle equipment: open the rear sun protection. Functional requirements The glass sunroof and the sun protection can be operated under the following conditions. Safety information ▷ Standby state is switched on. Warning Body parts can be jammed when operating the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the glass sunroof is clear during opening and closing. ▷ Drive readiness is switched on. The vehicle key must be in the car's interior. Lifting/closing glass sunroof Push switch briefly upward. ▷ The closed glass sunroof tilts and the sun protection opens slightly. ▷ The opened glass sunroof closes until it is in the tilted position. The sun protection does not move. ▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes. 108 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sun protection separately ▷ Slide switch back to the resist‐ ance point and hold. Holding down the switch opens the sun protection. If the sun protection is already fully open, the glass sunroof opens. ▷ Slide switch forward to the resistance point and hold. The glass sunroof closes while the switch is being held. If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted position, the sun pro‐ tection closes. ▷ Slide the switch back past the resistance point. The sun protection opens automatically. If the sun protection is already fully open, the glass sunroof opens automatically. Pressing the switch again stops the motion. ▷ Push the switch forward past the resistance point. The glass sunroof closes automatically. If the glass sunroof is already closed or in the tilted position, the sun protection closes automati‐ cally. CONTROLS Pressing the switch again stops the motion. ▷ Briefly press out the switch twice in succes‐ sion toward the front past the resistance point. The glass sunroof and sun protection are closing together. Pressing the switch again stops the motion. Comfort position In some models, the wind noises in the car's in‐ terior are lowest when the glass sunroof is not fully open. In these models, the automatic func‐ tion initially only opens the glass sunroof up to this comfort position. Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐ roof fully. Depending on equipment: opening/closing the rear sun protection On the roofliner control panel Press the button to open the rear sun protection. Press button again to stop the movement. Press the button to close the rear sun protection. Pressing the switch again stops the motion. Press button again to stop the movement. Opening/closing the glass sunroof and sun protection together ▷ Briefly press out the switch twice in succession toward the rear past the resistance point. The glass sunroof and sun protection are opening to‐ gether. On the control panel in the rear doors It is not possible to operate the rear sun protec‐ tion via the switches in the rear if the safety func‐ tion is switched on. Press the button to open the closed sun protection or to close the open sun pro‐ tection. Press button again to stop the movement. 109 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS When the button is pressed again, the sun pro‐ tection will move in the opposite direction. Additional information: Safety switch, refer to page 106. BMW Touch Command The front and rear sun protection can also be op‐ erated using BMW Touch Command. Actions during unlocking/locking If the vehicle is locked from the outside, the rear sun protection is automatically closed. When the vehicle is unlocked, the sun protection automatically moves into the position where it was prior to locking. 1. Close all doors. 2. Push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold. The glass sunroof closes with limited jam protection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐ cific threshold, closing is interrupted. 3. Push the switch forward again past the resist‐ ance point and hold until the glass sunroof closes without jam protection. Make sure that the closing path is clear. Closing from the lifted position without jam protection In case of danger from the outside or if icing might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐ lows: Jam protection system Concept The jam protection prevents objects or body parts from becoming jammed between the roof and glass sunroof while the glass sunroof is clos‐ ing. General information If a resistance or blockage is detected while the glass sunroof is closing, the closing operation is interrupted once the roof reaches the half-open position, or it is stopped when closing from the tilted position. Closing from the open position without jam protection In case of danger from the outside or if icing might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐ lows: 1. Close all doors. 2. Push the switch forward past the resistance point and hold. Initializing after a power interruption General information After a power interruption during the opening or closing process, the glass sunroof can only be operated to a limited extent. Initializing the sys‐ tem can help in this case. The system can be initialized under the following conditions: ▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. ▷ The vehicle will not be moved until the initiali‐ zation is completed. ▷ The drive-ready state is established. ▷ The outside temperature is above 41 ℉/5 ℃. During initialization, the glass sunroof closes without jam protection. 110 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Opening and closing CONTROLS Make sure that the closing path is clear. Initializing the system Press the switch up and hold it until the initialization is complete: Initialization begins within 15 seconds. ▷ If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then closes again. ▷ If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes, then opens and closes again. Initialization is complete once the glass sunroof and sun protection have opened then closed again. 111 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Sitting safely An ideal seat position that meets the needs of the occupants can make a vital contribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In the event of an accident, the correct seat posi‐ tion plays an important role. Follow the informa‐ tion in the following chapters. Additional information: ▷ Seats, refer to page 112. ▷ Safety belts, refer to page 117. ▷ Head restraints, refer to page 119. ▷ Airbags, refer to page 183. Safety information Warning Seat setting while driving can lead to unex‐ pected movements of the seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. Warning With a backrest inclined too far to the rear, the protective effect of the safety belt can no lon‐ ger be ensured. There is a risk of sliding under the safety belt in an accident. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the most upright position as possible and do not adjust again while driving. Warning There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of move‐ ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐ ment. Front seats General information The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored for the driver profile currently used. When a driver profile is selected, the stored position is called up automatically. The current seat position can be stored using the memory function. 112 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Overview Seat tilt 1 Thigh support Tilt switch up or down. CONTROLS 2 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt Backrest tilt 3 Upper backrest 4 Backrest width 5 Lumbar support 6 Backrest tilt, head restraint Longitudinal direction Tilt switch forward or backward. Thigh support Press switch forward or backward. Height Press switch forward or backward. Lumbar support Principle Press switch up or down. The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐ justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region 113 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright sitting position. Adjusting Adjusting ▷ Press the front/rear section of the button: The curvature is increased/ decreased. ▷ Press the upper/lower section of the button: The curvature is shifted up/ down. ▷ Press the front section of the button: The upper backrest is inclined forward. ▷ Press the rear section of the button: The upper backrest is inclined backward. Backrest width Principle Adjusting the backrest width may improve lateral support when taking corners. Front passenger seat functionality Principle General information The backrest width is changed by adjusting the side sections of the backrest. The front passenger seat can be adjusted with the switches of the driver's seat, for instance to increase the legroom in the rear. To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle, the backrest width temporarily opens fully. If needed, the memory position for the front pas‐ senger seat can be stored. Adjusting Overview ▷ Press the front section of the button: The backrest width de‐ creases. ▷ Press the rear section of the button: The backrest width increases. Upper backrest Front passenger seat functionality Principle The upper backrest supports the back in the shoulder region. A correct setting leads to a re‐ laxed seat position and reduces strain on the shoulder muscles. 114 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Overview Turning on 1. CONTROLS Press the button. The LED lights up. 2. Adjust the front passenger seat on the driv‐ er's seat. 3. If needed, store the memory position for the front passenger seat. Turning off Press and hold button until LED goes out. The function deactivates itself automatically after some time. 1 Resetting to standard position 2 Head restraint, upper backrest 3 Lumbar support 4 Folding the footrest out/in BMW Touch Command 5 Forward/backward, seat tilt The front passenger seat can also be operated using BMW Touch Command. 6 Backrest tilt Rear seats Resetting to standard position 7 Adjust front passenger seat General information The seat setting switches are located on the center armrest of the rear seats. If the safety switch is pressed, the seats cannot be adjusted. Additional information: Safety switch, refer to page 106. Safety information Warning There is a risk of jamming when folding down the center armrest in the rear. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of the center armrest is clear during folding down. Press the button to reset to standard position. The process is canceled if the button is pressed again. Upper backrest Principle The upper backrest supports the back in the shoulder region. A correct setting leads to a re‐ laxed seat position and reduces strain on the shoulder muscles. 115 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS Adjusting Adjusting Press the upper or lower section of the button. Longitudinal direction Press switch forward or backward. Lumbar support Principle The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐ justed in a way that it supports the lumbar region of the spine. The lower back and the spine are supported for upright sitting position. Press switch forward or backward. Seat tilt Adjusting ▷ Press the front/rear section of the button: The curvature is increased/ decreased. ▷ Press the upper/lower section of the button: The curvature is shifted up/ down. Folding the footrest out/in Tilt switch up or down. Backrest tilt General information The distance between the front passenger seat and the rear seat must be sufficiently large to un‐ fold the footrest on the backrest of the front pas‐ senger seat. Tilt switch forward or backward. 116 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Adjusting the front passenger seat from the rear Principle The front passenger seat can be operated from the rear, for instance to increase the legroom in the rear. General information The switch for adjusting the upper backrest can be used to set the angle of the screen in the rear on the passenger side. Adjusting CONTROLS only unfold their protective effect when adjusted correctly. Always make sure that safety belts are being worn by the occupants before driving off. The airbags supplement the safety belts as an addi‐ tional safety device. The airbags do not replace safety belts. All belt fastening points are designed to achieve the best possible protective effect of the safety belts with proper use of the safety belts and cor‐ rect seat setting. Notes on sitting safely, refer to page 112. The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear seats are intended for the persons sitting on the left and right. The center safety belt buckle of the rear seats is intended for the person sitting in the middle. Safety information Warning 1. Press the button. 2. Adjust the front passenger seat, for instance forward/back. 3. Press the button to deactivate the function. Use of a safety belt to buckle more than one person will potentially defeat the ability of the safety belt to serve its protective function. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not allow more than one person to wear a single safety belt. Infants and children are not allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be transported and secured in designated child restraint sys‐ tems. The function deactivates itself automatically after some time. BMW Touch Command The rear seats can also be operated via BMW Touch Command. Safety belts General information Warning The protective effect of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐ ries, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all occu‐ pants are wearing safety belts correctly. The vehicle is fitted with four or five safety belts to ensure occupants' safety. However, they can 117 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Buckling the safety belt Warning With a rear backrest that is not locked, the pro‐ tective effect of the middle safety belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. If you are using the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest. 1. Guide the safety belt slowly over shoulder and hip to put it on. 2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must engage audibly. Warning The protective effect of safety gear, including safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail in the following situations: ▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are damaged, soiled, or changed in any other way. ▷ Seat belt tensioners or belt retractors were modified. Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in the event of an accident. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not modify safety belts, safety belt buckles, seat belt tensioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and keep them clean. Have the safety belts checked after an accident at the dealer’s service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop. When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and front passenger's belt straps are automatically tightened once after driving away. Unbuckling the safety belt 1. Hold the safety belt firmly. 2. Press the red button in the safety belt buckle. 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up mechanism. Belt loop Correct use of safety belts ▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to your body over your lap and shoulders. ▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips over your lap. The safety belt may not press on your stomach. ▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or fragile objects. ▷ Avoid thick clothing. When fastening the safety belts on the rear seats, make sure that the belt loop is closed. ▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently upward around your upper body. 118 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat Icon CONTROLS Description Green: the safety belt is buckled on the corresponding rear seat. General information The safety belt reminder is issued when the driv‐ er's safety belt is not buckled. The safety belt reminder is also active when the front passenger seat belt is not buckled or ob‐ jects are on the front passenger seat. Red: the safety belt is not buck‐ led on the corresponding rear seat. The safety belt reminder is also activated when a passenger unbuckles a safety belt during the trip. Display in the instrument cluster The indicator light lights up and a signal sounds. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. The safety belt reminder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat. Safety mode Safety belt reminder for rear seats If the belt tension does not loosen automatically, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐ ing the red button in the safety belt buckle. Fas‐ ten the safety belt before continuing on your trip. General information The safety belt reminder is automatically acti‐ vated each time the engine starts. In critical driving situations, for instance during emergency braking, the front safety belts tighten automatically. If the driving situation passes without an accident occurring, the belt tension relaxes. Front head restraints The safety belt reminder is also activated when a passenger unbuckles a rear seat safety belt dur‐ ing the trip. General information Display in the instrument cluster The current head restraint position can be stored using the memory function. The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu‐ minates after the engine is started. Safety information The displays may vary depending on the equip‐ ment version and country variant. Warning Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re‐ straints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. 119 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS ▷ Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats. Adjusting the height ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐ ports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible. ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐ straint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed. Press switch up or down. Warning Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint. If the vehicle is equipped with Executive Lounge Seating: the height of the head restraint on the front passenger side cannot be adjusted. Adjusting the distance: manual head restraints Warning Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐ tective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers. ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint. ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐ termined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint. ▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving. Active head restraint In the event of a rear-end collision with a certain severity, the active head restraint automatically reduces the distance from the head. Have the active head restraint checked and if necessary replaced in the case of damage or if it was exposed to an accident. ▷ Back: press the button and push the head re‐ straint toward the rear. ▷ Forward: pull the head restraint toward the front. After setting the distance, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly. Adjusting the distance: power head restraints The head restraint is automatically repositioned when the upper backrest is adjusted. 120 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Adjusting the side extensions CONTROLS Warning Body parts can be jammed when moving the head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement is clear when moving the head restraint. Warning Fold the side extensions on the head restraint forward for increased lateral support in the rest‐ ing position. Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro‐ tective effect in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers. ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes hangers, directly on the head restraint. Removing The head restraints cannot be removed. Rear head restraints ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐ termined to be safe for attachment to a head restraint. ▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance pillows, while driving. Safety information Folding down the center head restraint Warning Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re‐ straints can cause injuries in the head and neck area. There is a risk of injury. ▷ Before driving, install the removed head restraints on the occupied seats. To improve the view to the rear, the center head restraint can be folded to the rear. Only push the head restraint down if no one will be sitting in the center seat. ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐ ports the back of the head at as close to eye level as possible. ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐ straint is as close as possible to the back of the head. Adjust the distance via the backrest tilt as needed. ▷ To the rear: press the button, arrow 1, and fold the head restraint backward. ▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the front as far as it will go. Make sure that the head restraint engages correctly. 121 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS Adjusting the height: manual head restraints Adjusting the side extensions The height of the outer head restraints can be adjusted. Fold the side extensions on the head restraint forward for increased lateral support in the rest‐ ing position. ▷ To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and push the head restraint down. Removing ▷ To raise: push the head restraint up. The head restraints cannot be removed. After setting the height, make sure that the head restraint engages correctly. Cushions for head restraints in the rear Adjusting the height: power head restraints Only use the pillow when the vehicle is switched off. General information 1. Pull the upper tab through the loop on the top of the head restraint. The height adjustment of the head restraint is deactivated when the safety switch for the rear windows has been pressed. Additional information: Safety switch, refer to page 106. Switches in the vehicle 2. Close both pushbuttons. Push the switch in the center armrest up or down. 122 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel 3. Move the head restraint into the topmost po‐ sition. CONTROLS Overview 4. Close the pushbutton on the lower tab and the pushbutton on the bottom of the head re‐ straint. 1 Adjusting 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 3 Folding in and out Exterior mirrors Adjusting electrically General information The selected mirror moves along with the button movement. The mirror on the front passenger side is more curved than the driver's side mirror. The mirror setting is stored for the driver profile currently in use. When a driver profile is selected, the stored position is called up automatically. The current exterior mirror position can be stored using the memory function. Safety information Warning Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than they appear. The distance to the road users be‐ hind could be incorrectly estimated, for in‐ stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic behind by looking over your shoulder. Press the button. Selecting a mirror To change over to the other mirror: Slide the switch. Malfunction In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror glass. Folding in and out NOTICE Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle can be damaged in car washes. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Before washing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button. Press the button. Folding is only possible up to a speed of approx. 15 mph/20 km/h. 123 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ In the mirror glass. ▷ On the rear of the mirror. ▷ In car washes. Overview ▷ On narrow roads. Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐ matically at a speed of approx. 25 mph/40 km/h. Automatic heating Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated as needed and when the drive-ready state is switched on. Automatic dimming feature The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐ matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior mir‐ ror are used to control this. Automatic Curb Monitor Principle If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on the front passenger side is tilted downward. This improves your view of the curb and other low-ly‐ ing obstacles when parking, for instance. Functional requirements ▷ Keep the photocells clean. ▷ Do not cover the area between the interior mirror and the windshield. Rear vanity mirror Folding down Activating 1. slide the switch to the driver's side mirror position. 2. Engage selector lever position R. Deactivating Slide the switch to the front passenger's side mirror position. Interior mirror Press the vanity mirror. The vanity mirror folds down. The angle can be adjusted by hand. Folding in General information Press the vanity mirror up. The interior mirror is dimmed automatically. Photocells are used for control: 124 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Steering wheel Safety information CONTROLS Steering wheel heating Overview Warning Steering wheel adjustments while driving can lead to unexpected steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is stationary only. Electric steering wheel adjustment Button for steering wheel heating Turning on/off General information Press the button. The steering wheel adjustment is stored for the driver profile currently in use. When a driver pro‐ file is selected, the position is accessed automat‐ ically when the drive-ready state is switched on. A Check Control message is displayed. The current steering wheel position can be stored using the memory function. If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes after an intermediate stop, the steering wheel heating turns on automatically if the function was turned on at the completion of the last trip. To make it easier to enter and exit the vehicle, the steering wheel moves temporarily into the upper position. Memory function Adjusting Principle The following settings can be stored and, if nec‐ essary, retrieved using the memory function: ▷ Seat position. ▷ Exterior mirror position. ▷ Steering wheel position. ▷ Height of the Head-up Display. General information Press the switch to adjust the forward/back posi‐ tion and height of the steering wheel to the seat position. Two memory locations with different settings can be set for each driver profile. The following settings are not stored: ▷ Backrest width. ▷ Lumbar support. ▷ Footrest. 125 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Safety information Rear Warning Using the memory function while driving can lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel movements. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the memory function when the vehicle is stationary. Warning There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of move‐ ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐ ment. The memory buttons are located on the rear doors. Storing 1. Set the desired position. 2. Overview Press the button. The writing on the button lights up. 3. Press desired button 1 or 2 while the LED is lit. A signal sounds. Front Calling up settings Press the desired button 1 or 2. The stored position is called up. The procedure stops when a switch for setting the seat is pressed or one of the memory but‐ tons is pressed again. The memory buttons are located on the front doors. The adjustment of the seat position on the driv‐ er's side is interrupted after a short time while driving. BMW Touch Command The memory function can also be operated on the front passenger seat and in the rear via BMW Touch Command. Executive Lounge Seating Principle The Executive Lounge Seating function offers maximum legroom and increased traveling com‐ 126 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel fort to the rear passenger on the passenger's side. CONTROLS Turning on Press the button. General information The following settings are applied automatically on system activation: Resetting to standard position ▷ The front passenger seat moves forward and adjusts the height, if necessary. ▷ The backrest and head restraint of the front passenger seat are inclined forward. ▷ The tilt of the screen in the rear is adjusted to the backrest tilt of the front passenger seat. ▷ The footrest on the backrest of the front pas‐ senger seat folds out. ▷ The backrest reclines to the back. The adjusted end position can be manually ad‐ justed and if required stored using the memory function. Safety information Warning If the front passenger seat is set too far forward, the view of the exterior mirror on the front pas‐ senger side may be limited. There is a risk of accident. Adjust the front passenger seat such that the view on the exterior mirror is not ob‐ structed. Press the button to reset to standard position. The process is canceled if the button is pressed again. Massage function Principle Depending on the program, the massage func‐ tion ensures relaxed muscles and better blood circulation and can avoid fatigue. General information Eight different massage programs can be se‐ lected: Overview ▷ Hip activation. ▷ Upper-body activation. ▷ Whole body activation. ▷ Back massage. ▷ Shoulder massage. ▷ Lumbar massage. ▷ Upper body training. ▷ Whole-body exercise. Executive Lounge Seating 127 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Overview 3. "Seat comfort" 4. Select desired seat. Front 5. "Seat massage" 6. Select the desired setting. Seat and armrest heating Principle The system heats seats and armrests as needed. Massage function General information Seat heating can also be used without armrest heating. Deactivate the armrest heating as needed. Rear Overview Front Massage function Turning on Press the button once for each intensity level. The maximum intensity level is reached when three LEDs are lit. Seat and armrest heating Rear Turning off Press and hold the button until the LEDs turn off. Adjusting the massage program 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 128 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel Seat and armrest heating CONTROLS 5. Select desired seat. 6. "Heat armrests with seat" Turning on Press the button once for each temper‐ ature level. The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes after a stop, seat and armrest heating is switched on automatically with the temperature selected last. When ECO PRO is activated, the heating output is reduced. Active seat ventilation Principle Integrated fans in the seat and armrest areas provide a comfortable seat temperature. Overview Front Additional information: ECO PRO, refer to page 329. Turning off Press and hold the button until the bar display on the climate control display goes out. Active seat ventilation Seat heating distribution The heating effect in the seat cushion and the seat backrest can be distributed in different ways. Rear 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" 4. Select the desired menu item. 5. Select desired seat. 6. Press the Controller and turn it to set the seat heating distribution. Active seat ventilation Switching armrest heating on/off Turning on 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Press the button once for each ventila‐ tion level. 3. "Climate control" 4. "Seat and armrest heating" 129 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS The maximum temperature is reached when three LEDs are lit. Activate/deactivate The ventilation switches back by one level after a short time. 2. "Settings" 1. "CAR" 3. "Climate control" 4. If necessary, "Automate habits" Turning off Press and hold the button, until the LEDs turn off. 5. Select the desired function. 6. Activate the desired rule. 7. Set the level. Climate control rules Principle Depending on the equipment, some heating and cooling functions can be automatically activated depending on the outside temperature. General information The outside temperature at which the functions are to be automatically activated can be set via iDrive. Activation is performed if the outside tempera‐ ture exceeds or falls below the set temperature in the first few minutes after drive-ready state has been switched on. A new alignment is car‐ ried out after the settings have been changed. Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐ lowing functions can be automatically activated: ▷ Seat heating. ▷ Steering wheel heating ▷ Seat ventilation. If the trip is continued within approx. 15 minutes after a stop, the functions are activated automati‐ cally with the levels that were last selected. Functional requirement Drive-ready state is switched on. 130 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Transporting children safely CONTROLS Transporting children safely Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. The right place for children Safety information Warning A heated vehicle may result in death to per‐ sons, especially children, or animals. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave per‐ sons, especially children, or animals unattended in the vehicle. Warning Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child restraint systems and their components to be‐ come very hot. Persons may sustain burn inju‐ ries when touching the hot components. There is a risk of injury. Do not expose the child re‐ straint system to direct sunlight or cover where necessary. If necessary, let the child restraint system cool down before transporting a child. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. Warning Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: Transport children in the rear seat ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. General information ▷ Releasing the parking brake. Accident research shows that the safest place for children is in the rear seat. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ dows. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ing and lock the vehicle. Children younger than 13 years of age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported in the rear seat in suitable child restraint systems de‐ signed for the age, weight and size of the child. Children 13 years of age or older must wear a safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint system can no longer be used due to their age, weight, or size. 131 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Transporting children safely Installing child restraint systems Safety information Warning The safety belt cannot be fastened correctly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm without suita‐ ble additional child restraint systems. The pro‐ tective effect of safety gear, including safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause additional injuries, for in‐ stance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Secure children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable child restraint systems. Children on the front passenger seat General information Before using a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, ensure that the front, knee, and side airbags on the front passenger side are de‐ activated. Additional information: For automatic deactivation of front passenger airbags, refer to page 186. General information Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐ ating and safety information of the child restraint system manufacturer when selecting, installing, and using child restraint systems. Safety information Warning The protective effect of child restraint systems and their fastening systems which have been damaged or exposed to an accident can be lim‐ ited or lost. A child cannot be properly re‐ strained in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not use child restraint systems which have been damaged or exposed to an accident. If a child restraint system and its fastening sys‐ tem has been damaged or exposed to an acci‐ dent, have these systems checked and re‐ placed by the dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Safety information Warning Warning Active front passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front passenger airbags are deacti‐ vated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. The stability of the child restraint system is lim‐ ited or compromised with incorrect seat setting or improper installation of the child seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest tilt for all affected backrests and cor‐ rectly adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and backrests are securely engaged or locked. If possible, adjust the height of the head re‐ straints or remove them. 132 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Transporting children safely On the front passenger seat CONTROLS Child seat security Deactivating airbags Warning Active front passenger airbags can injure a child in a child restraint system when the airbags are activated. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the front passenger airbags are deacti‐ vated and that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up. Before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, make sure that the front, knee and side airbags on the front passenger side are deactivated. Additional information: For automatic deactivation of front passenger airbags, refer to page 186. Seat position and height After installing a child restraint system, move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go and, if possible, bring it up to the highest position. This seat position and height ensure the best possible position for the belt and offers optimal protection in the event of an accident. If the upper attachment point of the safety belt is located in front of the belt guide of the child seat, move the front passenger seat carefully forward until the best possible belt guide position is reached. Backrest width Adjustable backrest width: before installing a child restraint system in the front passenger seat, open the backrest width completely. Do not change the backrest width again and do not call up a memory position. The safety belts in the rear and the front passen‐ ger safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐ ten child restraint systems. Locking the safety belt 1. Pull out the belt strap completely. 2. Secure the child restraint system with the safety belt. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull it tight against the child restraint system. The safety belt is disabled. Unlocking the safety belt 1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle. 2. Remove the child restraint system. 3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐ pletely. LATCH child seat mountings General information LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Children. Pay attention to the specifications and the oper‐ ating and safety information from the child re‐ straint system manufacturer when selecting, in‐ stalling, and using LATCH child restraint fixing systems. 133 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Transporting children safely Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors General information The lower anchors may be used to attach the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child is restrained by the internal harnesses. Safety information Position Icon Meaning The corresponding icon shows the mounts for the lower LATCH anchors. Seats equipped with lower mountings are marked with a pair, (2), of LATCH symbols. For vehicles equipped with a middle seat: Warning If the LATCH child restraint fixing systems are not correctly engaged, the protective effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing system is lim‐ ited. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that the lower mountings are se‐ curely engaged and that the LATCH child re‐ straint fixing system fits securely against the backrest. Warning The attachment points for child restraint sys‐ tems in the vehicle are intended for attaching child restraint systems only. When other ob‐ jects are mounted, the attachment points can be damaged. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Attach only child restraint systems at the corresponding attachment points. It is not recommended to use the inner lower mountings of standard outer LATCH positions to fasten a child restraint system on the middle seat. Use the ve‐ hicle safety belt instead for the middle seat. Before installing LATCH child restraint fixing systems Pull the safety belt away from the area of the child seat mountings. Without comfort rear seats: assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐ er's information. 2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ erly engaged. With comfort rear seats: assembly of LATCH child restraint fixing systems 1. Before mounting, adjust the seats to their ba‐ sic position. Reset to standard position, refer to page 115. 2. For better accessibility, tilt the backrest back slightly. 134 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Transporting children safely 3. Install child restraint system, see manufactur‐ er's information. 4. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐ erly engaged. Attachment points Icon Meaning The respective icon shows the attachment point for the upper retaining strap. Seats with an upper top tether are marked with this icon. It is located on the rear seat backrest, the rear shelf or the rear seat. 5. After mounting, move the backrest back up slightly so that the child restraint system rests lightly against the backrest. Child restraint systems with tether strap Safety information CONTROLS Routing the retaining strap Warning If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used for the child restraint system, the protective ef‐ fect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap does not run over sharp edges and is not twisted as it passes the upper anchor. 1 Driving direction 2 Head restraint Warning 3 Hook for upper retaining strap If the rear backrest is not locked, the protective effect of the child restraint system is limited or there is none. In certain situations, for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an accident, the rear backrest can fold forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that the rear backrests are locked. 4 Attachment point 5 Rear shelf 6 Seat backrest 7 Upper retaining strap Attaching the upper retaining strap to the attachment point 1. Open the attachment point cover. Warning The attachment points for child restraint sys‐ tems in the vehicle are intended for attaching child restraint systems only. When other ob‐ jects are mounted, the attachment points can be damaged. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Attach only child restraint systems at the corresponding attachment points. 2. Raise the head restraint. 3. Guide the upper retaining strap between the supports or along both sides of the head re‐ straint to the attachment point. For the middle seat, guide it over or along both sides of the head restraint to the attach‐ ment point where applicable. 135 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Transporting children safely CONTROLS 4. Hook the hook of the retaining strap to the at‐ tachment point. 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it down. 6. Lower and engage head restraints as needed. Locking the doors and windows in the rear General information In certain situations it may be advisable to secure the rear doors and windows, for instance when transporting children. Doors Push the locking lever on the rear doors up. The door can now be opened from the outside only. Safety switch for the rear Press the button on the driver's door. This disables various functions so that they can‐ not be operated from the rear. Additional information: Safety switch, refer to page 106. 136 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving CONTROLS Driving Vehicle features and options Auto Start/Stop function This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. The system switches off the engine during a stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on. The en‐ gine starts automatically for driving off. Start/Stop button Principle Pressing the Start/Stop button switches drive-ready state on or off. Drive readiness is switched on when you depress the brake pedal while pressing the Start/Stop button. Principle Additional information: Coasting, refer to page 331. General information After each engine start using the Start/Stop but‐ ton, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready. The function is activated from speeds of approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Depending on the selected driving mode, the system is automatically activated or deactivated. Engine stop Functional requirements Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches the drive-ready state back off and standby state is switched back on. Steptronic transmission Additional information: ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position D. ▷ Drive-ready state, refer to page 40. ▷ Standby state, refer to page 40. Driving away 1. Turn on drive readiness. 2. Apply gear position. The engine is switched off automatically during a stop under the following conditions: ▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while the vehicle is stationary or the vehicle is held by Automatic Hold. ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the driv‐ er's door is closed. 3. Release the parking brake. Manual engine stop 4. Drive away. If the engine was not switched off automatically when the vehicle stopped, the engine can be switched off manually: 137 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving CONTROLS ▷ Depress the brake pedal forcefully again from the current pedal position. ▷ The outside temperature is high and auto‐ matic climate control is running. ▷ Engage selector lever position P. ▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated or cooled to the required level. When all functional preconditions are fulfilled, the engine switches off. Air conditioning system when the engine is switched off The air flow from the air conditioning system is reduced when the engine is switched off. Displays in the instrument cluster ▷ Where there is a risk of window condensation when the automatic climate control is switched on. ▷ Engine or other parts not at operating tem‐ perature. ▷ Engine cooling is required. ▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the steer‐ ing wheel is being turned. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. General information The display in the instrument cluster indicates that the Auto Start/Stop function is ready for an automatic engine start. ▷ At higher elevations. ▷ Hood is unlocked. ▷ The Automatic Parking Assistant is activated. ▷ Stop-and-go traffic. ▷ Selector lever position in N or R. The display indicates that the conditions for an automatic en‐ gine stop have not been met. ▷ After driving in reverse. ▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. Starting the engine Total time with switched-off engine ECO PRO driving mode: depend‐ ing on the vehicle equipment, the total time that the engine has been switched off using the Auto Start/Stop function is displayed on an automatic engine stop. Functional requirements Steptronic transmission The engine starts automatically under the follow‐ ing preconditions: ▷ By releasing the brake pedal. The total time can be reset via the trip data. ▷ When Automatic Hold is activated: step on the accelerator pedal. Additional information: Driving off ECO PRO, refer to page 329. After the engine starts, accelerate as usual. Functional limitations Safety mode The engine is not switched off automatically in the following situations: ▷ In case of a steep downhill grade. After the engine switches off automatically, it will not start again automatically if any one of the fol‐ lowing conditions are met: ▷ Brake not engaged strongly enough. 138 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving ▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is open. ▷ Hood was unlocked. Some indicator lights light up for a varied length of time. The engine can only be started via the Start/Stop button. System limits Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐ vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐ lowing situations: CONTROLS A message appears on the Control Display, depending on the situation. ▷ When a situation is detected in which the ve‐ hicle needs to drive off immediately, the en‐ gine is started automatically. The function may be restricted if the navigation data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐ ample. Activating/deactivating the system manually Principle ▷ In case of excessive warming of the interior when air conditioning is turned on. The engine is not automatically switched off. ▷ In case of excessive cooling of the interior when the heating is turned on. The engine is started during an automatic engine stop. ▷ In case of a risk of window condensation when the automatic climate control is turned on. Via button ▷ In case of a steering operation. ▷ When changing from gear lever position D to N or R. ▷ When changing from gear lever position P to N, D, or R. ▷ In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat‐ tery. ▷ When starting an oil level measurement. Additional functions Auto Start/ Stop Depending on the vehicle equipment and coun‐ try-specific version, the vehicle features a variety of sensors for assessing the traffic situation. The Auto Start/Stop function uses this information to adapt to various traffic situations in a proactive manner. Press the button. Via selector lever position or Driving Dynamics Control The Auto Start/Stop function is also deactivated in selector lever position M/S or in SPORT driv‐ ing mode of the Driving Dynamics Control. Display For instance, this applies to the following situa‐ tions: ▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is deactivated. ▷ When a situation is detected in which the stopping time is expected to be very short, the engine is not switched off automatically. ▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is ac‐ tivated. 139 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving CONTROLS Switching off the vehicle during an automatic engine stop ▷ Engine characteristics. ▷ Steptronic transmission. ▷ Adaptive chassis. General information During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle can be switched off permanently, for instance when leaving it. ▷ Air suspension. ▷ Active roll stabilization. ▷ Integral Active Steering. ▷ Display in the instrument cluster. Steptronic transmission ▷ Cruise control. 1. Press the Start/Stop button. ▷ Backrest width for comfort seats. ▷ Drive-ready state is switched off. ▷ Standby state is switched on. Overview ▷ Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐ matically. 2. Set the parking brake. Automatic deactivation General information In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop function is deactivated automatically for safety reasons, for instance if no driver is detected. Malfunction The Auto Start/Stop function no longer switches off the engine automatically. A Check Control message is displayed. It is possible to continue driving. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Displays in the instrument cluster The selected driving mode is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. Driving modes Buttons in the vehicle Driving Dynamics Control Principle The Driving Dynamics Control influences the driving dynamics properties of the vehicle. Button Driving mode Configuration The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the situation using various driving modes. SPORT SPORT INDIVIDUAL General information SPORT SPORT PLUS The following systems are affected, for instance: 140 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving Button Driving mode COMFORT COMFORT COMFORT COMFORT PLUS ECO PRO Configuration CONTROLS SPORT Principle The SPORT driving mode is a dynamic setting for more agility with an optimized suspension. INDIVIDUAL Turning on Press the button repeatedly until SPORT is displayed in the instrument ADAPTIVE cluster. When drive-ready state is switched on, the COMFORT driving mode is selected automati‐ cally. Driving modes in detail COMFORT Principle The COMFORT driving mode is a balanced set‐ ting between sporty and consumption optimized driving. SPORT INDIVIDUAL Principle In the SPORT INDIVIDUAL driving mode, individ‐ ual settings can be adjusted to support driving dynamics properties. Configuration 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driving mode" Turning on 4. "SPORT INDIVIDUAL" Press the button repeatedly until COM‐ FORT is displayed in the instrument cluster. 5. Select the desired setting. Reset SPORT INDIVIDUAL to the standard set‐ tings: "Reset to SPORT STANDARD". COMFORT PLUS SPORT PLUS Concept The COMFORT PLUS drive mode is an exten‐ sive comfortable setting for optimal travel com‐ fort. Switching on Press the button repeatedly until COM‐ FORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster. Principle The SPORT PLUS driving mode is a dynamic setting for maximum agility with an adjusted drive. Turning on Press the button repeatedly until SPORT PLUS is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster. 141 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving CONTROLS ECO PRO Switching on Concept In ECO PRO drive mode, consumption is opti‐ mized. Turning on Press the button repeatedly until ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument clus‐ Press the button. ADAPTIVE is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. INDIVIDUAL configuration General information ter. The last individual configuration is activated di‐ rectly when the driving mode is called up again. ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL Activating configuration of the drive mode Principle Press the button for the desired drive mode sev‐ eral times. In the ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL driving mode, indi‐ vidual settings can be adjusted to support an economical driving style. The engine control and comfort features, for in‐ stance the climate control output, are adjusted. Parking brake Principle The parking brake is used to prevent the vehicle from rolling when it is parked. Configuration 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Safety information 3. "Driving mode" 4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" Warning 5. Select the desired setting. "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD". An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing. ADAPTIVE In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard settings: ▷ Set the parking brake. Principle The ADAPTIVE driving mode is a balanced driv‐ ing mode that automatically adapts to the driving situation and driving style. If the navigation system is active, upcoming road sections are considered. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. 142 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving CONTROLS While driving Warning Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. General information To use as emergency brake while driving. Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle brakes hard while the switch is being pulled. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ ter illuminates red, a signal sounds, and the brake lights illuminate. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ dows. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ing and lock the vehicle. A Check Control message is displayed. The parking brake is engaged when the vehicle is stationary. With Emergency Stop Assistant Pull the switch briefly to activate the emer‐ gency stop function. Overview Additional information: Emergency Stop Assistant, refer to page 213. Releasing Releasing manually 1. Turn on drive readiness. 2. Parking brake Press the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set. The LED and indicator light turn off. The parking brake is released. Setting With a stationary vehicle Automatic release Pull the switch. The parking brake is released automatically when you drive away. The LED lights up. The LED and indicator light turn off. The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ ter illuminates red. The parking brake is set. 143 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Driving Automatic Hold Warning Principle Automatic Hold assists the driver by automati‐ cally setting and releasing the brake, such as when moving in stop-and-go traffic. Unattended children or animals in the vehicle can cause the vehicle to move and endanger themselves and traffic, for instance due to the following actions: The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary. ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. On uphill grades the system prevents the vehicle from rolling back when driving off. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ dows. ▷ Releasing the parking brake. ▷ Engaging selector lever position N. General information Under the following conditions, the parking brake is automatically engaged: ▷ Drive-ready state is switched off. ▷ The driver's door is opened while the vehicle is stationary. ▷ The moving vehicle is brought to a standstill using the parking brake. Safety information Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing. ▷ Using vehicle equipment. There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ hicle. Take the vehicle key with you when exit‐ ing and lock the vehicle. NOTICE If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold en‐ gages the parking brake and prevents the vehi‐ cle from rolling in a car wash. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Deactivate Automatic Hold prior to entering the car wash. Overview In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: ▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. Automatic Hold 144 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving Establishing operational readiness of Automatic Hold The LED goes out. The indicator light goes out. 1. Turn on drive readiness. 2. Press the button. The LED lights up. The indicator light lights up green. Automatic Hold is functional. After every vehicle restart, the last se‐ lected setting is active. Automatic Hold holding the vehicle Operational readiness is established and the driver's door is closed. After the brake is applied, the vehicle is kept from rolling as soon as the indicator light illuminates green. CONTROLS Automatic Hold is switched off. If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold, press additionally on the brake pedal, when switching off. Malfunction If the parking brake fails or in case of a fault, se‐ cure the vehicle against rolling before exiting. A Check Control message is displayed. Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in‐ stance with a wheel chock, after exiting the vehi‐ cle. After a power interruption Driving off To reestablish parking brake functionality after a power interruption: Press the accelerator pedal to drive off. 1. Turn on standby state. The brake is released automatically and the indi‐ cator light of the parking brake is no longer illumi‐ nated. 2. Activating the parking brake automatically The parking brake is automatically set if driveready state is switched off while the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle is exited. The indicator light changes from green to red. The parking brake is not set automatically, if the drive-ready state is switched off, while the vehi‐ cle is coasting to a halt. Automatic Hold is deacti‐ vated. Switching operational readiness off Press the button. Pull the switch while stepping on the brake pedal or selector lever position P is set and then push. This process may take a few seconds. Some mechanical sounds associated with this process are normal. The indicator light is no longer illumi‐ nated as soon as the parking brake is ready for operation again. Turn signal Turn signal in exterior mirror When driving and during operation of the turn signals or hazard warning system, do not fold in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights on the exterior mirror are easy to see. 145 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving CONTROLS Blinking The high beams light up when the low beams are switched on. ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2. Window wiper system General information Press the lever past the resistance point. Triple turn signal activation Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or cause them to become worn more quickly. Safety information Lightly tap the lever up or down. The triple turn signal duration can be adjusted. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Exterior lighting" 4. "One-touch turn signal" 5. Select the desired setting. Warning If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐ ers are folded in when switching on. Brief blinking Press the lever to the resistance point and hold it there for as long as you want the turn signal to flash. High beams, headlight flasher NOTICE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐ tor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property, among other poten‐ tial damage. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on. Press the lever forward or pull it backward. Turn on window wiper system ▷ High beams on, arrow 1. 146 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving Press the lever up until the desired position is reached. ▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0. ▷ Rain sensor, position 1. ▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2. ▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3. When the journey is interrupted with the window wiper system turned on: when the journey con‐ tinues, the wipers resume at their previous speed. CONTROLS Safety information NOTICE If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers can accidentally start moving in vehicle washes. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes. Activate rain sensor Turn off the window wiper system and flick wipe Press the lever up once from its 0 position, ar‐ row 1. Wiping operation is started. Press the lever down. ▷ Turn off: press the lever down until it reaches the 0 position. ▷ Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0 position. The lever automatically returns to its 0 posi‐ tion when released. The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated. In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not start. Deactivate rain sensor Press the lever back into the 0 position. Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity Rain sensor Principle The rain sensor automatically controls the time between wipes depending on the intensity of the rainfall. General information The sensor is located on the windshield, directly in front of the interior mirror. Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor. 147 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving CONTROLS Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity. Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity. Windshield washer system Safety information Fold-away position of the wipers Principle In the fold-out position, the wipers can be folded out from the windshield, which is important, for instance, when changing the wiper blades or for folding away under frosty conditions. Safety information Warning The washer fluid can freeze onto the window at low temperatures and obstruct the view. There is a risk of accident. Only use the washer sys‐ tems, if the washer fluid cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if needed. NOTICE When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, the wash pump cannot work as intended. There is a risk of damage to property, among other po‐ tential damage. Do not use the washer system when the washer fluid reservoir is empty. Cleaning the windshield Warning If the wipers start moving in the folded away state, body parts can be jammed or damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the vehicle is switched off when the wipers are in the folded away state and the wip‐ ers are folded in when switching on. NOTICE If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper mo‐ tor can overheat when switching on. There is a risk of damage to property, among other poten‐ tial damage. Defrost the windshield prior to switching the wipers on. Pull the lever. The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐ shield and activates the wipers briefly. Windshield washer nozzles The windshield washer nozzles are automatically heated while standby state is switched on. 148 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving Folding out the wipers CONTROLS Safety information 1. Turn on standby state. 2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, until the wipers stop in a close to vertical position. Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing, for instance with the parking brake. Selector lever positions Gear position D 3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the wind‐ shield. Selector lever position for normal driving. All gears for forward travel are activated automati‐ cally. R is reverse Engage selector lever position R only when the vehicle is stationary. Neutral N The vehicle may be pushed or roll without power, for instance in vehicle washes in selector lever position N. Folding down the wipers Parking position P 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐ shield. General information 2. Switch on standby state and press and hold the wiper lever down again. Selector lever position, for instance for parking the vehicle. The transmission blocks the individ‐ ual wheels in selector lever position P. Wipers return to their resting position and are ready again for operation. Steptronic transmission Engage selector lever position P only when the vehicle is stationary. P is engaged automatically Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ cally in situations such as the following: Principle The Steptronic transmission combines the func‐ tions of an automatic transmission with the pos‐ sibility of manual shifting, if needed. 149 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving CONTROLS ▷ After the drive-ready state is switched off and selector lever position R, D or M/S is en‐ gaged. ▷ After the standby state has been turned off when selector lever position N is engaged. 1. Fasten driver's safety belt. 2. Press and hold the button to release the se‐ lector lever lock. ▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the driver's door is opened, and the brake pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is stationary and selector lever position D, M/S or R is en‐ gaged. Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that selec‐ tor lever position P is set. Otherwise, the vehicle may begin to move. Also set parking brake. Additional information: Parking brake, refer to page 142. 3. Push the selector lever in the desired direc‐ tion, past a resistance point, if needed. The selector lever automatically returns to the center position when released. Engaging selector lever positions General information To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you select a gear position, maintain pressure on the brake pedal until you are ready to start. Functional requirements Only when the drive-ready state is switched on and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible to change from selector lever position P to another selector lever position. Engaging selector lever position P The selection lever position P cannot be changed until all technical requirements are met. Engaging selector lever position D, N, R A selector lever lock prevents the following faulty operation: ▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever posi‐ tion R. Press button P. ▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever po‐ sition P into another selector lever position. 150 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving CONTROLS Rolling or pushing the vehicle Sport program M/S General information Principle In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without its own power for a short distance, for instance in a car wash, or be pushed. The shifting points and shifting times in the Sport program are designed for sportier han‐ dling. The transmission, for instance shifts up later and the shifting times are shorter. Engaging selector lever position N Activating the Sport program NOTICE Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ gaged when standby state is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not switch standby state off in car washes. 1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing on the brake pedal. 2. If necessary, release the parking brake. 3. If necessary, switch off Automatic Hold. Automatic Hold, refer to page 144. 4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. Touch the selector lever lock and engage se‐ lector lever position N. 6. Switch off drive-ready state. In this way, standby state remains switched on, and a Check Control message is dis‐ played. The vehicle can roll. Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐ cally after approximately 35 minutes. If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to change the selector lever position. Press the selector lever to the left from selector lever position D. The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance S1. The sport program of the transmission is acti‐ vated. Ending the Sport program Press the selector lever to the right. D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Manual mode M/S Principle Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual mode. Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if needed. Kickdown Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving performance. Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the resist‐ ance point at the full throttle position. 151 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving CONTROLS Activating manual mode D is displayed in the instrument cluster. 1. Press the selector lever to the left from selec‐ tor lever position D, arrow 1. Shift paddles Principle The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow you to shift gears quickly while keeping both hands on the steering wheel. General information Shifting 2. Press the selector lever forward or pull it backward, arrows 2. The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and road speeds. Manual mode becomes active and the gear is changed. Short-term manual mode The engaged gear is displayed in the instrument cluster, for instance M1. Shifting ▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ ward. ▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rearwards. The transmission continues shifting automati‐ cally in certain situations, for instance when RPM limits are reached. Steptronic Sport transmission: prevent automatic upshifting in M/S manual mode Depending on the motorization: if driving mode SPORT is selected, the Steptronic Sport trans‐ mission does not automatically upshift in M/ S manual mode once the maximum speed is reached. In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐ down. Additional information: In selector lever position D, actuating a shift pad‐ dle switches into manual mode temporarily. After conservative driving in manual mode with‐ out acceleration or shifting via the shift paddles for a certain amount of time, the transmission switches back to automatic mode. It is possible to switch into automatic mode: ▷ Keep the right shift paddle pulled until D is displayed in the instrument cluster. ▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle, pull the left shift paddle. Continuous manual mode In selector lever position S, actuating a shift pad‐ dle switches into manual mode permanently. With the transmission version it is possible to switch into automatic mode: ▷ Keep the right shift paddle pulled until S is displayed in the instrument cluster. ▷ In addition to the pulled right shift paddle, pull the left shift paddle. Steptronic Sport transmission SPORT, refer to page 141. Ending the manual mode Press the selector lever to the right. With the appropriate transmission version, the lowest possible gear can be selected by simulta‐ neously activating kickdown and operating the 152 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving left shift paddles. This is not possible in shortterm manual mode. Shifting CONTROLS Engage selector lever position N Unlocking is possible, if the starter can crank the engine. 1. Press and hold down brake pedal. 2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter must audibly start. Hold the Start/Stop button pressed. 3. With your free hand, press the button on the selector lever, arrow 1, and press the selector lever into selector lever position N and hold, arrow N, until selector lever position N is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. ▷ Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle. A Check Control message is displayed. ▷ Shifting down: pull left shift paddle. ▷ Downshifting to the lowest possible gear: keep the left shift paddle pulled. The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ strument cluster, followed by the current gear. Displays in the instrument cluster The selector lever position is dis‐ played, for example P. 4. Release Start/Stop button and selector lever. 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter stops. 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous area and secure it against rolling away. Additional information: Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock General information Electronically unlock the transmission lock to maneuver vehicle from a hazardous area. Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling away. Tow-starting/towing, refer to page 387. Launch Control Principle Launch Control enables optimum acceleration on roads with good traction under dry surround‐ ing conditions. General information The use of Launch Control causes premature component wear since this function represents a very heavy load for the vehicle. Do not use Launch Control during the break-in. 153 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving CONTROLS Do not steer the steering wheel when driving off with Launch Control. Additional information: Breaking-in period, refer to page 322. Functional requirement Launch Control is available when the engine is at operating temperature. The engine is at operat‐ ing temperature after an uninterrupted trip of at least 6 miles/10 km. After using Launch Control To increase driving stability, activate DSC Dy‐ namic Stability Control again as soon as possible. System limits An experienced driver may be able to achieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode. Start with launch control 1. Turn on drive readiness. 2. Press the button. TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up. 3. Engage selector lever position S. 4. With the left foot, forcefully press down on the brake. 5. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal beyond the resistance point at the full throttle position, kickdown. A destination flag is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster. 6. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait briefly until the engine speed is constant. Keep the accelerator pedal in this position. 7. Release the brake within 3 seconds after the destination flag illuminates. The vehicle accelerates. Upshifting occurs automatically as long as the destination flag is displayed and the accelera‐ tor pedal is not released. Repeated use during a trip After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐ mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes before Launch Control can be used again. Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding con‐ ditions, when used again. 154 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays CONTROLS Displays Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Instrument cluster Overview 1 Fuel gauge 164 Range 167 2 Speedometer 3 Central display area 155 Navigation display Principle The instrument cluster is a variable display. When you change to a different program via Driv‐ ing Dynamics Control, the displays in the instru‐ ment cluster adapt to the respective driving mode. 4 Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten‐ tion Camera 5 Tachometer 164 Selection lists 170 Widgets 157 Trip odometer, see Trip data 171 General information ECO PRO displays 329 Depending on the vehicle equipment, it may be possible to deactivate the display change in the instrument cluster via iDrive. Power gauge 165 Some of the displays in the instrument cluster may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's Manual. Status, Driving Dynamics Control 140 Transmission display 149 6 Engine temperature 166 7 Outside temperature 166 8 Check Control 158 9 Speed Limit Assistant 235 Speed Limit Info 168 Time 63 Central display area Depending on the equipment and configuration, the following is displayed in the central display area of the instrument cluster: 155 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays CONTROLS ▷ Navigation displays such as the map view or, if destination guidance is active, a route pre‐ view with route guidance information. ▷ Displays showing service notifications. ▷ Assisted Driving View. Information about the assist systems is displayed in an animated surrounding area of the vehicle. Some displays in the central display area can be configured individually. The displays may vary depending on the equip‐ ment version and country variant. Driving mode view Principle Depending on the equipment, if the driving mode view is activated, the displays in the instrument cluster will adapt to the respective driving mode when a program is changed via the Driving Dy‐ namics Control. Activate/deactivate 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Displays" Assisted Driving View Principle Depending on the equipment, information about the driver assistance systems is displayed in an animated surrounding area of the vehicle when driver assistance is active. General information Depending on the settings, Assisted Driving View can be displayed permanently or tempora‐ rily with active driving assistance in the instru‐ ment cluster. Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. 4. "Driving mode view" Settings Settings Permanent display Individual displays in the instrument cluster can be configured individually. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 1. "CAR" 3. "Displays" 2. "Settings" 4. "Instrument panel" 3. "Displays" 5. "Central display area" 4. "Instrument panel" 6. "Assisted Driving View" 5. Select the desired setting. Temporary display 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Displays" 156 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays 4. "Instrument panel" ▷ Trip data. 5. "Display Assisted Driving View when Driver Assistance is active" ▷ Efficiency display. CONTROLS Selecting Display Example: the indicator/warning lights for the Ac‐ tive Cruise Control with Stop & Go function ACC and the Lane Change Assistant indicate a lane change to the next lane. At the same time, the lane change to the next lane is shown with ani‐ mation in the Assisted Driving View. Continue to press the button on the turn signal lever until the desired widget is selected. Display System limits The system's detection capability is limited. The system may indicate something wrong. Only objects that are detected by the system are taken into account. Additional information: ▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. G-meter ▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36. The G-meter indicates the forces that are ap‐ plied in longitudinal and transverse direction on the vehicle occupants while driving. Widgets Efficiency display Principle Displays for specific functions can be displayed in the instrument cluster. The following displays can be selected: ▷ Current entertainment source, e.g., radio. ▷ Torque and power. ▷ G-Meter. Principle Information about driving style and consumption can be displayed in the form of a consumption display as a widget in the instrument cluster, for example. General information Depending on the activated driving mode, differ‐ ent information will be displayed: 157 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays CONTROLS Driving mode Display General information COMFORT Average consumption. SPORT Current consumption. A Check Control message is displayed as a com‐ bination of indicator or warning lights and text messages in the instrument cluster and, if appli‐ cable, in the Head-up Display. Energy recovery. ECO PRO ECO PRO bonus range. In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and a text message may appear on the Control Display. Distance traveled in Coasting mode. Hiding Check Control messages Current consumption. Average fuel consumption The average consumption indicates the fuel con‐ sumption when driving a specific route. Current consumption The current consumption displays the current consumption of fuel. Check whether you are cur‐ rently driving in an efficient and environmentallyfriendly manner. Energy recovery During energy recovery, the kinetic energy of the vehicle is converted into electric energy in coast‐ ing overrun mode. The vehicle battery is partially charged and fuel consumption can be reduced. ECO PRO bonus range In the ECO PRO driving mode, the yielded exten‐ sion of the range as a result of fuel-efficient driv‐ ing is displayed as ECO PRO bonus range. Check Control Principle The Check Control system monitors functions in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the moni‐ tored systems. Press the button on the turn signal lever. Continuous display Some Check Control messages are displayed continuously and are not cleared until the fault is eliminated. If several faults occur at once, the messages are displayed consecutively. The messages can be hidden for approx. 8 sec‐ onds. After this time, they are displayed again automatically. Temporary display Some Check Control messages are hidden auto‐ matically after approx. 20 seconds. The Check Control messages are stored and can be dis‐ played again later. Displaying stored Check Control messages 1. "CAR" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control messages" 4. Select the text message. 158 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays CONTROLS Display General information Check Control The indicator/warning lights can light up in a vari‐ ety of combinations and colors. At least one Check Control message is displayed or stored. Text messages Text messages in combination with an icon in the instrument cluster explain a Check Control message and the meaning of the indicator/warn‐ ing lights. Supplementary text messages Additional information, such as the reason for a fault or the required action, can be called up via Check Control. With urgent messages the added text will be au‐ tomatically displayed on the Control Display. Depending on the Check Control message, fur‐ ther help can be selected. 1. "CAR" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Check Control messages" 4. Select the desired text message. 5. Select the desired setting. Messages after trip completion Several of the lights are checked for proper func‐ tioning and light up temporarily when drive-ready state is switched on. Red lights Safety belt reminder Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: safety belt on the driver or passenger side is not buckled. The safety belt re‐ minder can also be activated if objects are placed on the front passenger seat. Make sure that the safety belts are positioned correctly. Safety belt reminder for rear seats The safety belt is not buckled on the cor‐ responding rear seat. The displays may vary depending on the equipment version and country variant. Airbag system Airbag system and seat belt tensioner may not be working. Certain messages displayed while driving are dis‐ played again after drive-ready state is switched off. Have the vehicle checked immediately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Indicator/warning lights Parking brake The parking brake is set. Principle Additional information: Indicator/warning lights in the instrument cluster display the status of some functions in the vehi‐ cle and indicate when a fault is present in the monitored systems. For releasing the parking brake, refer to page 143. 159 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Displays Brake system Brake system impaired. Continue to drive moderately. Have the vehicle checked immediately by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Approach control warning with light braking function The indicator light is illuminated: pre‐ warning. Brake and increase distance. Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning. Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary. Additional information: Approach control warning with light braking func‐ tion, refer to page 188. Intersection collision warning The indicator light is illuminated: risk of collision with crossing vehicle. Indicator light is illuminated: risk of colli‐ sion with vehicle without detectable driv‐ ing direction or prewarning for vehicles that cross own driving direction. Intervene yourself, for instance by braking. Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver. Additional information: Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Mitigation, refer to page 197. Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detection An infrared camera scans the area in front of the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects pedestrians and animals on the street. The indicator light is illuminated: pre‐ warning. Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary. Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning. Immediate braking or evading maneuver. Additional information: Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐ tion, refer to page 199. Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal sounds: braking and evading. Additional information: Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning when vehicles cross own driving direction. Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, re‐ fer to page 227. Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if neces‐ sary. Steering Assistant Additional information: Intersection collision warning, refer to page 193. Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Mitigation Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal sounds: the system will be switched off. Additional information: Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to page 237. Indicator light flashes and an acoustic signal sounds: imminent collision with a detected person or a cyclist. 160 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays Drive power Reduced drive power due to an over‐ heated drivetrain. Additional information: Power gauge, refer to page 165. CONTROLS DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Control is activated DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated. Additional information: ▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 219. Yellow lights Steering Assistant The indicator light lights up and an acoustic signal may sound: a system in‐ terruption is imminent. The indicator warning light flashes: lane marking driven over. Additional information: ▷ DTC Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 221. Flat Tire Monitor FTM The FTM signals a tire pressure loss in a tire. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneuvers. Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to page 237. Additional information: Antilock Braking System ABS Tire pressure monitor The Brake Assistant function may not activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the longer braking distance into account. Have the system immediately checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. DSC Dynamic Stability Control The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and modify your driving style to the driving circumstances. The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐ tioned. Have the system immediately checked by a deal‐ er's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Additional information: DSC Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 219. Run-flat tires, refer to page 358. The indicator light illuminates: the Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low tire pres‐ sure or a flat tire. Follow the information in the Check Control message. The indicator light flashes and is then illuminated continuously: flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot be detected. ▷ Fault caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again. ▷ In the case of tires with special approval: the tire pressure monitor was unable to complete the reset. Reset the system again. ▷ A wheel without wheel electronics is mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop as needed. ▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 161 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays CONTROLS Additional information: Additional information: Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 351. Turn signal, refer to page 145. Steering system Parking lights Steering system may not be working. Parking lights are switched on. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐ ice center or repair shop. Parking lights/low beams, refer to page 176. Emissions Low beams ▷ The warning light lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐ cumstances: This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐ tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐ ously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter. Additional information: Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 378. Additional information: Low beams are switched on. Additional information: Parking lights/low beams, refer to page 176. Lane departure warning The indicator light lights up: the system is activated. Warnings can be issued. Additional information: Lane departure warning, refer to page 203. Automatic High Beam Assistant Automatic High Beam Assistant is switched on. High beams are switched on and off au‐ tomatically depending on the traffic situation. Green lights Safety belt reminder for rear seats The safety belt is buckled on the corre‐ sponding rear seat. The displays may vary depending on the equipment version and country variant. Additional information: Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to page 178. Automatic Hold Automatic Hold is activated. The vehicle is automatically held in place when it is stationary. Turn signal Turn signal switched on. Additional information: Unusually rapid blinking of the indicator light indicates that a turn signal bulb has Automatic Hold, refer to page 144. failed. 162 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays Manual Speed Limiter The indicator light lights up: the system is switched on. The indicator light flashes: the set speed limit has been exceeded. Additional information: CONTROLS Steering Assistant Indicator light lights up: the system sup‐ ports the driver in keeping the vehicle within the lane. Additional information: Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 223. Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to page 237. Cruise control Lane change assistant Indicator light is illuminated: the system is active. Additional information: Cruise control, refer to page 225. Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function The indicator light lights up: the system is switched on. Gray line for lane marking on the appro‐ priate side: system detected a lane change request. Lane change not cur‐ rently possible. Arrow symbol for lane change green: the system carries out a lane change. Arrow symbol for lane change gray: lane change not possible; functional require‐ ments not met. Additional information: Additional information: Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, refer to page 227. Lane change assistant, refer to page 243. Speed Limit Assistant Depending on the equipment, indicator light illuminates together with the icon for a cruise control system: Speed Limit As‐ sistant is active and detected speed limits can be applied manually for the displayed system. Indicator light illuminates: the detected speed limit can be applied with the SET button. As soon as the speed limit has been applied, a green checkmark is displayed. Extended Traffic Jam Assistant Indicator light is illuminated: the system is active. Additional information: Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 241. Blue lights High beams High beams are switched on. Additional information: Additional information: Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 235. High beams, refer to page 146. Drive power Reduced drive power due to a cold drive‐ train. 163 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays CONTROLS Additional information: Power gauge, refer to page 165. Fuel gauge Principle Gray lights The current fill level of the fuel tank is displayed. Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function General information Indicator light is illuminated: the system is interrupted. Indicator light flashes: the conditions are not adequate for the system to work or the sys‐ tem has been deactivated. Vehicle inclination may cause the display to vary. Additional information: Refueling, refer to page 334. Display An arrow next to the fuel pump symbol indicates the vehicle side on which the fuel filler flap is lo‐ cated. Additional information: Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, re‐ fer to page 227. The current range is displayed as numerical value. Steering Assistant Indicator light is illuminated: the system is ready. Additional information: Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to page 237. Extended Traffic Jam Assistant Indicator light is illuminated: the system is interrupted. Additional information: Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 241. White lights Extended Traffic Jam Assistant Indicator light is illuminated: the system is ready. Additional information: Assisted Driving Plus, refer to page 241. Indicator light in the instrument cluster The yellow indicator light illuminates, once the fuel reserve is reached. Tachometer General information Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect the engine. Activating/deactivating 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" 5. "Engine display" 6. "Tachometer" 164 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays When the setting for the driving mode view is ac‐ tivated, the activated tachometer is only shown in the COMFORT or SPORT driving mode. Power gauge CONTROLS pending on the available drive power, the range for POWER is adjusted automatically. If needed, icons in the power gauge indicate a reduction of the drive power. Example symbol Principle Description Reduced drive power due to a cold drivetrain. The display indicates the drive power available as a percentage of its total power. Reduced drive power due to an overheated drivetrain. Activate/deactivate 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Shift lights 3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel" Principle 5. "Engine display" 6. "Power meter" When the setting for the driving mode view is ac‐ tivated, the activated power gauge is only shown in the COMFORT driving mode. The Shift lights in the instrument cluster indicate the maximum shift point at which the best possi‐ ble acceleration can be achieved. General information Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐ ket version, the Shift lights are active in the M manual mode of the Steptronic Sport transmis‐ sion and with manual transmission. Display Functional requirement ▷ Depending on the equipment, either driving program SPORT or SPORT PLUS is acti‐ vated. Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the en‐ ergy recovered by coasting or when decelerat‐ ing, CHARGE. Pointer in the area of arrow 2: output in percent, POWER. Drive power The available drive power may be reduced due to certain factors, for instance a cold engine. De‐ ▷ Head-up display is switched off or the display of the Shift lights in the Head-up display is deactivated. Turning on/turning off Steptronic Sport transmission: 1. If applicable, select SPORT or SPORT PLUS driving mode. Press Driving Dynamics Control. 2. Activate the M manual mode of the transmis‐ sion. 165 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays CONTROLS Display Operating state of the vehicle, refer to page 39. Engine oil temperature Display ▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at the low temperature end. Drive at moderate RPM and vehicle speeds. Full Black Panel Display. Information about the driving style ▷ Normal operating tempera‐ ture: the pointer is in the mid‐ dle or in the lower half of the temperature display. ▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the tachometer. ▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of the temperature range. In addition, a Check Control message is displayed. ▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated fields indicate an increase in the speed. Additional information: ▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated fields indicate the upcoming shift moment. ▷ Arrow 3: the field lights up red. Do not wait any further to shift. When the maximum speed is reached, the entire display flashes red and the fuel supply is inter‐ rupted in order to protect the engine. Standby state and driveready state The lettering OFF in the instru‐ ment cluster indicates that driveready state is switched off and standby state is switched on. Coolant level, refer to page 375. Indicator light in the instrument cluster A red indicator light is displayed. Outside temperature General information If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a signal sounds. A Check Control message is displayed. There is an increased risk of ice on roads. The letters READY in the instru‐ ment cluster indicate that the drive readiness is turned on and the Auto Start/Stop function is ready to start the engine automat‐ ically. Additional information: 166 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays Safety information Display The current range is displayed as numerical value next to the fuel gauge. Warning Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃ there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on bridges or shady sections of the road. There is a risk of accident. Modify your driving style to the weather conditions at low temperatures. CONTROLS Service notifications Principle Range The function displays the service notifications and the corresponding maintenance scopes. Principle The range indicates the distance that can still be covered with the current full tank of fuel. General information The estimated range available with the remaining fuel is permanently displayed in the instrument cluster. With a low remaining range, a Check Control message is briefly displayed. With a sporty driv‐ ing style, for instance fast cornering, the engine function is not always ensured. The Check Control message appears continu‐ ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km. Safety information NOTICE General information After switching on drive-ready state, the instru‐ ment cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐ tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐ nance. A service advisor can read out the current serv‐ ice notifications from your vehicle key. Some information on service notifications can also be shown on the BMW display key. Display Detailed information on service notifications More information on the type of service required may be displayed on the Control Display. 1. "CAR" With a driving distance of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐ sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Re‐ fuel promptly. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Required services" Maintenance work and legally mandated in‐ spections are displayed. 4. Select an entry to call up detailed information. 167 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays CONTROLS Steptronic transmission: displaying Symbols Sym‐ bols Description Suggestions to shift up or down are displayed in the instrument cluster. No service is currently required. The time for recommended mainte‐ nance or a legally mandated inspec‐ tion is approaching. On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the en‐ gaged gear is displayed. Example Description Efficient gear is set. Service interval is exceeded. Shift into efficient gear. Entering appointment dates Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐ spections. Speed Limit Info Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly. Speed Limit Info 1. "CAR" Principle 2. "Vehicle status" Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if necessary, the Head-up Display. 3. "Required services" 4. "Vehicle inspection" 5. "Date:" General information 6. Select the desired setting. The camera in the area of the interior mirror de‐ tects traffic signs at the edge of the road as well as overhead sign posts. Gear shift indicator Principle The gear shift indicator recommends the most efficient gear for the current driving situation. General information Depending on the design and country version, the gear shift indicator may be active in the M manual mode of the Steptronic transmission. Traffic signs with extra symbols are considered and compared with the vehicle's onboard data. The traffic sign will then be either displayed or ig‐ nored depending on the situation in the instru‐ ment cluster and the Head-up Display. With the navigation system, the system takes into account the information stored in the naviga‐ tion data and also displays speed limits present on routes without signs. Without a navigation system, the system is sub‐ ject to limitations imposed by technology. Traffic signs with speed limitations are detected and displayed only. Speed limitations due to entering or exiting towns, highway signs, etc. are not dis‐ 168 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays played. Speed limits with extra text characters are always displayed. Safety information CONTROLS Display Speed Limit Info Current speed limit. Without a navigation system the traffic signals are grayed out after curves or longer stretches of roadway. Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Depending on the equipment, Speed Limit Info not available. Overview Sensors The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Cameras behind the windshield. Additional information: Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. Displaying Speed Limit Info If the detected speed limit has been exceeded, the indicator light will flash. Settings 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" General information 3. "Driver Assistance" Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed Limit Info is displayed permanently in the instru‐ ment cluster or via iDrive. 4. If necessary, "Driving" Activating 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. If necessary, "Driving" 5. "Speed Limit Assistance" 6. "Speed limits" 7. "Show current limit" 5. "Speed Limit Assistance" 6. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Warn when speeding": activate/deacti‐ vate the flashing of the Speed Limit Info display in the instrument cluster and, where applicable, the Head-up Display when the currently valid speed limit is ex‐ ceeded. The warning that is issued when a speed limit is exceeded may depend on the Speed Limit Assistant settings. ▷ "Excess speed display": the speed limit that is detected by the Speed Limit Info is displayed with a marking in the speedom‐ eter in the instrument cluster. 169 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays CONTROLS System limits If necessary, the corresponding menu will open on the Control Display. System limits of the sensors Additional information: Display ▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional and may provide incorrect information in the following sit‐ uations: ▷ When traffic signs are fully or partially con‐ cealed by objects, stickers or paint. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. ▷ In the case of navigation data that is invalid, outdated or not available. ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐ tem. ▷ When roads differ from the navigation, such as due to changes in road layout. ▷ In case of electronic traffic signs. Depending on the equipment version, the list in the instrument cluster may differ from the illus‐ tration. Displaying and using the list The lists can be displayed and operated using the buttons on the steering wheel. Button Function ▷ When passing buses or trucks with traffic signs applied to them. Change the entertainment source. ▷ When the traffic signs do not correspond to the standard. Pressing the button again will close the currently displayed list. ▷ When traffic signs that are valid for a parallel road are detected. ▷ In the presence of country-specific road signs or road layouts. Show list of most recent tele‐ phone calls. Turn the thumbwheel to select the desired setting. Selection lists Press the thumbwheel to con‐ firm the setting. Concept The list of the current entertain‐ ment source can be displayed in the instrument cluster again by turning the thumbwheel. Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used for certain functions in the instrument cluster or the Head-up Display. ▷ Entertainment source. ▷ Current audio source. ▷ List of most recent telephone calls. 170 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays Trip data CONTROLS The following information is displayed: ▷ Total kilometers. ▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data. Principle Values for the trip, such as the average con‐ sumption or trip kilometers, are displayed. ▷ Distance traveled depending on the config‐ ured interval. ▷ Average speed. General information The trip data can be displayed on the Control Display and in the instrument cluster. The values can be displayed and reset depend‐ ing on various intervals, such as after refueling. Display on the Control Display Overview Selecting and setting widgets in the instrument cluster. Additional information: Widgets, refer to page 157. Adjusting the display of the trip data The intervals for the display of the trip data in the instrument cluster and on the Control Display are adjustable. The following information is displayed depending on the equipment and the set interval and driving mode: 1. "CAR" ▷ Configured interval for displaying trip data. 2. "Driving information" ▷ Average fuel consumption depending on the configured interval. 3. "Trip data" ▷ Average speed. 5. Select the desired setting: ▷ Total time for shut off engine through the Auto Start/Stop function. ▷ Distance traveled in Coasting mode. ▷ Consumption history in form of a chart. Displays 4. "Data since" ▷ "Start of trip ( )": the values are automati‐ cally reset approx. four hours after the ve‐ hicle has come to a standstill. ▷ "Refueling ( )": the values are automati‐ cally reset after refueling with a larger quantity of fuel. ▷ "Factory": Average consumption since delivery from the factory. 1. "CAR" 2. "Driving information" The values since the time of the factory delivery are displayed. 3. "Trip data" Consumption history The average consumption is shown in the con‐ sumption history in form of a chart based on the distance traveled and the driving mode. Display in the instrument cluster Depending on the equipment, information about the route can be displayed as widget in the in‐ strument cluster. ▷ "Individual ( )": the values since the last manual reset are displayed. The values can be reset at any time. Resetting average values manually The following interval can be reset manually at any time: "Individual ( )". 171 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Displays With the button on the turn signal lever: ▷ Torque. 1. Continue to press the button on the turn sig‐ nal lever until the widget for the trip data is selected. ▷ Power. Displays 1. "CAR" 2. "Driving information" 3. "Sport displays" Display in the instrument cluster The Sport displays can be displayed in form of widgets in the instrument cluster. The following widgets can be selected: 2. Press and hold the button on the turn signal lever. ▷ Widget for torque and power. Via iDrive: Additional information: 1. "CAR" Widgets, refer to page 157. ▷ Widget for G meter. 2. "Driving information" Vehicle status 3. "Trip data" 4. "Data since" 5. "Reset individual" General information The average values and counters are reset. Once the average values and counters have been reset, the following interval is automatically set: "Individual ( )". The status can be displayed and actions per‐ formed for several systems. Sport displays 2. "Vehicle status" Information at a glance Concept The Sport displays especially support a sporty driving style. Display on the Control Display Overview The following information is displayed: ▷ Boost pressure. ▷ Engine oil temperature. ▷ G-Meter. Going to the vehicle status 1. "CAR" Symbols Description "Flat Tire Monitor": status of the run-flat tires, refer to page 358. "Tire Pressure Monitor": status of the Tire Pressure Monitor, re‐ fer to page 351. "Engine oil level": electronic oil measurement, refer to page 372. 172 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays Symbols Description Display "Check Control messages": dis‐ playing stored Check Control messages, refer to page 158. Overview "Required services": displaying service notifications, refer to page 167. CONTROLS The following information is displayed on the Head-up Display: ▷ Vehicle speed. ▷ Navigation instructions. ▷ Check Control messages. Head-up Display ▷ Driver assistance systems. ▷ Sport displays. Principle The Head-up display projects important informa‐ tion in the driver's field of view, for instance the speed. The driver can get information without averting his or her eyes from the road. General information Follow the information on cleaning the Head-up Display. Overview ▷ Selection list in the instrument cluster. Some of this information is only displayed briefly as needed. Selecting displays in the Head-up Display 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-up display" 5. Select the desired setting. Setting the brightness The brightness is automatically adjusted to the ambient brightness. The base setting can be adjusted manually. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-up display" Turning on/off 5. "Brightness" 1. "CAR" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐ ness is set. 2. "Settings" 7. Press the Controller. 3. "Displays" When the low beams are switched on, the brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐ justed using the instrument lighting. 4. "Head-up display" 5. "Head-up display" 173 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Displays CONTROLS Adjusting the height ▷ "Off": the Sport displays are not dis‐ played in the Head-up Display. 1. "CAR" ▷ "In SPORT mode": the Sport displays are only displayed in SPORT driving mode. 2. "Settings" 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-up display" 5. "Height" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired height is reached. 7. Press the Controller. The height of the Head-up Display can also be stored using the memory function. ▷ "Always": the Sport displays are con‐ tinuously displayed in the Head-up Display. ▷ "Reduced height": if not all of the informa‐ tion is in the driver's field of vision, the in‐ formation can be displayed in the lower section of the Head-up Display. Visibility of the display Setting the rotation The Head-up Display view can be rotated. The visibility of the displays in the Head-up Dis‐ play is influenced by the following factors: 1. "CAR" ▷ Seat position. 2. "Settings" ▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Display. 3. "Displays" ▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters. 4. "Head-up display" ▷ Wet road. 5. "Rotation" ▷ Unfavorable light conditions. 6. Turn the Controller until the desired setting is selected. 7. Press the Controller. If the image is distorted, have the base settings checked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Additional settings Special windshield 1. "CAR" The windshield is part of the system. 2. "Settings" The shape of the windshield makes it possible to display a precise image. 3. "Displays" 4. "Head-up display" 5. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Speed Limit Assistance": access the set‐ tings for the speed assistant. ▷ "Display infotainment lists in": set up if the selection lists are displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster or the Head-up Display. A film in the windshield prevents double images from being generated. For this reason, it is strongly suggested to have the special windshield replaced by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop, if necessary. ▷ "Sport displays": display tachometer and shift Lights in the Head-up Display. 174 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Lights CONTROLS Lights Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Lights and lighting Switches in the vehicle Icon Function Automatic headlight control. Adaptive light functions. Low beams. Instrument lighting. Right roadside parking light. Left roadside parking light. Automatic headlight control Principle The low beams are switched on and off automat‐ ically depending on the ambient brightness, for example in tunnels, in twilight or if there is pre‐ cipitation. The light switch element is located next to the steering wheel. Icon General information A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can cause the lights to be turned on. Function Night vision. Activating Switch position: Lights off. Daytime driving lights. The indicator light in the instrument cluster is il‐ luminated when the low beams are switched on. Parking lights. System limits The automatic headlight control cannot replace your personal judgment of lighting conditions. 175 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Lights CONTROLS For example, the sensors are unable to detect fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn the lights on manually. Button Right roadside parking light on/off. Left roadside parking light on/off. Parking lights, low beams and roadside parking lights General information Position of switch: , , If the driver's door is opened when the driveready state is switched off, the exterior lighting is automatically switched off after a period of time. Function Welcome lights Principle The exterior lighting is switched on automatically when approaching or unlocking the vehicle. General information Parking lights Depending on the equipment, the exterior light‐ ing of the vehicle can be set individually. Switching on Position of switch: The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ ter lights up. Activating/deactivating welcome light 1. "CAR" The vehicle is illuminated on all sides. 2. "Settings" Do not use the parking lights for extended peri‐ ods; otherwise, they might drain the battery and it would then be impossible to switch on driveready state. 3. "Exterior lighting" 4. Depending on the equipment, select the fol‐ lowing setting: ▷ "Welcome and goodbye" When unlocking the vehicle, individual light functions are switched on for a lim‐ ited time. Low beams Switching on ▷ "Door handle lights" Position of switch: The low beams illuminate when drive-ready state is switched on. The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ ter lights up. Roadside parking lights Door handles and the ground in front of the doors are illuminated for a limited time. ▷ "Welcome Light Carpet" The area next to the vehicle is illuminated for a limited time. When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided roadside parking light can be switched on. 176 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Lights LED light carpet ▷ CONTROLS , ▷ Depending on the national-market version: The daytime driving lights light up when driveready state is switched on. Depending on the national-market version: after switching off the drive-ready state, the parking lights will illuminate in position . The light source is located in the position indi‐ cated. Keep the light source clean and unobstructed. Pathway lighting Activate/deactivate daytime driving lights In some countries, daytime driving lights are mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐ vate the daytime driving lights in front. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Exterior lighting" Principle For the illumination of the vehicle’s surroundings after exiting the vehicle, the exterior lighting can be switched on for a defined period of time. Switching pathway lighting on After switching off the drive-ready state, briefly push the turn signal lever forward. Setting the duration 1. "CAR" 4. Depending on country specifications: "Daytime driving lights" or "Daytime driving lights, rear" Adaptive light functions Principle Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumina‐ tion of the road. 2. "Settings" General information 3. "Exterior lighting" The adaptive light functions may consist of one system or multiple systems, depending on the equipment version: 4. "Pathway lighting" 5. Select the desired setting. 6. "OK" ▷ Adaptive Light Control. ▷ Cornering light. Daytime driving lights Activating General information The adaptive light functions are active when the drive-ready state is switched on. Switch position: Switch position: 177 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Lights CONTROLS Adaptive Light Control General information Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐ rameters, the light from the headlight follows the course of the road. To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adaptive Light Control does not swivel to the opposite lane when the vehicle is at a standstill. Automatic High Beam Assistant Principle The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects other road users early on and automatically switches the high beams on or off depending on the traffic situation. General information Cornering light Principle In tight curves, for instance on mountainous roads or when turning, an additional, cornering light is switched on that lights up the inside of the curve when the vehicle is moving below a certain speed. General information The cornering light is automatically switched on depending on the steering angle or, where appli‐ cable, the use of turn signals. The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures that the high beams are switched on, whenever the traffic situation allows. In the low speed range, the high beams are not switched on by the system. The system responds to light from oncoming traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to am‐ bient lighting, for instance in towns and cities. The high beams can be switched on and off manually at any time. Activate Automatic High Beam Assistant When driving in reverse, the cornering lights may be automatically switched on regardless of the steering angle. Adaptive headlight range control The adaptive headlight range control feature bal‐ ances out acceleration and braking processes as well as the vehicle load conditions in order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic. Switch position: Press the button on the turn signal lever. The indicator light in the instrument clus‐ ter is illuminated when the low beams are switched on. The headlights are automatically switched be‐ tween low beams and high beams. 178 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Lights The blue indicator light in the instrument cluster lights up when the system switches on the high beams. CONTROLS Functional requirements ▷ Setting at standstill only. ▷ Drive readiness is switched on. The Automatic High Beam Assistant is deacti‐ vated when manually switching the high beams on and off. ▷ Light is turned off. To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis‐ tant, press the button on the turn signal lever. Push the turn signal lever to the front for approxi‐ mately 10 seconds. Deactivate Automatic High Beam Assistant Increase sensitivity A Check Control message is displayed. The sys‐ tem responds more sensitively. Resetting the sensitivity Push the turn signal lever to the front again for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-ready state. The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam As‐ sistant is reset to the factory settings. System limits Press the button on the turn signal lever. Sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam Assistant The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot re‐ place the driver's personal judgment of when to use the high beams. In situation that require this, therefore dimming manually. General information The system is not fully functional in the following situations, and driver intervention may be neces‐ sary: The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam As‐ sistant can be adjusted. ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions, such as fog or heavy precipitation. ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and wagons; when driving close to train or ship traffic; or at animal crossings. Safety information Warning If adjustments have been made or the sensitiv‐ ity has been modified, oncoming traffic may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk of accident. If adjustments have been made and the sensi‐ tivity has been modified, make sure that on‐ coming traffic is not momentarily blinded. Switch off the high beams manually if required. ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions, in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncoming traffic on highways. ▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres‐ ence of highly reflective signs. ▷ When the windshield in front of the interior mirror is fogged up, dirty or covered with stickers, etc. 179 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Lights CONTROLS Laser high beams Interior lighting Principle General information The headlight range of the high beams is in‐ creased and provides better illumination of the road. Depending on the equipment version, interior lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient light‐ ing, and speaker lighting are automatically con‐ trolled. General information When the high beams are switched-on, starting with a speed of approx. 37 mph/60 km/h, the la‐ ser high beams in the headlight are automatically switched on in addition to the LED high beams. Overview Buttons in the vehicle Depending on the country variant, further infor‐ mation can be obtained from the laser label on the headlight. Safety information Interior lights Reading lights The label is in the headlight and is visible from the outside. Instrument lighting Turning interior lights on/off Press the button. To switch off permanently: press the button and hold for approx. 3 seconds. Functional requirement The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle can be switched on and off independently. The but‐ ton is located in the rear headliner. The parking lights or low beams must be switched on to set the brightness. Turning reading lights on/off Setting the brightness Adjust the brightness with the thumbwheel. Press the button. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read‐ ing lights are located next to the interior lights in the front and rear. 180 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Lights Ambient light CONTROLS Dimmed while driving General information Some lights of the interior lighting are dimmed when the vehicle is driven in the dark. Depending on the equipment version, lighting can be adjusted for some lights in the car's inte‐ rior. 1. "CAR" Activating/deactivating ambient light 4. "Dimmed for night driving" 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 2. "Settings" 3. "Interior lighting" Panoramic glass sunroof, lighting If the panoramic glass sunroof is opened or the sun protection is closed, the lighting in the area concerned is switched off. 3. "Interior lighting" 4. "Ambient lighting" Turning ambient light on/off BMW Touch Command The ambient light is switched on when the vehi‐ cle is unlocked, and switched off when the vehi‐ cle is locked. The ambient light can also be operated using BMW Touch Command. If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive, it will not be switched on when the vehicle is un‐ locked. Bowers & Wilkins Diamond Surround Sound System Selecting the color Principle 1. "CAR" Some speakers in the vehicle are illuminated. Brightness can be individually set. 2. "Settings" 3. "Interior lighting" General information 4. "Color" 5. Select the desired setting. Setting the brightness 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" If the speakers are muted, speaker lighting will be switched off. Activating/deactivating speaker lighting 1. "CAR" 3. "Interior lighting" 2. "Settings" 4. "Brightness" 5. Select the desired setting. 3. "Interior lighting" 4. "Bowers & Wilkins" 181 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Lights CONTROLS Turning speaker lighting on/off Manual on/off The speaker lighting is switched on when the ve‐ hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the ve‐ hicle is locked. The ambient accent lighting is fitted with a touch sensor. The ambient accent lighting is turned on or off with a brief touch of the chrome bar. Setting the brightness 1. "CAR" Adjusting the brightness via iDrive 2. "Settings" 1. "CAR" 3. "Interior lighting" 2. "Settings" 4. "Bowers & Wilkins" 3. "Interior lighting" 5. "Brightness" 4. "Ambient highlight" 6. Select the desired setting. 5. "Brightness" BMW Touch Command 6. Select the desired setting. The operation of the Bowers & Wilkins Diamond Surround Sound System is also possible using BMW Touch Command. Ambient highlight General information The ambient accent lighting illuminates the door pillars in the rear. When opening a rear door, the brightness of the ambient brightness of the respective door pillar is reduced. After the rear door is closed, the ambi‐ ent highlight is illuminated again in the previously adjusted brightness. The last brightness set is displayed. Adjusting the brightness via touch sensor The ambient accent lighting is fitted with a touch sensor. The brightness is changed with a long touch of the chrome bar. BMW Touch Command The ambient accent lighting can also be oper‐ ated using BMW Touch Command. Automatic on/off The ambient accent lighting is turned on when the vehicle is unlocked, and turned off when the vehicle is locked. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Interior lighting" 4. "Ambient highlight" 182 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS Safety Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Airbags 1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag 2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag 3 Head airbag Front airbags Side airbag Front airbags help protect the driver and the front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which safety belts alone would not provide ad‐ equate protection. In the event of a side collision, the side airbag protects the side of the body in the chest and lap area. 183 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Safety Head airbag In the event of a side collision, the head airbag protects the head. Ejection Mitigation The head airbag system is designed as an ejec‐ tion mitigation countermeasure to reduce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants through side windows during rollovers or side collision events. Knee airbag The knee airbag protects the legs in the event of a frontal impact. Protective effect General information Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ tion, e.g., in less severe accidents. Information on optimum protective effect of the airbags Warning If the seat position is incorrect or the deploy‐ ment area of the airbags is impaired, the airbag system cannot provide protection as intended and may cause additional injuries due to trig‐ gering. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Follow the information on achieving the opti‐ mum protective effect of the airbag system. ▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. ▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep the risk of injury to your hands or arms as low as possible when the airbag is triggered. ▷ Adjust seat and steering wheel so that hands can be crossed over the steering wheel. Se‐ lect the settings so that the shoulder rests against the backrest when crossing the hands and the upper body is as far back as possible while still maintaining a comfortable grip on the steering wheel. ▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and legs in the floor area and does not support them on the dashboard. ▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads away from the side airbag. ▷ There should be no additional persons, ani‐ mals or objects between an airbag and a per‐ son. ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front pas‐ senger side must stay clear - do not attach adhesive film or coverings and do not attach brackets or cables, for instance for navigation devices or mobile phones. ▷ Do not bond the airbag cover panels with ad‐ hesive, do not cover them or modify them in any way. ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the front passenger side as a storage area. ▷ Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions or other objects to the front passenger seat that are not specifically suited for seats with integrated side airbags. ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as jack‐ ets, over the backrests. ▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐ nents or the wiring in the airbag system. This also applies to steering wheel covers, the dashboard, and the seats. ▷ Do not disassemble the airbag system. Even when you follow all instructions very closely, injury from contact with the airbags can‐ not be fully ruled out in certain situations. The ignition and inflation noise may lead to short-term and, in most cases, temporary hear‐ ing impairment in sensitive occupants. Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐ ties may affect the air bag system; contact BMW Customer Relations for further information. 184 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety Warnings and information on the airbags are also found on the sun visors. Operational readiness of the airbag system Safety information Warning Individual components can be hot after trigger‐ ing of the airbag system. There is a risk of in‐ jury. Do not touch individual components. Warning CONTROLS Strength of the driver's and front passenger airbag General information The power that triggers the driver's/front passen‐ ger airbags depends on the position of the driv‐ er's/front passenger seat. To maintain the accuracy of this function over the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon as a respective message appears on the Control Display. Calibrating the front seats Warning Improperly executed work can lead to failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunction, the airbag system might not trigger as intended de‐ spite the accident severity. There is a risk of in‐ jury or danger to life. Have the airbag system checked, repaired, disassembled and scrapped by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Display in the instrument cluster When drive-ready state is turned on, the warning light in the instrument cluster lights up briefly and thereby indicates the operational readiness of the entire airbag system and the seat belt tensioners. Malfunction ▷ Warning light does not come on when drive-ready state is turned on. There is a risk of jamming when moving the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of move‐ ment of the seat is clear prior to any adjust‐ ment. A corresponding message appears on the Con‐ trol Display. 1. Press the switch and move the respective seat all the way forward, until it stops. 2. Press the switch forward again. The seat still moves forward slightly. 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position. The calibration procedure is completed when the message on the Control Display disappears. If the message continues to be displayed, repeat the calibration. If the message does not disappear after a repeat calibration, have the system checked as soon as possible. ▷ The warning light lights up continu‐ ously. Have the system checked. 185 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS Automatic deactivation of the front passenger airbags ▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats or other items to the front passenger seat un‐ less they are specifically determined to be safe for use on the front passenger seat. Principle ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐ tem is to be installed on it. The system reads if the front passenger seat is occupied by measuring the human body's resist‐ ance. Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐ senger's side are activated or deactivated. General information Before transporting a child on the front passen‐ ger seat, refer to the safety information and in‐ structions for children on the front passenger seat, see Children. ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that can press against the seat from below. ▷ No moisture in or on the seat. Indicator light for the front passenger airbags The indicator light for the front-seat passenger airbag in the headliner indicates the operating state of the front-seat passenger airbag. The light indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated. Safety information Warning To ensure the front passenger airbag function, the system must be able to detect whether a person is sitting in the front passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area must be used for this purpose. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Make sure that the front passenger keeps his or her feet in the floor area. Fault of the automatic deactivation system When transporting older children and adults, the front passenger airbags may be deactivated in certain seat positions. In this case, the indicator light for the front passenger airbags lights up. In this case, change the seat position so that the front passenger airbags are activated and the in‐ dicator light goes out. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have the person sit in the rear. To enable accurate recognition of the occupied seat cushion: After drive-ready state is switched on, the light shortly lights up and then indicates whether the airbags are either activated or deactivated. ▷ The indicator light lights up when a child is properly seated in a child restraint sys‐ tem or when the seat is empty. The airbags on the front passenger side are not activated. ▷ The indicator light does not light up when, for instance a correctly seated person of suffi‐ cient size is detected on the seat. The air‐ bags on the front passenger side are acti‐ vated. Detected child restraint systems The system generally detects children seated in a child restraint system, particularly in child re‐ straint systems required by NHTSA at the point in time when the vehicle was manufactured. Af‐ ter installing a child restraint system, make sure that the indicator light for the front passenger air‐ bags lights up. This indicates that the child re‐ 186 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety straint system has been detected and the front passenger airbags are not activated. Intelligent Safety Principle CONTROLS manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Warning Intelligent Safety enables central operation of the driver assistance systems. General information Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, Intel‐ ligent Safety consists of one or more systems that can help prevent an imminent collision. ▷ Approach control warning with light braking function. Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. Overview Button in the vehicle ▷ Evasion Assistant. ▷ Intersection collision warning. ▷ Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation. ▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐ tection. ▷ Lane departure warning. ▷ Active Blind Spot Detection. ▷ Side collision mitigation. Safety information Intelligent Safety Turning on/off Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a Some Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐ cally active after every departure. Some Intelli‐ gent Safety systems activate according to the last setting. Button Status Button lights up green: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ gent Safety systems are switched off or currently unavailable. Button does not light up: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. 187 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS Press the button. The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tem is displayed. If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, all systems are now switched on. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu are activated. Press the button repeatedly. The follow‐ ing settings are switched between: "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the sub-functions, for instance setting for warning time. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ vidually switched off. above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn‐ ings may vary with the current driving situation. When the vehicle is driven so that it is intention‐ ally approaching another vehicle, the Forward Collision Warning and brake intervention are de‐ layed in order to avoid false system reactions. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Driver Attention Camera in the instrument cluster cap‐ tures the driver’s field of vision. Additionally, the system checks for visual impairments. Field of vi‐ sion and visibility also affect the timing of the warnings. Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Press and hold this button. All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Approach control warning with light braking function Principle The Forward Collision Warning warns of a possi‐ ble risk of collision and may brake independently. In the event of an accident, the system may re‐ duce impact speed. General information Sensors detect the traffic situation. The system issues a two-phase warning of a possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Warning Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. 188 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety Overview CONTROLS Press the button repeatedly. Button in the vehicle The following settings are switched be‐ tween: "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the subfunctions. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ vidually switched off. Intelligent Safety Manual switching off Press and hold this button. All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Sensors The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: Button Status ▷ Cameras behind the windshield. Button lights up green: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. ▷ With radar sensor: front radar sensor. Additional information: Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ gent Safety systems are switched off or currently unavailable. Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. Turning on/off Button does not light up: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Turning on automatically The system is automatically active when the ve‐ hicle is turned on. Setting the warning time Switching on manually 2. "Settings" Press the button. The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tem is displayed. If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, all systems are now switched on. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu are activated. 1. "CAR" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Safety and Warnings" 5. "Forward Collision Mitigation" 6. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Early" ▷ "Medium" ▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed. 189 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Safety Warning with braking function Display A warning symbol appears in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐ ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐ nent. Icon Measure Icon lights up red: prewarning. Brake and increase distance. Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning. Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary. Prewarning This warning is provided, for instance when there is impending danger of a collision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is too small. If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking as warranted. Acute warning with braking function An acute warning is displayed in case of the im‐ minent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐ proaches another object at a high differential speed. Intervene in the case of an acute warning. De‐ pending on the driving situation and the equip‐ ment version, the acute warning may be accom‐ panied by a brief activation of the braking system. With the warning time setting "Late" the brief ac‐ tivation of the braking system is omitted. If an acute warning is provided, the system may also provide assistance, such as through auto‐ matic brake intervention, when there is risk of collision. Brake intervention The warning prompts the driver to intervene. If a warning is active, the maximum braking force is used when the brake is applied. The brake pedal must be applied sufficiently quickly and force‐ fully. The system may also assist in braking if there is a risk of collision. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop. City brake function: the brake intervention occurs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h. With radar sensor: the brake intervention occurs to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h. At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h, the brake intervention occurs as a brief braking pres‐ sure. No automatic delay occurs. The brake intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel. The system’s ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐ formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted. System limits Safety information Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ tem’s operation and limitations. Acute warnings may be provided even when there has been no prior warning. 190 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety Detection range CONTROLS ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐ ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. Warning sensitivity The system's detection capability is limited. Only objects that are detected by the system are taken into account. Thus, a system reaction might not come or might come late. The following situations may not be detected, for instance: ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed. ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or strongly decelerating vehicles. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear view. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. Upper speed limit If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated temporarily. When the vehicle slows down to be‐ low this speed, the system is reactivated. System limits of the sensors Additional information: ▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. ▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36. Functional limitations The system may be limited in the following situa‐ tions: The more sensitive the warning settings are, for example the warning time, the more warnings are displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐ cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐ actions. Evasion Assistant Principle The Evasion Assistant supports the driver in making evasive maneuvers in certain situations, such as when obstacles or persons suddenly ap‐ pear. General information The system issues a warning and intervenes to support the driver if a lateral evasive maneuver is possible. Sensors monitor and detect the clear‐ ance around the vehicle. If the system identifies space alongside the vehicle, it supports an eva‐ sive maneuver begun by the driver by safely pro‐ viding targeted supporting steering movements. Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. 191 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS Warning with evasion support Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Display in the instrument cluster If a collision with a detected vehicle or a detected person is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. Icon Measure Icon lights up red: prewarning. Brake and increase distance. Overview Sensors Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning for obsta‐ cles. The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary. ▷ Cameras behind the windshield. ▷ Front radar sensor. ▷ Radar sensors, side, front. Symbol flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning for pe‐ destrians. Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if necessary. ▷ Radar sensors, side, rear. Additional information: Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. Functional requirements ▷ Pedestrian Warning with braking function is switched on. Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Mitiga‐ tion, refer to page 197. ▷ Approach control warning with light braking function is switched on. Approach control warning with light braking function, refer to page 188. ▷ Sensors detect sufficient clearance around the vehicle. Turning on/off The system is automatically active when the ve‐ hicle is turned on. Acute warning with evasion support An acute warning is displayed when there is an imminent danger of collision due to the vehicle approaching another object at a high speed. Intervene in the case of an acute warning. The system is designed to provide assistance by tak‐ ing evasive action when there is a risk of collision. Acute warnings may be provided even when there has been no prior warning. System limits Safety information Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk 192 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ tem’s operation and limitations. CONTROLS ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐ ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. Detection range Intersection collision warning Principle The system may prevent some accidents with cross traffic at intersections and junctions. In the event of an accident, the system may reduce im‐ pact speed. The system's detection capability is limited. Only objects that are detected by the system are taken into account. Thus, a system reaction might not come or might come late. The following situations may not be detected, for example: ▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach them at high speed. ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or strongly decelerating vehicles. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear view. ▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. System limits of the sensors Additional information: ▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. ▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36. Functional limitations The system may be limited in the following situa‐ tions: The system sounds a warning in the city speed range before an imminent collision and activates brakes independently, if needed. General information Sensors detect the traffic situation. Vehicles that cross your driving direction can be detected by the system as soon as these vehi‐ cles enter into the detection range of the system. At intersections and junctions, a warning is is‐ sued when a danger of collision with crossing traffic is detected. The system issues a two-phase warning of a possible risk of collision with vehicles at speeds above approx. 6 mph/10 km/h. The timing of warnings may vary with the current driving situa‐ tion. The Driver Attention Camera in the instrument cluster captures the driver’s field of vision. Addi‐ tionally, the system checks for visual impair‐ ments. Field of vision and visibility also affect the timing of the warnings. 193 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Safety Safety information Intelligent Safety Warning Sensors The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Cameras behind the windshield. ▷ Front radar sensor. ▷ Radar sensors, side, front. Additional information: Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Turning on/off Turning on automatically The system is automatically active when the ve‐ hicle is turned on. Switching on manually Press the button. The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tem is displayed. Warning Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. Overview If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, all systems are now switched on. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu are activated. Button in the vehicle Press the button repeatedly. The following settings are switched be‐ tween: "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the subfunctions. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ vidually switched off. 194 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety Manual switching off Press and hold this button. All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Icon CONTROLS Meaning Danger of collision with vehicle cross‐ ing from the right. Danger of collision with vehicle cross‐ ing from the left. Button Status Button lights up green: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Danger of collision with vehicle for which the driving direction cannot be determined. Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ gent Safety systems are switched off or currently unavailable. Display with prewarning Button does not light up: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. The respective icon lights up red: prewarning for vehicles that cross your driving direction. Intervene yourself, for instance by braking. Setting the warning time 1. "CAR" Display with acute warning The respective icon flashes red and an acoustic signal sounds: acute warning when vehicles cross your driving direction. 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Safety and Warnings" 5. "Forward Collision Mitigation" 6. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Early" ▷ "Medium" ▷ "Late": only acute warnings are displayed. Warning with braking function Display Brake and make an evasive maneuver, if neces‐ sary. Prewarning For example, a prewarning is displayed when a danger of collision with a crossing vehicle is de‐ tected. If a prewarning is provided, respond by braking as warranted. Acute warning with braking function General information A warning symbol appears in the instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display, where availa‐ ble, if a collision with a detected vehicle is immi‐ nent. An acute warning is displayed in the event of an immediate danger of collision with a crossing ve‐ hicle. Intervene in the case of an acute warning. If an acute warning is provided, the system may pro‐ vide assistance, such as through automatic brake intervention, when there is risk of collision. Acute warnings may be provided even when there has been no prior warning. 195 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Safety Brake intervention Detection range The warning prompts the driver to intervene. The system may also assist in braking if there is a risk of collision. The vehicle can be decelerated to a standstill. The brake intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel. The system’s ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐ formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted. The system's detection capability is limited. Thus, a system reaction might not come or might come late. System limits The following situations may not be detected, for instance: Safety information ▷ Crossing vehicles when they are hidden by buildings, for instance. ▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of you, or strongly decelerating vehicles. Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ tem’s operation and limitations. ▷ Crossing bicycles. ▷ Vehicles with an unusual side appearance. System limits of the sensors Additional information: ▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. ▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36. Functional limitations Upper speed limit The system responds to crossing vehicles when your own speed is below approx. 50 mph/80 km/h. The system may be limited in the following situa‐ tions: ▷ In tight curves. ▷ If the driving stability control systems are lim‐ ited or deactivated, for instance DSC OFF. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. Warning sensitivity The more sensitive the warning settings are, for example the warning time, the more warnings are displayed. Therefore, there may also be an ex‐ 196 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety cess of premature or unjustified warnings and re‐ actions. Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Mitigation Principle The Pedestrian Warning warns in the city speed range of possible risk of collision with pedes‐ trians and bicycle riders and may brake inde‐ pendently. In the event of an accident, the sys‐ tem may reduce impact speed. General information CONTROLS style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Warning Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. Overview Button in the vehicle Sensors detect the traffic situation. The system issues a warning of a possible risk of collision with pedestrians and cyclists at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. The system reacts to pedestrians and cyclists who are within the detection range of the sys‐ tem. Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Intelligent Safety Sensors The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Cameras behind the windshield. ▷ With radar sensor: front radar sensor. Additional information: Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving 197 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS Detection range Press the button repeatedly. The following settings are switched be‐ tween: "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the subfunctions. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings. The detection range in front of the vehicle is div‐ ided into two areas: ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle. ▷ Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and left of the central area. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are located within the central area. A warning is issued about pedestrians who are located within the extended area only if they are moving in the direction of the central area. Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ vidually switched off. Manual switching off Press and hold this button. All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Button Status Button lights up green: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ gent Safety systems are switched off or currently unavailable. Turning on/off Button does not light up: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Turning on automatically The system is automatically active when the ve‐ hicle is turned on. Switching on manually Press the button. The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tem is displayed. If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, all systems are now switched on. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu are activated. Warning with braking function Display If a collision with a pedestrian or a cyclist is immi‐ nent, a warning symbol appears on the instru‐ ment cluster and in the Head-up Display. The red icon is displayed and a signal sounds. Intervene immediately by braking or make an evasive maneuver. Brake intervention The warning prompts the driver to intervene. While a warning is active, the maximum braking force is used when the brake is applied. In order 198 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS to activate the Brake Assistant function, the brakes must be applied sufficiently quickly and forcefully. ▷ Partially covered pedestrians. If there is a risk of collision, the system may also assist with brake intervention. ▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range. When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come to a complete stop. The brake intervention can be interrupted by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by actively moving the steering wheel. The system’s ability to detect objects may be limited in some circumstances. Refer to the in‐ formation in this Owner’s Manual regarding the limitations of the system and actively intervene as warranted. System limits ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such be‐ cause of the viewing angle or contour. ▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than 32 in/80 cm. System limits of the sensors Additional information: ▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. ▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36. Functional limitations The system may be limited or may not be availa‐ ble in the following situations: ▷ If the driving stability control systems are de‐ activated, for instance DSC OFF. Safety information ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ tem’s operation and limitations. Upper speed limit The system responds to pedestrians and cyclists when the speed of the vehicle is below approx. 50 mph/80 km/h. Detection range The system's detection capability is limited. Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐ sued late. Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detection Principle Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐ tion is a night vision system. An infrared camera scans the area in front of the vehicle and issues a warning if it detects pedes‐ trians and animals on the street. General information The system detects warm objects that are simi‐ lar in shape to human beings or animals. If nec‐ essary, the thermal image can be displayed on the Control Display. The following situations may not be detected, for instance: 199 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Safety Thermal image In addition, the system also detects animals above a certain minimum size, for instance deer. Display on the Control Display with thermal im‐ age activated: ▷ People detected by the system: in light yel‐ low. ▷ Animals detected by the system: in dark yel‐ low. The image shows the heat radiated by objects in the field of vision of the camera. Warm objects have a light appearance and cold objects a dark appearance. The ability to detect an object depends on the temperature difference between the object and the background and on the level of heat radiation emitted by the object. Objects that are similar in temperature to the environment or that radiate very little heat are difficult to detect. For safety reasons, when driving at speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h and in low ambient light, the image is only displayed when the low beams are switched on. A freeze frame is displayed at regular intervals for a fraction of a second. Pedestrian and animal detection Range of object detection, with good ambient conditions: ▷ Pedestrian detection: up to approx. 330 ft/100 m. ▷ Detection of large animals: up to approx. 490 ft/150 m. ▷ Detection of medium animals: up to approx. 230 ft/70 m. Environmental influences can limit the availability of object detection. If the vehicle systems detect that the vehicle is located in a residential area, the animal detection is temporarily switched off. Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Warning Object detection and warning only functions in darkness. Objects whose form is similar to people with suf‐ ficient heat radiation are detected. Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving 200 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. CONTROLS Turning on Turning on automatically When it is dark outside, the system is automati‐ cally active after every driving off. Overview Buttons in the vehicle Switching on the thermal image The thermal image from the Night Vision camera can be displayed on the Control Display in addi‐ tion to the warning function. This function has no effect on object detection. Press the button. The image from the camera is displayed on the Control Display. Intelligent Safety Adjusting the thermal image Brightness and contrast can be adjusted, when the thermal image is switched on. 1. Select brightness or contrast: ▷ "Brightness". ▷ "Contrast". 2. Set the desired value. Warning function Thermal image Display Icon Sensors Pedestrian Warning. The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Infrared camera. Animal warning. The camera is automatically heated when the ex‐ ternal temperatures are low. When the vehicle lighting is switched on, the camera objective is cleaned at regular intervals when the windshield washer system is activated. Additional information: Meaning Symbol lights up red. Prewarning. Symbol flashes red and a Acute warning. signal sounds. Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. 201 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Safety The displayed icon may vary and shows the side of the road on which the person or animal was detected. Warning of people or animals in danger If a collision with a person or an animal detected in this way is imminent, a warning symbol ap‐ pears on the instrument cluster and in the Headup Display. Although both the shape and the heat radiation are analyzed, unwarranted warnings cannot be ruled out. Warning area in front of the vehicle Prewarning for animals is displayed when an ani‐ mal is detected in the front of the vehicle. If a prewarning is issued, intervene by braking or making an evasive maneuver. Acute warning Acute warning is displayed if a person or an ani‐ mal is detected in direct proximity in front of the vehicle. If an acute warning is issued, brake or make an evasive maneuver immediately. Display in the Head-up Display The warning is displayed simultaneously in the Head-up Display and on the instrument cluster. System limits System limits of the sensors Additional information: ▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. The warning area for the Pedestrian Warning consists of two parts: ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the vehicle. ▷ Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and left of the central area. With animal warnings, no distinction is made be‐ tween the central or extended area. Limits of pedestrian and animal detection In some situations, it may occur that pedestrians are detected as animals or animals as pedes‐ trians. Small animals are not detected by the object de‐ tection function, even if they are clearly visible in the image. Limited detection, for instance in the following circumstances: The entire area moves along with the vehicle di‐ rection according to the steering angle and changes with the vehicle speed. As the vehicle speed increases, the area becomes, for instance longer and wider. ▷ People or animals who are fully or partially covered, especially when their heads are cov‐ ered. Prewarning ▷ Cyclists on unconventional bicycles (e.g., re‐ cumbent bicycles). Prewarning for persons is displayed when a per‐ son is detected in the central area immediately in front of the vehicle as well as on the left or right side in the extended area. ▷ People who are not in an upright position, for instance lying down. ▷ After physical damage to the system, for in‐ stance after an accident. 202 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS No display on the rear screen The image from Night Vision cannot be dis‐ played on the rear screen. Lane departure warning Principle The lane departure warning alerts when the vehi‐ cle is about to run off the road or exit the lane. Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. General information Functional requirement This camera-based system warns starting at a minimum speed. The camera must detect the lane markings for the lane departure warning to be active. The minimum speed is country-specific and is displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety systems. Overview Warnings are issued by means of a steering wheel vibration. The severity of the steering wheel vibration can be adjusted. Button in the vehicle The system does not provide a warning if the turn signal is set in the respective direction be‐ fore leaving the lane. Depending on the equipment version, if in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane marking is crossed, the system may intervene with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐ tion to vibrating. The system thus helps keep the vehicle in the lane. Safety information Intelligent Safety Sensors The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing road and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in re‐ sponse to a warning. ▷ Cameras behind the windshield. Additional information: Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. 203 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS Turning on/off Button Status Button lights up green: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Turning on automatically The lane departure warning activates automati‐ cally after departure if the function was switched on at the completion of the last trip. Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ gent Safety systems are switched off or currently unavailable. Depending on the national-market version, the system is automatically active after every driving off. The base setting is thereby activated. Switching on manually Press the button. Button does not light up: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Setting the warning time 1. "CAR" The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tem is displayed. 2. "Settings" If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, all systems are now switched on. 4. "Safety and Warnings" "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu are activated. Press the button repeatedly. The following settings are switched be‐ tween: "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the subfunctions. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ vidually switched off. 3. "Driver Assistance" 5. "Lane Departure Warning" 6. Select the desired setting: ▷ "Early" ▷ "Medium" ▷ "Reduced": some warnings are sup‐ pressed depending on the situation, for instance when purposely driving over lane markings in curves or with dynamic passing without blinker. ▷ "Off": no warnings are issued. Setting the intensity of the steering wheel vibration 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Steering Wheel Feedback" Manual switching off 5. "Vibration intensity" Press and hold this button. All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. 6. Select the desired setting. The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems. 204 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS Switch steering intervention on/off Warning signal The steering intervention can be switched on and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐ tion and lane departure warning. Depending on the equipment version: in the event of multiple active steering interventions by the system within 3 minutes without the driver's intervention at the steering wheel, an acoustic warning will sound. A short warning signal will sound at the second steering intervention. Be‐ ginning with the third steering intervention, an continuous warning will sound. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Safety and Warnings" 5. "Lane Departure Warning" 6. "Steering intervention" Depending on the national-market version, the steering intervention is automatically active after every driving off. Display in the instrument cluster The icon illuminates green: at lane mark‐ ing was detected on at least one side of the vehicle and warnings can be issued. Warning function If you leave the lane If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates in ac‐ cordance with the steering wheel vibration set‐ ting. When the turn signal is switched on in the corre‐ sponding direction before changing the lane, a warning is not issued. Steering intervention Depending on the equipment version: if, in the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h a lane marking is crossed, the system may intervene with a brief active steering intervention in addi‐ tion to vibrating. The steering intervention helps keep the vehicle in the lane. The steering inter‐ vention can be noticed on the steering wheel and can be manually overridden at any time. Dur‐ ing an active steering intervention, the display in the instrument cluster will blink. In addition, a Check Control message is dis‐ played. The warning signal and Check Control message are an encouragement to pay closer attention to the lane. End of warning For instance, the warning will be canceled in the following situations: ▷ Automatically after a few seconds. ▷ When returning to your own lane. ▷ When braking hard. ▷ When blinking. ▷ The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) adjusts. System limits Safety information Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ tem’s operation and limitations. 205 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS System limits of the sensors General information Additional information: ▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. Functional limitations The system may be limited in the following situa‐ tions: ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas. ▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow roads. ▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by ob‐ jects. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. Radar sensors monitor the area behind and next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a mini‐ mum speed. The minimum speed is country-specific and is displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety systems. The system indicates whether there are vehicles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching from behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2. The light in the exterior mirror lights up dimmed. A Check Control message may be displayed when the system is not fully functional. Before you change lanes after setting the turn signal, the system issues a warning in the situa‐ tions described above. Active Blind Spot Detection The light in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vibrates. Principle Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from be‐ hind in the adjacent lane. The light in the exterior mirror warns the driver in different steps. Vehicles with side collision mitigation: at speeds of up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the system can in‐ tervene with a brief active steering intervention and help guide the vehicle back into the lane. The steering intervention occurs when a mini‐ mum speed is reached. This minimum speed is displayed on the Control Display in the menu for the steering intervention. Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch 206 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. CONTROLS Switching on manually Press the button. The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tem is displayed. Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, all systems are now switched on. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu are activated. Press the button repeatedly. Overview The following settings are switched be‐ tween: Button in the vehicle "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the subfunctions. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ vidually switched off. Manual switching off Intelligent Safety Press and hold this button. All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Sensors The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Radar sensors, side, rear. Additional information: Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. Turning on/off Turning on automatically Button Status Button lights up green: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ gent Safety systems are switched off or currently unavailable. Button does not light up: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Active Blind Spot Detection is automatically acti‐ vated after departure if the function was switched on at the completion of the last trip. 207 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS Setting the warning time 1. "CAR" Warning function Light in the exterior mirror 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Safety and Warnings" 5. "Active Blind Spot Detection" 6. Select the desired setting. Setting the intensity of the steering wheel vibration 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Prewarning 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Steering Wheel Feedback" 5. "Vibration intensity" 6. Select the desired setting. The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems. Vehicles with side collision mitigation: switching steering intervention on/off The steering intervention can be switched on and off separately for Active Blind Spot Detec‐ tion and lane departure warning. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Safety and Warnings" 5. "Active Blind Spot Detection" 6. "Steering intervention" The dimmed light in the exterior mirror indicates when there are vehicles in the blind spot or ap‐ proaching from behind. Acute warning When the turn signal is switched on while a vehi‐ cle is in the critical zone, the steering wheel vi‐ brates briefly and the light in the exterior mirror flashes brightly. The warning stops when the other vehicle has left the critical area or the turn signal has been deactivated. Vehicles with side collision mitigation When there is no response to the vibration of the steering wheel at speeds of up to 130 mph/210 km/h and the lane marking is crossed, the system intervenes with a brief active steering intervention. The steering intervention helps return the vehicle into the lane. The steer‐ ing intervention can be noticed on the steering wheel and can be manually overridden at any time. Flashing of the light A flashing of the light during vehicle unlocking serves as system self-test. 208 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety System limits CONTROLS ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas. Safety information ▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water. Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ tem’s operation and limitations. ▷ With lane boundaries that are not white. ▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by ob‐ jects. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. ▷ If the camera is impaired. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional. Upper speed limit If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. 155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated temporarily. If the vehicle speed falls below approx. 155 mph/250 km/h, the system once again re‐ sponds according to the setting. System limits of the sensors Additional information: ▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36. ▷ On vehicles with side collision warning: cam‐ eras, refer to page 35. Functional limitations The system may be limited in the following situa‐ tions: Displaying warnings Depending on the selected warning settings, e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can be displayed. However, there may also be an ex‐ cess of premature warnings of critical situations. Side collision mitigation Principle The side collision warning helps to avoid immi‐ nent side collisions. General information ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow roads. ▷ The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered, for instance by stickers. For vehicles with side collision mitigation, the steering intervention can be limited, for instance in the following situation: Radar sensors monitor the space next to the ve‐ hicle when traveling faster than a minimum speed of up to approx. 130 mph/210 km/h. 209 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS The minimum speed is country-specific and is displayed in the menu for the intelligent Safety systems. Overview Button in the vehicle The front camera determines the lane marking positions. If, for instance, another vehicle is detected next to the vehicle and if there is a risk of collision with this vehicle, the system helps avoid the collision. For this purpose, the system issues a warning with a blinking LED in the exterior mirror and a vi‐ brating steering wheel. If necessary, the system will carry out an active steering intervention. Intelligent Safety Safety information Sensors Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Cameras behind the windshield. ▷ Radar sensors, side, front. ▷ Radar sensors, side, rear. Additional information: Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Turning on/off Turning on automatically The side collision mitigation activates automati‐ cally after departure if the function was switched on at the completion of the last trip. Switching on manually Press the button. Functional requirement The camera must detect the lane markings for the side collision mitigation with steering inter‐ vention to be active. The menu for the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tem is displayed. If all Intelligent Safety systems were switched off, all systems are now switched on. "Configure INDIVIDUAL": depending on the equipment version, the Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems can be individually configured. The individ‐ ual settings are activated and stored. As soon as 210 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety a setting is changed on the menu, all settings of the menu are activated. Press the button repeatedly. CONTROLS Warning function Light in the exterior mirror The following settings are switched be‐ tween: "ALL ON": all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Basic settings are activated for the subfunctions. "INDIVIDUAL": the Intelligent Safety systems are switched on according to the individual settings. Some Intelligent Safety systems cannot be indi‐ vidually switched off. Manual switching off Press and hold this button. All Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Button Status Button lights up green: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched on. Button lights up orange: some Intelli‐ gent Safety systems are switched off or currently unavailable. Button does not light up: all Intelligent Safety systems are switched off. Setting the intensity of the steering wheel vibration 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Steering Wheel Feedback" 5. "Vibration intensity" 6. Select the desired setting. The setting is applied to all Intelligent Safety sys‐ tems. Acute warning If there is a risk of collision, the light in the exte‐ rior mirror flashes and the steering wheel vi‐ brates. A Check Control message is displayed at the same time. If necessary, an active steering intervention takes place to prevent the collision and maintain the vehicle within its own lane. The steering intervention can be noticed on the steering wheel and can be manually overridden at any time. System limits Safety information Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ tem’s operation and limitations. System limits of the sensors Additional information: 211 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS ▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. General information ▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36. Functional limitations The system may be limited in the following situa‐ tions: ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow roads. ▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible, merging, diverging, or multiple lane markings such as in construction areas. ▷ With lane boundaries that are covered in snow, ice, dirt or water. ▷ With lane boundaries that are covered by ob‐ jects. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the engine via the Start/Stop button. A Check Control message is displayed when the system is not fully functional. Radar sensors monitor the area behind the vehi‐ cle. When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a certain speed, the system can react as as fol‐ lows: ▷ Where applicable, the hazard warning flashers will be switched on. ▷ Where applicable, the PreCrash functions are triggered. Safety information Warning Rear-end collision preparation Principle Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐ ket version, the rear-end collision preparation can react to vehicles approaching from behind. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Warning Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a sub‐ stitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to its limits, the system may not issue warnings or reactions, or these may be issued late or in a manner that is not consistent with their normal use. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. 212 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS Overview General information Sensors The emergency stop function is not triggered automatically. The emergency stop function can only be triggered manually by the occupants. The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Radar sensors, side, rear. Additional information: Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. Switching on/off When the system is activated, the vehicle is brought to a standstill in its own lane by use of lane guidance. Depending on the equipment version and na‐ tional market version, the system includes a lane change function. ▷ When driving in reverse. With lane change function: on motorways or mo‐ torway-like roads, the system steers the vehicle to the side of the road or shoulder where possi‐ ble. On other roads or under high traffic condi‐ tions, the vehicle is brought to a standstill on the actual road. System limits Overview The system is automatically active when the ve‐ hicle is turned on. The system is deactivated in the following situa‐ tions: System limits of the sensors Additional information: ▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36. Functional limitations The system may not be fully functional in the fol‐ lowing situations: ▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed much faster than your own. ▷ The approaching vehicle is approaching slowly. If equipped with Equipment Stop Assistant Principle If the driver is no longer fit to drive, the Emer‐ gency Stop Assistant helps to safely bring the vehicle to a standstill. Parking brake Functional requirements ▷ The function can be activated at speeds of approx. 6 mph/10 km/h up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h. ▷ With lane change function: lane changes are executed when the traffic situation allows. Activating the emergency stop function Pull the switch for the parking brake briefly to activate the emergency stop function. 213 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS ▷ With lane change function: releasing the switch may trigger an automatic lane change. ▷ The system will take control of the vehicle for a maximum of 2 minutes. ▷ The hazard warning system is switched on. ▷ An emergency call is triggered. Without lane change function: Icon Status Green steering wheel symbol: When lane markings are detected, the system keeps the vehicle in the lane. Gray steering wheel symbol: Canceling the emergency stop function Lane guidance is briefly interrupted. The driver can cancel the emergency stop func‐ tion by actively taking control of the vehicle throughout the entire process. Lane marking driven over. For instance, the emergency stop function will be canceled in the following situations: Yellow steering wheel symbol: When lane markings are detected, the system keeps the vehicle in the lane. Yellow steering wheel symbol: The hands are not grasping the steer‐ ing wheel. The system is still active. ▷ When steering. ▷ When blinking. ▷ When depressing the accelerator pedal. ▷ When switching off the hazard warning sys‐ tem. ▷ When canceling the Emergency Request. ▷ When switching the selector lever position at standstill. ▷ When the switch of the parking brake is pressed. Red steering wheel symbol and a sig‐ nal sounds: The hands are not grasping the steer‐ ing wheel. Interruption of lane guidance is imminent. Red steering wheel symbol and a sig‐ nal sounds: Lane guidance is switched off. At standstill System limits As soon as the vehicle is stationary, the system will carry out the following settings: Use the system only in the event of a driver fail‐ ure. ▷ The vehicle is secured against rolling away. The system cannot replace the driving perform‐ ance of a driver who is fit to drive. ▷ The interior lights are switched on. ▷ The central locking system is unlocked. Displays in the instrument cluster Icon Status Emergency Stop function active. BMW Drive Recorder Principle The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video re‐ cordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to document surrounding traffic. 214 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS General information Functional requirements There are various ways for storing video record‐ ings: ▷ BMW Drive Recorder is activated. ▷ Privacy Policy accepted. ▷ Automatic storage of the recording. ▷ Recording type selected. The function allows the documentation of the event of an accident. ▷ Manual storage of the recording. The function allows the documentation of traffic situations. The system records up to 20 seconds before and after the activation of the storage. Cameras of the assistance systems are used, for instance Panorama View. ▷ Recording time selected. Activating/deactivating the BMW Drive Recorder The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated be‐ fore the first use of the recording function. 1. "Apps" 2. "Drive Recorder" Additionally, the following parameters are stored for the trip: 3. Accept Privacy Policy. ▷ Date. 5. "Recording allowed" ▷ Time. 6. Select the desired setting. ▷ Vehicle speed. ▷ Global Positioning System coordinates. 4. "Settings" Recording functions Automatic recording Data protection The permissibility of recording and using video recordings is contingent upon the statutory regu‐ lations of the country in which the system is to be used. The user is responsible for the use of the system and compliance with the respective regulations. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends confirming there are no statutory or regulatory constraints on use of the system in your state or country prior to the initial use. In addition, the laws with respect to use of the system should be verified in regular intervals, especially when bor‐ ders are frequently crossed. Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed about the system. In addition, information about the system is required when handing off the ve‐ hicle. The recording is stored automatically when the vehicle sensors detect an accident occurrence. Manual recording Using the button Press and hold this button. Via iDrive 1. "Apps" 2. "Drive Recorder" 3. "Start recording" To stop the recording: "Cancel". Recording can also be started by selecting the widget on the Control Display. 215 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS Recording playback and administration 3. "Settings" Stored video recordings can be played back, ex‐ ported and deleted. 5. Select desired camera. For your own safety, the video recording is only displayed on the Control Display up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market versions, the video recording is only displayed if the park‐ ing brake is engaged or if the selector lever is in selector lever position P. 1. "Apps" 2. "Drive Recorder" 3. "Saved recordings" 4. "Camera selection" In case of an accident, the system switches au‐ tomatically to "All" cameras. If driver assistance systems are active, their cam‐ era views are selected automatically. System limits In the event of serious accidents, it may not be possible to store recordings if the damage on the vehicle is too great or the power supply was in‐ terrupted. 4. Select desired recording. 5. Select the desired setting. Active Protection If a camera change occurred during the record‐ ing, different segments of the video can be se‐ lected. Principle Settings General information Different settings can be made. Recording type 1. "Apps" Active Protection prepares occupants and the vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving or collision situations. General information Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐ ket version, Active Protection consists of various PreCrash functions. 3. "Settings" The system is used to detect certain critical driv‐ ing situations that might lead to an accident. This includes the following critical driving situations: 4. "RECORDING TYPE" ▷ Emergency stop. 5. Select the desired setting. ▷ Severe understeering. 2. "Drive Recorder" ▷ Severe oversteering. Recording time Certain functions of several systems can, within the system limits, lead to Active Protection trig‐ gering: 1. "Apps" 2. "Drive Recorder" 3. "Settings" 4. Select the desired setting. ▷ Forward Collision Warning: automatic brake intervention. ▷ Front collision mitigation: Brake Assistant Cameras 1. "Apps" 2. "Drive Recorder" 216 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Safety CONTROLS ▷ Night Vision with pedestrian and animal de‐ tection: Brake Assistant. ing the red button in the buckle. Fasten the safety belt before continuing on your trip. ▷ Rear collision preparation: detection of immi‐ nent rear collisions. All other systems can be restored to the desired setting. Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system limits, critical situation could not be detected reliably or in time. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Function PostCrash – iBrake Principle In the event of an accident, PostCrash can bring the vehicle to a halt automatically without inter‐ vention by the driver in certain situations. General information PostCrash can reduce the risk of another colli‐ sion and subsequent consequences. At standstill When the safety belt is fastened, the driver's and front passenger's belt straps are automatically tightened once after driving away. After coming to a halt, the brake is released auto‐ matically. In accident-critical situations, the following indi‐ vidual functions become active as needed: Harder vehicle deceleration ▷ Automatic pretensioning of the front safety belts. ▷ Automatic window closing up to a narrow gap. ▷ Automatic closing of the glass sunroof, in‐ cluding sun protection. ▷ Automatic closing of the panoramic glass sunroof, including sun protection. ▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort seats in the front: automatic positioning of the back‐ rest for the front passenger seat. ▷ For vehicles equipped with comfort rear seats: automatic positioning of the backrests for the rear passenger seats. After a critical driving situation without an acci‐ dent, the front safety belts are loosened again. In certain situations, it can be necessary to bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than the Brake Assistant allows. To do this, quickly apply extra force to the brake. For a brief period, the braking pressure will be higher than the braking pressure that is achieved by the automatic braking function. Automatic braking is interrupted. Interrupting automatic braking It can be necessary to interrupt automatic brak‐ ing in certain situations, for instance for an eva‐ sive maneuver. Interrupt automatic braking: ▷ By pressing the brake pedal. ▷ By pressing the accelerator pedal. If the belt tension does not loosen automatically, stop the vehicle and unbuckle the safety belt us‐ 217 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Safety Fatigue alert Break recommendation Adjusting Principle The Fatigue Alert can detect decreasing alert‐ ness or fatigue of the driver during long, monoto‐ nous trips, for instance on highways. The system recommends a break. Safety information The fatigue alert is active automatically with each switching on of drive-ready state and can thus display a break recommendation. The break recommendation can also be switched on or off and adjusted via iDrive. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Warning 3. "General settings" The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing one's physical state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue may not be detected or not be detected in time. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. 4. "Fatigue and Focus Alert" 5. Select the desired setting. Display If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a message is displayed in the Control Display with the recommendation to take a break. During the display, various settings can be se‐ lected. Function The system is switched on each time drive-ready state is switched on. After travel has begun, the system monitors cer‐ tain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that de‐ creasing alertness or fatigue can be detected. This procedure takes the following criteria into account: ▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering behavior. After a break, another recommendation to take a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐ mately 45 minutes. System limits The function may be limited in the following sit‐ uations and may issue an incorrect warning or no warning at all: ▷ When the time is set incorrectly. ▷ Driving conditions, for instance time, length of trip. ▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below about 43 mph/70 km/h. ▷ Depending on the equipment: attention of the driver through the Driver Attention Cam‐ era. ▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during rapid acceleration or when cornering fast. Starting at approx. 43 mph/70 km/h, the system is active and can also display a recommendation to take a break. ▷ In active driving situations, such as when changing lanes frequently. ▷ When the road condition is poor. ▷ In the event of strong side winds. The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of a break during longer trips on highways. 218 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving stability control systems CONTROLS Driving stability control systems Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Antilock Braking System ABS The Antilock Braking System (ABS) prevents locking of the wheels during braking. The vehicle maintains its steerability even during emergency braking, which increases the active driving safety. ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ gine. Brake assistant The Brake Assistant effects maximum braking assistance when the brake is applied quickly. It reduces the braking distance to a minimum dur‐ ing emergency braking. The advantages of the Antilock Braking System (ABS) are thereby uti‐ lized. Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal for the duration of emergency braking. Adaptive brake assistant In combination with Active Cruise Control ACC, this system ensures that the brakes respond even more rapidly when braking in critical situa‐ tions. Drive-off assistant Principle The drive-off assistant supports driving off on uphill grades. Driving off 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot brake. 2. Release the foot brake and drive off without delay. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is held in place for approx. 2 seconds. Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle may roll back slightly. DSC Dynamic Stability Control Principle The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) helps to keep the vehicle on a steady course by reducing drive power and by brake intervention on individ‐ ual wheels. General information DSC detects the following unstable driving con‐ ditions, for instance: 219 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Driving stability control systems ▷ Skidding, which can lead to oversteering. Deactivating/activating DSC ▷ Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which can lead to understeering. General information When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is re‐ duced during acceleration and when driving in curves. Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. To increase driving stability, activate DSC again as soon as possible. Deactivating DSC Hold the button down until DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster and the DSC OFF indicator light is illuminated. Activating DSC Press the button. Warning When driving with a roof load, for instance with roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐ ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐ tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Driving with roof load only with activated Dynamic Stability Control. Overview Button in the vehicle DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator light turn off. Display In the instrument cluster When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is displayed in the instrument cluster. Indicator/warning lights The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐ activated. The indicator light flashes: DSC controls the drive and braking forces. The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunctioned. DSC OFF 220 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving stability control systems DTC Dynamic Traction Control CONTROLS Activating/deactivating DTC Activating DTC Press the button. Principle Dynamic Traction Control (DTC) is a version of the Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) where drive power is optimized. The system ensures maximum drive power on unusual road conditions, for instance unplowed snow covered roads, or loose road surfaces, but with somewhat limited driving stability. General information When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐ mum traction. Driving stability is limited during acceleration and when driving in curves. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC in the following situations: ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared, snowcovered roads. ▷ When driving off from deep snow or loose ground. ▷ When driving with tire chains. TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF lights up. Deactivating DTC Press the button again. TRACTION and the DSC OFF indicator light turn off. Display Display in the instrument cluster If DTC is activated, TRACTION is displayed in the instrument cluster. Indicator/warning lights The indicator light lights up: DTC is acti‐ vated. Overview Automatic program change Button in the vehicle In certain situations, the Dynamic Stability Con‐ trol (DSC) is activated automatically: ▷ If Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go func‐ tion ACC is activated. ▷ On a brake intervention by the Intelligent Safety systems. ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire. xDrive DSC OFF Principle xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of the vehi‐ cle. Concerted action by the xDrive and and other suspension control systems, such as Dy‐ 221 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving stability control systems CONTROLS namic Stability Control (DSC), further optimizes traction and driving dynamics. Driving mode Integral Active Steering COMFORT General information ECO PRO Comfortable, for optimal travel comfort. xDrive variably distributes the driving power to the front and rear axles as demanded by the driv‐ ing situation and road condition. SPORT Dynamic, for greater agility. Because of the needs-based use of the allwheel-drive system, Efficient4x4 yields a reduc‐ tion in consumption. Integral Active Steering Principle The Integral Active Steering increases the ma‐ neuverability and makes a more direct steering response possible. General information Integral Active Steering is a combination of varia‐ ble steering ratio and rear axle steering. The different tunings are assigned to the differ‐ ent driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Con‐ trol. Additional information: Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 140. Using tire chains In order to guarantee free movement of the wheels when operating with tire chains, rear axle steering of the integral active steering must be switched off when tire chains are mounted. Additional information: Rear axle steering during operation with tire chains, refer to page 351. Malfunction The steering is more direct because the variable steering ratio amplifies the wheel angle while maneuvering. The rear axle steering acts to in‐ crease maneuverability at low speeds by turning the rear wheels slightly in the opposite direction to the front wheels. In the event of a malfunction, the steering wheel must be turned further at lower speeds, while the vehicle responds more sensitively to steering wheel movements in the higher speed range. At higher speeds, the rear wheels are turned in the same direction as the front wheels. For in‐ stance, this results in a harmonious lane change. Proceed cautiously and drive defensively. In critical driving situations, the Integral Active Steering can stabilize the vehicle through pur‐ poseful steering of the rear wheels before the driver intervenes, for instance in case of over‐ steering. The stability-enhancing intervention may be de‐ activated. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop. Tuning The system offers several different tunings. 222 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS Driver assistance systems Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Manual Speed Limiter Principle The system can be used to set a speed limit, for instance to prevent the vehicle from exceeding speed limits. General information The system can limit the speed, starting at a value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be driven at any speed below the set speed limit. Overview Operation Turning on Press the button on the steering wheel. The current speed is accepted as the speed limit. If the system is switched on while the vehicle is stationary or driving at low speeds, 20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit. The marking in the speedometer is set to the corresponding speed. When the speed limit is switched on, DSC Dy‐ namic Stability Control and COMFORT driving mode may be switched on as well. Turning off Press the button on the steering wheel. The system switches off automatically in the fol‐ lowing situations, for example: ▷ When the engine is switched off. ▷ When cruise control is switched on. ▷ When certain programs are activated via the Driving Dynamics Control. The displays turn off. Buttons on the steering wheel Interrupting If the reverse gear is engaged or at idle, the sys‐ tem is interrupted when rolling backwards. Button Function System on/off. Store current speed. Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug‐ gested speed manually. Rocker switch: Changing the speed limit. 223 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS Changing the speed limit Warning when the speed limit is exceeded Visual warning If the speed limit is exceeded: the indica‐ tor light in the instrument cluster flashes while the vehicle speed is greater than the set speed limit. Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed limit is set. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to the resistance point, the speed limit increases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. If the set speed limit is reached or unintentionally exceeded, such as when driving downhill, the ve‐ hicle is not actively braked. When the speed limit is set during a trip to a value below the current speed, the vehicle coasts until it drops to the set speed limit. The current speed can also be stored by press‐ ing a button: Press the button on the steering wheel. Acoustic warning ▷ If the speed limit is exceeded unintentionally, a signal sounds. ▷ When the speed limit is reduced to below the vehicle speed while driving, the signal sounds after some time. ▷ When the speed limit is intentionally ex‐ ceeded by stepping on the accelerator pedal all the way down, there is no signal. Displays in the instrument cluster Display in the speedometer Depending on the equipment, a mark in the speedometer displays the status of the system. ▷ Green marking: system is ac‐ tive. Exceeding the speed limit ▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐ rupted. When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed limit, a warning is issued. ▷ No marking: system is switched off. The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally. There is no warning in this case. Indicator light Press the accelerator pedal all the way down to intentionally exceed the set speed limit. ▷ The indicator light lights up: the sys‐ tem is switched on. When the vehicle speed drops below the set speed limit, the limit is automatically reactivated. ▷ The indicator light flashes: the set speed limit has been exceeded. ▷ Gray indicator light: the system has been in‐ terrupted. 224 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems Cruise control Principle With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad‐ justed using the buttons on the steering wheel. The system maintains the set speed. The sys‐ tem accelerates and brakes automatically as needed. General information The system can be activated starting at 20 mph/30 km/h. Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise control settings may change under certain condi‐ tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐ pending on the driving mode. Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. CONTROLS Warning The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Overview Buttons on the steering wheel Button Function Cruise control on/off. Continue cruise control with the last setting. Pause cruise control. Store current speed. Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug‐ gested speed manually. Rocker switch: Set speed. Switching cruise control on/off Warning The use of the system can lead to an increased risk of accidents in the following situations, for instance: ▷ On winding roads. ▷ In heavy traffic. ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet conditions, or on a loose road surface. There may be a risk of accident or risk of dam‐ age to property. Only use the system if driving at constant speed is possible. Turning on Depending on the equipment version, press the relevant button on the steer‐ ing wheel. The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light up and the marking on the speedometer is set to the current speed. Cruise control is active. The current speed is maintained and stored as set speed. 225 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐ eter. Turning off DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. Depending on the equipment version, press the relevant button on the steer‐ ing wheel. The displays turn off. The stored set speed is deleted. The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐ ton. Press the button. Changing the speed Pausing cruise control Interrupting manually When active, press the button. Interrupting automatically The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations, for example: ▷ When braking manually. ▷ Gear lever position D is disengaged. ▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated. ▷ The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) adjusts. Setting the speed Maintaining and storing the speed Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the resistance point, the set speed increases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. The maximum speed that can be set de‐ pends on the vehicle. ▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or decelerates without pressure on the acceler‐ ator pedal. Press the rocker switch up or down once while the system is interrupted. After the rocker switch is released, the vehi‐ cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the switch beyond the resistance point causes the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly. When the system is switched on, the current speed is maintained and stored as the set speed. 226 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems Continuing cruise control An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed. Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐ tional deceleration or acceleration may occur. Press the button with the system inter‐ rupted. Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐ ues. In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: ▷ When the system is switched off. ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. Displays in the instrument cluster Display in the speedometer Depending on the equipment, a mark in the speedometer displays the status of the system. ▷ Green marking: system is ac‐ tive, the marking indicates the desired speed. ▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐ rupted, the marking indicates the stored speed. ▷ No marking: system is switched off. CONTROLS The icon is displayed when the set speed is reached. System limits The set speed is also maintained downhill. The speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if the drive power is insufficient. In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐ ceed or drop below the set desired speed in some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill grades. Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function ACC Principle Using the Cruise Control, a desired speed and a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted us‐ ing the buttons on the steering wheel. General information The system maintains the set speed on clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto‐ matically. If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as the given situation al‐ lows. The distance can be adjusted in several steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the respective speed. Indicator light ▷ Indicator light green: system is active. ▷ Gray indicator light: the system has been interrupted. ▷ No indicator light: system is switched off. Displays in the Head-up Display Some system information can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive again within a brief period, the system is able to detect this within the given system limits. Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise control settings may change under certain condi‐ tions. For instance, acceleration can change de‐ pending on the driving mode. 227 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Driver assistance systems Safety information ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving vehicle. ▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane. Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. ▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. Overview Buttons on the steering wheel Button Function Warning An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing. With steering and traffic jam assistant: In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away, follow the following: Select function. ▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, turn the front wheels in the direction of the curb. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, also secure the vehicle, for instance with a wheel chock. Cruise control on/off. With steering and traffic jam assistant: Without steering and traffic jam assis‐ tant: Cruise control on/off. Store current speed. Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug‐ gested speed manually. With steering and traffic jam assistant: Pause cruise control. Warning The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Continue cruise control with the last setting. Without steering and traffic jam assis‐ tant: Continue cruise control with the last setting. Without steering and traffic jam assis‐ tant: Warning Risk of accident due to too high speed differen‐ ces to other vehicles, for instance in the follow‐ ing situations: Pause cruise control. Increase the distance. Switch distance control on/off. 228 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS Set function Button Function Reduce distance. Switch distance control on/off. Rocker switch: Set speed. When the system is active, press the button repeatedly until the desired func‐ tion is selected in the toolbar. The toolbar for As‐ sisted Driving mode is displayed at the bottom of the instrument cluster. Icon Sensors Function Cruise control with distance control. The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Cameras behind the windshield. Depending on the equipment version, cruise control with distance control and steering and traffic jam assistant. ▷ Front radar sensor. Additional information: Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. Application range The system is best used on well-constructed roads. The minimum speed that can be set is 20 mph/30 km/h. The selected function is shown in green. Turning on With steering and traffic jam assistant: The maximum speed that can be set is limited and, e.g., depends on the vehicle and the vehicle equipment. 1. The system can also be activated when station‐ ary. 2. Turning on/off and interrupting cruise control Press the button on the steering wheel. If necessary, set the cruise control. Without steering and traffic jam assistant: Press the button on the steering wheel. With steering and traffic jam assistant: Assisted Driving Mode The indicator lights in the instrument cluster light up and the marking on the speedometer is set to the current speed. General information Cruise control is active. The current speed is maintained and stored as set speed. This button is used to switch the config‐ ured function on and off. The button can be used to set the pri‐ marily used function. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. Turning off To switch off the system while standing, step on brake pedal at the same time. Press the button on the steering wheel: 229 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS With steering and traffic jam assistant. Setting the speed Without steering and traffic jam assis‐ tant. Maintaining and storing the speed The displays turn off. The stored set speed is deleted. Interrupting manually When active, press the button on the steering wheel: With steering and traffic jam assistant. Without steering and traffic jam assis‐ tant. Press the rocker switch up or down once while the system is interrupted. The system will be ac‐ tivated. If interrupting the system while stationary, press on the brake pedal at the same time. The current speed is maintained and stored as desired speed. Interrupting automatically The stored speed is displayed on the speedom‐ eter. The system is automatically interrupted in the following situations: DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on, if necessary. ▷ When the driver applies the brakes. The speed can also be stored by pressing a but‐ ton. ▷ When selector lever position D is disengaged. ▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated. ▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control intervenes. ▷ If the safety belt and the driver's door are opened while the vehicle is standing still. Press the button. Changing the speed ▷ If the system has not detected objects for an extended period, for instance on a road with very little traffic without curb or shoulder markings. ▷ If the detection range of the radar is impaired, for instance by contamination or heavy pre‐ cipitation. ▷ After a longer stationary period when the ve‐ hicle has been braked to a stop by the sys‐ tem. Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly until the desired speed is set. If active, the displayed speed is stored and the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the road is clear. 230 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems ▷ Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the resistance point, the set speed increases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h. ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed past the resistance point, the desired speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h. Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the action. Adjusting the distance CONTROLS according to the traffic situation or the ambient conditions, for instance poor visibility. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. If necessary, "Driving" 5. "Speed Limit Assistance" 6. "Adjust distance acc. to situation" Continuing cruise control Safety information An interrupted cruise control can be continued by calling up the stored speed. Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the system limits, deceleration can be late. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the traffic situation at all times. Ad‐ just the distance to the traffic and weather con‐ ditions and maintain the prescribed safety dis‐ tance, possibly by braking. Make sure that the difference between current speed and stored speed is not too large before calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, uninten‐ tional deceleration or acceleration may occur. Press the button on the steering wheel with the system interrupted: With steering and traffic jam assistant. Without steering and traffic jam assis‐ tant. Reduce distance Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set. Instrument cluster will display selected distance. Increase the distance Cruise control is continued with the stored val‐ ues. In the following cases, the stored speed value is deleted and cannot be called up again: ▷ When the system is switched off. ▷ When drive-ready state is switched off. Press the button repeatedly until the desired distance is set. Instrument cluster will display selected distance. Automatic adaptation of the distance Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐ ket version: the system can be adjusted so that the distance to the vehicle driving in front is auto‐ matically adjusted within the configured distance 231 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS Changing between cruise control with/without distance control Display in the speedometer Depending on the equipment, a mark in the speedometer displays the status of the system. Safety information ▷ Green marking: system is ac‐ tive, the marking indicates the desired speed. Warning The system does not react to traffic driving ahead of you, but instead maintains the stored speed. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions and brake as needed. ▷ Grey marking: system is inter‐ rupted, the marking indicates the stored speed. ▷ No marking: system is switched off. Distance to vehicle ahead of you Change over mode of the cruise control Switching cruise control without distance control off and on: ▷ Press and hold this button. ▷ Press and hold this button. With steering and traffic jam assistant: switch on distance control: Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you is shown. Icon Description Distance 1 Distance 2 Press the button. Without steering and traffic jam assistant: switch on distance control: ▷ Press the button. ▷ Press the button. After changing, a Check Control message is dis‐ played. Displays in the instrument cluster General information Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐ plays in the instrument cluster may vary. Distance 3 Distance 4 This value is set automatically after the system is switched on. No distance control display, as the accelerator pedal is being pressed. 232 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems Detected vehicle Icon Icon Description Description Symbol flashes gray: Green icon: The conditions are not adequate for the system to work. A vehicle has been detected ahead of you. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you ac‐ tively resume control by press‐ ing on the brake pedal or accel‐ erator pedal. When the distance to the detected vehicle in‐ creases, the vehicle symbol in the distance dis‐ play will move away. Vehicle symbol flashes red and a signal sounds: If necessary, independent drive-off, such as by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by pressing the rocker switch. Indicator/warning lights Icon CONTROLS Description Vehicle symbol white: No distance control display, as the accelerator pedal is being pressed. Green icon: A vehicle has been detected ahead of you. The vehicle symbol goes out if no vehicle in front is detected. Vehicle symbol flashes green: Vehicle in front drove off. Gray icon: System interrupted. Brake and make an evasive ma‐ neuver, if necessary. Alternative displays Icon Description Indicator light green: system is active. No indicator light: system is switched off. Vehicle symbol flashes: The conditions are not adequate for the system to work. The system was deactivated but applies the brakes until you ac‐ tively resume control by press‐ ing on the brake pedal or accel‐ erator pedal. The vehicle symbol and dis‐ tance bars blink red and an acoustic signal sounds: Brake and make an evasive ma‐ neuver, if necessary. System interrupted. 233 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS Displays in the Head-up Display Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might not be detected. Set speed Some system information can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. The icon is displayed when the set speed is reached. Distance information The icon is displayed when the distance from the vehicle traveling ahead is too short. The distance information is active in the follow‐ ing situations: Deceleration The system does not decelerate in the following situations: ▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving road users. ▷ Depending on the equipment, with red traffic lights. ▷ For cross traffic. ▷ For oncoming traffic. Merging vehicles ▷ Active Cruise Control switched off. ▷ Display in the Head-up Display selected. Head-Up Display, refer to page 173. ▷ Distance too short. ▷ Speed greater than approx. 40 mph/70 km/h. System limits System limits of the sensors Additional information: ▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. ▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36. Detection range If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly merges into your lane, the system may not be able to au‐ tomatically restore the selected distance. It may not be possible to restore the selected distance in certain situations, including if you are driving significantly faster than vehicles driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you is reli‐ ably detected, the system requests that the driver intervene by braking and carrying out eva‐ sive maneuvers, if needed. The detection capability of the system and the automatic braking performance are limited. 234 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems Cornering CONTROLS Weather The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐ orable weather or light conditions: ▷ Poorer vehicle detection. ▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already recognized. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐ stance by braking, steering or evading. When the set speed is too high for a curve, the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a curve at an appropriate speed. The system has a limited detection range. Situa‐ tions can arise in tight curves where a vehicle driving ahead will not be detected or will be de‐ tected very late. Drive power The set speed is also maintained downhill. The speed may not be maintained on uphill grades if the drive power is insufficient. In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may ex‐ ceed or drop below the set desired speed in some situations, for instance on downhill or uphill grades. Speed Limit Assistant Principle Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the speed limit. A suggested speed can be applied. When you approach a curve the system may briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to the bend of the curve. If the system decelerates you may compensate it by briefly accelerating. After releasing the accelerator pedal the system is re‐ activated and controls speed independently. General information When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit, this new speed value can be applied for the following systems: ▷ Manual Speed Limiter. ▷ Cruise control. Driving off In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off automatically; for example: ▷ On steep uphill grades. ▷ In front of bumps in the road. ▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function ACC. The speed value is suggested as the new de‐ sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed value, the corresponding system must be acti‐ vated. In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal. 235 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS Safety information ▷ "Adjust manually": detected speed limits can be applied manually. Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. ▷ "Show anticipation": current and upcom‐ ing speed limits are displayed in the in‐ strument cluster without being applied. ▷ "Show current limit": current speed limits are displayed without being applied in the instrument cluster. ▷ "Off": depending on the national-market version, Speed Limit Info and Speed Limit Assistant will be turned off. Displays in the instrument cluster Warning The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted or called up by mistake. There is a risk of accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropriate. A message is displayed in the instrument cluster when the system and a driver assistance system are activated. Icon Function Depending on the equipment ver‐ sion, the indicator light illuminates green, together with the icon for a cruise control system: Overview Buttons on the steering wheel Button Function Accept suggested speed manually. Speed Limit Assistant is active and detected speed limits can be ap‐ plied manually for the displayed system. Detected change of a speed limit with immediate effect. Rocker switch: Set speed, refer to Cruise Control. Turning Speed Limit Assistant on/off 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" Indicator light illuminates green: the detected speed limit can be applied with the SET button. After it has been applied, a green checkmark is displayed. 3. "Driver Assistance" Manual adoption 4. If necessary, "Driving" A detected speed limit can be applied manually for the active driver assistance system. 5. "Speed Limit Assistance" 6. "Speed limits" 7. Select the desired setting: When the SET icon lights up, press the button. 236 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS Steering Assistant Adapt to route Principle The system can be configured so that the vehi‐ cle adapts the speed automatically to the route. For instance, the speed will be reduced in the following situations, if necessary: Principle The Steering Assistant helps keep the vehicle in the lane. For this purpose, the system executes supporting steering movements, for instance when driving in a curve. ▷ Before making turns. ▷ Before a roundabout. General information ▷ Before a curve. Depending on the speed, the system orients it‐ self according to the lane markings or vehicles in front. Adjustment Sensors on the steering wheel detect whether the steering wheel is being touched. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. If necessary, "Driving" 5. "Speed Limit Assistance" 6. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust speed to route" System limits Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed Limit Info system. Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info. Upcoming speed limits can only be applied for the Active Cruise Control ACC. Depending on the national-market version, the system may not respond at all or with limitations to the route when the navigation system is un‐ able to clearly identify the position of the vehicle. Additional information: Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. Overview Buttons on the steering wheel Button Function ▷ System limits of Speed Limit Information, re‐ fer to page 170. ▷ System limits of the sensors, refer to page 35. Steering and traffic jam assistant incl. Traffic Jam Assistant on/off. Switch function on. Sensors The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: 237 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS ▷ Cameras behind the windshield. Set function ▷ Front radar sensor. When the system is active, press the button repeatedly until the desired func‐ tion is selected in the toolbar. The toolbar for As‐ sisted Driving mode is displayed at the bottom of the instrument cluster. ▷ Radar sensors, side, front. ▷ Radar sensors, side, rear. Additional information: Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. Functional requirements Icon Function Cruise control with distance control. ▷ Speed below 130 mph/210 km/h. ▷ Sufficient lane width. Depending on the equipment version, cruise control with distance control and steering and traffic jam assistant. ▷ Above approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane mark‐ ing on both sides is detected. ▷ Below approx. 43 mph, 70 km/h: lane marking on both sides or a vehicle driving ahead is de‐ tected. ▷ Hands on the steering wheel rim. ▷ Wide curves. ▷ Drive in the center of the lane. The selected function is shown in green. Turning on ▷ Turn signal switched off. ▷ The sensor system calibration process is complete. ▷ Cruise control with distance control active. ▷ Safety belt on the driver's side fastened. ▷ Forward Collision Warning active. ▷ Pedestrian Warning active. ▷ Side Collision Warning active. 1. Press the button on the steering wheel. 2. Adjust the steering and traffic jam assistant if necessary. Steering wheel symbol lights up gray. The system is on standby and does not manipulate steering. System activates automatically as soon as all function conditions are fulfilled. Turning on/off Assisted Driving Mode Steering wheel symbol lights up green. The system is active. General information This button is used to switch the config‐ ured function on and off. With the system switched on, the Pedestrian Warning with City Collision Mitigation and the side collision mitigation are active. The button can be used to set the pri‐ marily used function. Turning off Press the button on the steering wheel. The indicator goes out. 238 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems The system does not perform supportive steer‐ ing wheel movements. Icon CONTROLS Description Interrupting automatically Yellow flashing steering wheel symbol: The system interrupts the supporting steering movements automatically, for example in the fol‐ lowing situations: Lane marking driven over. The steering wheel vibrates where applicable. ▷ At a speed above 130 mph/210 km/h. ▷ When the driver applies the brakes. Yellow steering wheel symbol and a signal sounds, if applica‐ ble: ▷ When you manipulate steering. System interruption is imminent. ▷ When leaving own lane. ▷ When the turn signal is switched on. Steering wheel symbol blinks red, signal sounds: ▷ When the lane is too narrow. System is switching off. ▷ If a lane boundary is not detected for a certain period of time and no vehicle is driving ahead. Yellow steering wheel symbol: ▷ When the steering wheel is released. The hands are not grasping the steering wheel. The system is still active. ▷ The Active Cruise Control ACC is interrupted. ▷ The safety belt on the driver's side is unfas‐ tened. Red steering wheel symbol and a signal sounds: Steering wheel symbol lights up gray. The hands are not grasping the steering wheel. System interrup‐ tion is imminent. The system is on standby and does not manipulate steering. System activates automatically as soon as all function conditions are fulfilled. The system reduces the speed to a standstill if applicable. It is possible that the system will not execute any supporting steering movements. Displays in the instrument cluster Icon Description Gray steering wheel symbol: The system is on standby. Green steering wheel symbol: The system is activated. The system supports the driver in keeping the vehicle within the lane. Alternative displays Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐ plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are displayed as follows: Icon Description Gray steering wheel symbol: The system is on standby. Green steering wheel symbol: The system is activated. 239 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS Icon Description Displays on the steering wheel Depending on equipment, yel‐ low flashing steering wheel sym‐ bol: Lane marking driven over. The steering wheel vibrates where applicable. Yellow steering wheel symbol and a signal sounds, if applica‐ ble: System interruption is imminent. Depending on equipment, steer‐ ing wheel symbol flashes red, signal sounds: System is switching off. Green steering wheel icon and lane marking icon: The system supports the driver in keeping the vehicle within the lane. Yellow steering wheel symbol: The hands are not grasping the steering wheel. The system is still active. Red steering wheel symbol and a signal sounds: The hands are not grasping the steering wheel. System interrup‐ tion is imminent. It is possible that the system will not execute any supporting steering movements. With Active Cruise Control, the system may reduce the speed. The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate analogously to the displays in the instrument cluster: ▷ Yellow: system interruption is imminent. ▷ Red: system will be deactivated. The steering wheel displays can be switched on/off if required. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Steering Wheel Feedback" 5. "Light elements" Displays in the Head-up Display All system information can also be displayed in the Head-up Display. System limits General information The system cannot be activated or meaningfully used in certain situations. Safety information Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as 240 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ tem’s operation and limitations. System limits of the sensors Additional information: ▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. CONTROLS Extended Traffic Jam Assistant Principle Extended Traffic Jam Assistant supports the driver with vehicle control in traffic jam situations. ▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36. Supporting steering movements take place with‐ out the driver actively steering. Hands on the steering wheel General information The sensors cannot detect hand-steering wheel contact in the following situations: The system uses the sensors of the steering and lane control assistant. ▷ Driving with gloves. ▷ Protective covers on the steering wheel. Narrow lanes When driving within narrow lanes, the system cannot be activated or effectively used, for in‐ stance in the following situations: ▷ In construction areas. ▷ Depending on the equipment, with automatic formation of emergency lanes. ▷ Within city limits. Weather The following restrictions can occur under unfav‐ orable weather or light conditions: ▷ Poorer recognition of vehicles and lane mark‐ ings. ▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that are already recognized. Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for in‐ stance by braking, steering or evading. Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch the traffic situation closely, be ready to take over steering and braking at any time, and actively intervene where appropriate. State laws differ and the use of this function may violate the law. Before use, check your state and local laws. Additionally, the notices for the Steering and Lane Control Assistant apply. Additional information: Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to page 237. Functional requirements ▷ The functional requirements of the steering and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled. Functional requirements, refer to page 238. ▷ The steering and traffic jam assistant is ac‐ tive. 241 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Driver assistance systems ▷ The function is only available on certain street types, e.g. freeways. ▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐ clists. Displays in the instrument cluster Icon ▷ Sufficient lane width. Description Indicator light green: system is active. ▷ Lane markings and a vehicle driving ahead are detected. Indicator light white: system is ready. ▷ Speed less than approx. 40 mph/60 km/h. ▷ The Driver Attention Camera in the instru‐ ment cluster detects that the driver is paying attention to the traffic. Gray indicator light: the system has been interrupted. ▷ The function must be available in the country in which the vehicle is driven. Alternative displays Turning on As soon as all functional requirements are met, Extended Traffic Jam Assistant will be displayed as an additional icon in the toolbar. The toolbar is displayed at the bottom of the instrument cluster. Select Extended Traffic Jam Assistant with the button on the steering wheel. The icon for Extended Traffic Jam Assistant is shown in green. Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐ plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are displayed as follows: Indicator light Description Indicator light green: system is active. Displays on the steering wheel Two green LED lights are illuminated on the steering wheel. The indicator light in the instrument cluster is shown in green. The system begins to assist the driver with vehi‐ cle control. The two LED lights above the buttons illuminate analogously to the displays in the instrument cluster: ▷ Green: the system is active. ▷ Yellow: system will be interrupted. ▷ Red: system will be deactivated. 242 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems System limits CONTROLS Safety information General information The limits of the Steering and Lane Control As‐ sistant system apply. Additional information: Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to page 237. Driver Attention Camera Always monitor the traffic conditions. The Driver Attention Camera detects whether or not the driver is paying attention to the traffic conditions. The Driver Attention Camera may not be fully functional in the following situations: ▷ When the Driver Attention Camera is covered by the steering wheel. ▷ With sunglasses with high protection from in‐ frared light. Depending on the equipment version: Automatic Lane Change Assistant Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. Additionally, the notices for the Steering and Lane Control Assistant apply. Additional information: Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to page 237. Functional requirements ▷ The functional requirements of the steering and traffic jam assistant are fulfilled. Functional requirements, refer to page 238. ▷ Driving on a road without pedestrians or cy‐ clists and with physical barriers to oncoming traffic, such as crash barriers. ▷ Lane markings have been detected. ▷ Maximum speed approx. 110 mph, 180 km/h. ▷ The minimum speed is country-specific. Principle The system additionally supports the driver when changing lanes on multilane roads. General information The system uses the sensors of the steering and lane control assistant. Switch lane change assist on/off 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. If necessary, "Driving" 5. "Steering Assistance" 6. "Automatic Lane Change" 243 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Driver assistance systems Changing lanes 1. Ensure that the traffic situation permits changing lanes. 2. Press the turn signal lever in the required di‐ rection to the pressure point for signaling briefly. A supporting steering movement in the re‐ quired direction can be detected a short time later. Displays in the instrument cluster Icon Description Green steering wheel symbol. Green arrow symbol for lanechanging. The system carries out a lane change. Green steering wheel symbol. Gray line for lane marking on the appropriate side. The system detected the lane change request. Lane change not currently possible. After the lane change, the system helps keep the vehicle in the new lane. Depending on country specifica‐ tions: Green steering wheel symbol. Canceling a lane change Gray arrow symbol for lanechanging. The lane change can be canceled by steering movement into the opposite direction. Lane change not possible; func‐ tional requirements not met. Alternative displays Depending on the equipment version, the dis‐ plays in the instrument cluster may vary and are displayed as follows: 244 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems Icon Description Green steering wheel symbol. Gray line for lane marking on the appropriate side. Green arrow symbol for lanechanging. The system carries out a lane change. CONTROLS Depending on the equipment version: lane change with active guidance Principle Green steering wheel symbol. The system assists the driver when lane changes are necessary to reach a navigation destination. Gray line for lane marking on the appropriate side. General information No arrow symbol for lanechanging on the display. The system uses the sensors of the steering and lane control assistant. The system detected the lane change request. Lane change not currently possible. Safety information Depending on country specifica‐ tions: Green steering wheel symbol. Gray line for lane marking on the appropriate side. Gray arrow symbol for lanechanging. Lane change not possible; func‐ tional requirements not met. System limits The limits of the Steering and Lane Control As‐ sistant system apply. Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. Additionally, the notices for the Active Cruise Control and the Steering and Lane Control As‐ sistant apply. Additional information: Additional information: ▷ Active Cruise Control, refer to page 227. Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to page 237. ▷ Steering and Lane Control Assistant, refer to page 237. Functional requirements ▷ Active Cruise Control is activated. ▷ Driving on a highway or highway-like road. ▷ Lane markings on the side of the desired lane change detected. ▷ Navigation system: guidance is activated. 245 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Driver assistance systems ▷ Adaptation to the course of the route is acti‐ vated. Turn on adaptation to the course of the route ▷ The function must be available in the country in which the vehicle is driven. 1. "CAR" Changing lanes 3. "Driver Assistance" 1. One or more lane changes are required to reach a navigation destination. 4. If necessary, "Driving" The system prepares for this lane change. For this purpose, the system determines a suitable opening in the traffic flow on the next lane. 2. When a gap is detected, the speed is adapted so that the vehicle remains at the level of the opening. 3. A Check Control message indicates a lane change suggestion. When Steering Assistant is active, a steering intervention in the direction of the relevant lane may occur. 4. When the traffic situation permits a lane change, the driver can steer the vehicle into the next lane. When equipped with Automatic Lane Change Assistant: after the Check Control message has been displayed, the Automatic Lane Change Assistant can be started by operating the turn signal. 2. "Settings" 5. "Speed Limit Assistance" 6. "Adjust to route" or "Automatically adjust speed to route" System limits The limits of the Active Cruise Control and Steering and Lane Control Assistant systems ap‐ ply. Parking assistance systems Principle The parking assistance systems support the driver in parking and maneuvering. General information The parking assistance systems comprise the following individual systems. Additional information: Display in the instrument cluster Icon Function The suggestion for the lane change is displayed and a green checkmark indi‐ cates the active function. Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐ ket version, the traffic situation is displayed in the Assisted Driving View of the instrument cluster. Additional information: Assisted Driving View, refer to page 156. ▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 247. ▷ Depending on equipment version: emer‐ gency brake function, Active PDC, refer to page 250. ▷ Side parking aid, refer to page 250. ▷ Without Surround View: rearview camera, re‐ fer to page 251. ▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to page 254. ▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, driving out of parking space, refer to page 258. ▷ Back-up Assistant, refer to page 259. 246 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems ▷ Surround View with rearview camera, refer to page 261. ▷ Panorama View, refer to page 266. ▷ Remote 3D View, refer to page 268. ▷ Remote Control Parking, refer to page 269. ▷ Cross traffic warning, refer to page 272. PDC Park Distance Control CONTROLS Warning Due to high speeds when PDC Park Distance Control is activated, the warning can be de‐ layed due to physical circumstances. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Control is not yet active. Overview Principle Park Distance Control (PDC) helps with parking. Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles in front of or behind the vehicle. Button in the vehicle Depending on the equipment version: obstacles that are detected by the side ultrasonic sensors may also be reported by the side protection. General information The range of the system, depending on obsta‐ cles and environmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m. An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im‐ pending collision at a distance to the object of approx. 27 in/70 cm. For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic warning is already issued at a distance to the ob‐ ject of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m. Park assistance button Sensors The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear bumpers. Safety information ▷ Depending on the equipment: ultrasonic sen‐ sors on the side. Additional information: Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. Turning on/off Turning on automatically The system switches on automatically in the fol‐ lowing situations: 247 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS ▷ If selector lever position R is engaged when the engine is running. Warning ▷ Depending on the equipment version: while approaching detected obstacles at a speed slower than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. The ac‐ tivation distance depends on the situation in question. Signal tones You may switch automatic activation when ob‐ stacles are detected on and off. General information An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an object is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a signal tone sounds from the rear left speaker. The shorter the distance to the object, the shorter the intervals. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Parking and Maneuvering" 5. If necessary, "Automatic PDC Activation" 6. "Automatic PDC Activation" Depending on equipment, an additional camera view is also switched on. When the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is sounded. When there are objects in front of and behind the vehicle at the same time, with a distance smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating constant tone will sound. Automatic deactivation during forward travel The intermittent tone and constant tone are switched off if the selector lever position P is en‐ gaged. The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. The intermittent tone is switched off after a short time when the vehicle is stationary. Switch the system back on, if needed. Switching on/off manually Press the park assistance button. Volume The PDC signal tone volume can be adjusted. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" ▷ On: the LED lights up. 3. "Driver Assistance" ▷ Off: the LED goes out. 4. "Parking and Maneuvering" The rearview camera image is displayed if the re‐ verse gear is engaged when pressing the park assistance button. 5. "Volume PDC signal" 6. Set the desired value. Depending on the equipment version, the sys‐ tem cannot be switched off manually if the re‐ verse gear is engaged. 248 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems Visual warning CONTROLS of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ tem’s operation and limitations. System limits of the sensors Additional information: ▷ Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 37. Limits of ultrasonic measurement The approach of the vehicle to an object is shown on the Control Display. Objects that are farther away are already displayed on the Control Display before a signal sounds. The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐ urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in the following situations: The display appears as soon as PDC is activated. ▷ With obstacles and persons at the edge of the lane. The range of the sensors is represented in the colors green, yellow and red when obstacles are detected. Lanes are faded in for better estimation of the re‐ quired space. ▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance curbs, can move into the blind area of the sensors before or after a continuous tone sounds. When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐ played, the switch can be made to PDC or to a different view with obstacle markings as needed: Unwarranted warnings 1. Press the Controller to the left, if needed. To prevent unwarranted alarms, switch off auto‐ matic Park Distance Control PDC activation on obstacle detection, for instance in automatic car washes. 2. For instance "Park. sensors only" Cross traffic warning: depending on the equip‐ ment, it is warned in the PDC display against ve‐ hicles approaching in the front or rear from the side. Additional information: Cross traffic warning, refer to page 272. System limits Reaching the system limits can cause unwar‐ ranted warnings. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. White icon is displayed, and the range of the sensors is dimmed on the Control Display. PDC Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Safety information Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk 249 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS Depending on equipment version: emergency brake function, Active PDC Additionally, the safety information for the PDC Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking Assistant apply. Additional information: ▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 247. Principle The emergency braking function of PDC initiates an emergency braking in case of acute risk of collision. ▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to page 254. General information The emergency brake function can be switched off temporarily: Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre‐ vented under all circumstances. Temporary switching off Confirm the message on the Control Display. The function is available below walking speed when driving in reverse or rolling backward. During continued driving in this surrounding sit‐ uation, no further emergency braking will occur. A press of the accelerator pedal interrupts the brake intervention. Settings After emergency braking to a stop, further creep‐ ing toward an obstacle is possible. Proceed with caution. To move forward, lightly press the accel‐ erator pedal and release as needed. If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer, the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possible at any time. The system uses the ultrasonic sensors of the Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking As‐ sistant. It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle will be protected by the system. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Parking and Maneuvering" 5. "Active PDC with braking interv." 6. Select the desired setting. System limits Safety information The limits of the systems of the Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking Assistant apply. Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate. If required, deactivate the system via iDrive where applicable. With Parking Assistant: side parking aid Principle The side protection warns of obstacles on the side of the vehicle. 250 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems General information In addition to the front and rear ultrasonic sen‐ sors, the system uses the side ultrasonic sen‐ sors. Safety information CONTROLS ▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐ stacles. ▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles were detected. ▷ No markings, black area: the area next to the vehicle was not yet captured. Limits of the side parking aid Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Additionally, the safety information for the PDC Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking Assistant apply. Additional information: ▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 247. ▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to page 254. The system only displays stationary obstacles that were previously detected by sensors while passing them. The system does not detect whether an obstacle moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary, the markings are shown in black after a certain time. The area next to the vehicle must be newly cap‐ tured. Additionally, the limits of the systems of the Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking Assistant apply. Without Surround View: rearview camera Principle The rearview camera provides assistance in parking and maneuvering backwards. The area behind the vehicle is shown on the Control Dis‐ play. Display Additionally, assistance functions can be shown in the display, e.g., help lines. Safety information Warning To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐ cle. The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic 251 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS and vehicle surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Depending on the vehicle equipment: switching on/off manually Press the park assistance button. Overview Depending on the vehicle equipment: button in the vehicle ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ Off: the LED goes out. The parking assistance functions are shown on the Control Display. Switching the view via iDrive If the rearview camera view is not displayed, change the view via iDrive: 1. If necessary, tilt the Controller to the side. 2. "Rear view camera" The rearview camera image is displayed. Park assistance button Functional requirements Sensors ▷ The trunk lid is fully closed. The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Rearview camera. Additional information: Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. Turning on/off ▷ Keep the recording range of the camera open. Protruding cargo, roof rack systems or trailers can limit the detection range of the camera. Display on the Control Display Toolbars Turning on automatically The system is switched on automatically if selec‐ tor lever position R is engaged when the engine is running. Automatic deactivation during forward travel The assistance functions can be activated man‐ ually via the toolbars on the sides of the Control Display. 1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed. 2. With corresponding equipment: "Camera image" 3. ▷ The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. Switch the system back on, if needed. "Parking aid lines". Pathway lines and turning circle lines are displayed. ▷ "Obstacle mark.". Depending on the vehicle equipment, the obstacles detected by PDC Park Distance Control are displayed by markings. 252 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems More than one assistance function can be active at the same time. Parking aid lines CONTROLS Parking using lanes and turning circle lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning circle line leads to within the limits of the parking space. 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the green lane covers the corresponding turning circle line. Lanes Obstacle marking Lanes help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads. Lanes depend on the steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements. Turning circle lines Depending on the vehicle equipment, obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park Distance Control sensors. Obstacle markings can be faded into the image of the rearview camera. The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings match the markings of the PDC Park Distance Control. Setting brightness and contrast With the rearview camera switched on: 1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed. Turning circle lines can only be superimposed on the camera image together with lanes. Turning circle lines show the course of the small‐ est possible turning radius on a level road. 2. "Camera image" 3. Select the desired setting. Only one turning circle line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain angle. 253 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS System limits ▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel parking. System limits of the sensors ▷ When parking in reverse perpendicular to the road, perpendicular parking. The system ori‐ ents itself with the middle of the parking space. Additional information: ▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. Deactivated camera When the camera is deactivated, for instance when the trunk lid is open, the camera image is displayed hatched in gray. ▷ Depending on the equipment version: when driving out of parallel parking spaces. General information Handling Detection of objects Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system. Depending on the vehicle equipment, some as‐ sistance functions also consider data from the PDC Park Distance Control. Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐ trol chapter. Automatic Parking Assistant handling is divided into three steps: ▷ Switching on and activating. ▷ Parking space search. ▷ Parking. System status and instructions on required ac‐ tions are displayed on the Control Display. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. The objects displayed on the Control Display may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display. Steptronic transmission With Parking Assistant: Parking Assistant The Automatic Parking Assistant calculates the best possible parking line and takes control of the following functions during the parking opera‐ tion: ▷ Steering. Principle ▷ Accelerating and braking. ▷ Changing gears. The parking operation is automatic. Safety information Warning The Automatic Parking Assistant supports the driver in the following situations: The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic 254 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. CONTROLS Functional requirements For the measurement od parking spaces NOTICE The system can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. The safety information of the PDC Park Distance Control apply in addition. Additional information: ▷ Maximum speed while driving forward approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. ▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehicles: 5 ft/1.5 m. Suitable parking space General information: ▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length of 1.7 ft/0.5 m. PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 247. ▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m. Overview Parallel parking to the road: Button in the vehicle ▷ Min. length of gap between two objects: own vehicle length plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m. ▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m. Perpendicular parking: ▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m. ▷ Minimum depth: own vehicle length. Park assistance button The depth of diagonal parking spaces must be estimated by the driver. Due to technical limitations, the system is only able to approxi‐ mate the depth of diagonal parking spaces. For the parking operation ▷ Doors and trunk lid are closed. Sensors The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear bumpers. ▷ Driver's safety belt is fastened. Switching on with the button ▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side. Press the park assistance button. Additional information: The LED lights up. Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. Automatic Parking Assistant is activated au‐ tomatically. 255 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS Switching on with reverse gear 1. Shift into reverse. The current status of the parking space search is indicated on the Control Display. 2. If necessary, activate: "Autom. Parking" Switching on via iDrive Display of the rearview camera or PDC view must be active. 1. Move the Controller to the right. 2. Activate the parking assistant on the Control Display: "Autom. Parking" Display on the Control Display System activated/deactivated Icon Meaning Gray: the system is not available. White: the system is available but not activated. System is activated. Parking space search is active. The parking operation is active. The system takes over the steering. Parking space search and system status ▷ Parking assistant is activated and parking space search is active. ▷ Control Display shows suitable parking spaces at the edge of the road next to the ve‐ hicle symbol. When Park Assistant is active, suitable parking spaces are highlighted and an acoustic signal sounds. ▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is clearly detected, the system automatically adjusts the suitable parking method. In the case of parking spaces suitable for parallel and diago‐ nal parking, a selection menu is displayed. In this case, the desired parking method must be selected manually. ▷ The parking operation is active. The sys‐ tem takes over the steering. ▷ Parking space search is always active when‐ ever the vehicle is moving forward slow and straight, even if the system is deactivated. When the system is deactivated, the displays on the Control Display are shown in gray. Switching signal tone for suitable parking spaces on/off 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Parking and Maneuvering" 5. "Automatic Parking" 6. "Alert if parking space detected" Signal tones of the PDC Park Distance Control During an automatic parking operation, no inter‐ mittent tone will sound from the PDC Park Dis‐ tance Control. A continuous tone sounds when the distance to a detected object is less than approx. 8 in‐ ches/20 cm. 256 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS Parking using the Automatic Parking Assistant ▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel or takes over steering. Parking ▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to overcome, such as curbs. 1. Switching on and activating the parking assis‐ tant. For this, engage the reverse gear or press the parking assist button and activate the system on the Control Display, if needed. Automatic Parking Assistant is activated. 2. Pass the row of parked vehicles forward at a speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m. The status of the parking space search and possible parking spaces are displayed on the Control Display. 3. Confirm the suggested parking space for the parking operation: select the parking space on the Control Display. The system takes over the steering. 4. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play. At the end of the parking operation, the P se‐ lector lever position is set. The end of the parking operation is indicated on the Control Display. 5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if needed. Interrupting manually The Automatic Parking Assistant can be inter‐ rupted at any time: ▷ Press the park assistance button. ▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road. ▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ap‐ pear. ▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays clearances that are too small. ▷ When a maximum number of parking at‐ tempts or the time taken for parking is ex‐ ceeded. ▷ When changing over to another function on the Control Display. ▷ If the trunk lid is open. ▷ If doors are open. ▷ When setting the parking brake. ▷ During acceleration. ▷ When the brake pedal remains pressed for an extended period while the vehicle is station‐ ary. ▷ When unfastening the driver's safety belt. A Check Control message is displayed. Resuming An interrupted parking operation can be contin‐ ued, if needed. Reactivate the parking assistant and follow the instructions on the Control Display. Turning off The system can be switched off manually: Press the park assistance button. ▷ "Autom. Parking": select the icon on the Control Display. Interrupting automatically The system is interrupted automatically in the following situations: 257 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS System limits ▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge of a port. Safety information ▷ Parking spaces that are not suitable may be detected or suitable parking spaces may not be detected at all. Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ tem’s operation and limitations. No parking assistance The Automatic Parking Assistant does not offer assistance in the following situations: ▷ In tight curves. ▷ For diagonal parking spaces. System limits of the sensors Additional information: ▷ Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 37. Functional limitations The system may be limited in the following situa‐ tions: ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads. ▷ On slippery ground. ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space. ▷ With a mounted emergency wheel. ▷ In case of changes to an already-measured parking space. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunc‐ tioned. Have the system checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Depending on the equipment version: driving out of a parking space using the parking assistant Principle The system makes driving out of parallel parking spaces easier. General information Steptronic transmission The parking assistant calculates an optimal line for pulling out of a parking space and takes con‐ trol of the following functions during the maneu‐ ver: ▷ Steering. ▷ Accelerating and braking. ▷ Changing gears. The vehicle maneuvers automatically until the vehicle reaches a position in which the driver can drive out of the parking space without further steering movements. 258 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. Additionally, the safety information for the PDC Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking Assistant apply. CONTROLS 4. On the Control Display, confirm the required direction for driving out of the parking space if necessary. 5. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐ play. Steptronic transmission: The system takes control of the maneuver. A message will be displayed at the end of the maneuver. 6. Make sure that the traffic situation permits driving out of the parking space and drive off as usual. The Automatic Parking Assistant is switched off automatically. Additional information: System limits ▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 247. The limits of the systems of the Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking Assistant apply. ▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to page 254. Functional requirements ▷ The vehicle was parked manually and objects in front of and behind the car are detected. The distance to a detected curb is at least 6 inches/15 cm. ▷ The vehicle was parked using the parking as‐ sistant and an object is detected in front of the vehicle. ▷ The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m lon‐ ger than your vehicle. With Parking Assistant: Reversing Assistant Principle The Back-up Assistant supports the driver when driving in reverse, for instance when driving out of tight or confusing parking or street situations. The vehicle stores the driving movements of the last route. This stored route can be driven back with automated steering. ▷ The vehicle has been parked in reverse. General information Driving out of parking spaces The system takes control of the steering when driving in reverse along the stored route. 1. Turn on drive readiness. 2. Steptronic transmission: Press the park assistance button or shift into reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary to switch on the Automatic Parking Assistant. 3. Tilt the Controller to the right and activate the Automatic Parking Assistant on the Control Display: "Autom. Parking" The driver controls driving the vehicle via accel‐ erator pedal and brake. The Reversing Assistant uses the control ele‐ ments and sensors of the PDC Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking Assistant. Additional information: 259 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Driver assistance systems ▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 247. 4. Follow the instructions on the Control Display where required. ▷ Parking assistant, refer to page 254. 5. Take your hands off the steering wheel and carefully drive off with the accelerator pedal and the brake. Safety information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. Additionally, the safety information for the PDC Park Distance Control and the Automatic Parking Assistant apply. Additional information: ▷ PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 247. ▷ Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to page 254. When driving in reverse, pay attention to the vehicle's surroundings, and if you encounter an obstacle, stop immediately and take over control of the vehicle. Follow the instructions on the PDC Park Distance Control. 6. Stop no later than when normal traffic is reached and take control of the vehicle, such as by shifting to a forward gear. At the end of the stored route, a signal will sound and a request will be displayed, also with the instruction to take control of the ve‐ hicle. Terminating the system The system automatically cancels in situations such as the following: ▷ When the driver grasps the steering wheel or takes over steering. ▷ When engaging a forward gear. Functional requirements ▷ During activation or intervention by driving control systems or assist systems. ▷ Drive forward without interruption to store the route. ▷ After a few minutes when the vehicle is sta‐ tionary. ▷ A maximum of 165 ft/50 m will be stored. ▷ If the vehicle leaves the stored lane during re‐ versing; for example, at the maximum steer‐ ing angle. ▷ To store the route, do not exceed a driving speed of 22 mph/36 km/h. ▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control is activated. Driving back with automated steering 1. Press the park assistance button or shift into reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary and the drive-ready state is switched on. 2. Move the Controller to the right. 3. "Back-up Assistant" ▷ When the display on the Control Display is cross-faded with messages, e.g., due to in‐ coming calls. System limits ▷ When you reach normal road traffic or if you encounter an obstacle, stop immediately and take over control of the vehicle. ▷ The maximum speed for driving in reverse is limited to approximately 6 mph/9 km/h. The system takes over the steering. 260 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems If the maximum speed is exceeded, a warning is issued and the function may be canceled. CONTROLS ▷ Unobstructed camera perspective, movable via iDrive. ▷ After driving a stored distance with major steering-wheel angles, the function of the system will be limited for the return trip. ▷ Panorama View: to present cross traffic, for instance at junctions and driveways, depend‐ ing on the currently engaged gear. ▷ Additionally, the limits of the systems of the Park Distance Control PDC and the Parking Assistant apply. Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround‐ ings or a part of it is depicted. Different influences can lead to side deviations when driving back on the stored route. For exam‐ ple, this includes the following factors: Additionally, assistance functions are shown in the display, e.g., help lines. More than one assistance function can be active at the same time. ▷ Steering movements when the vehicle is sta‐ tionary while storing the distance covered. Some assistance functions can be manually acti‐ vated. ▷ The speed is not adapted to the distance traveled. The following assistance functions are automati‐ cally displayed: ▷ Road characteristics, such as gradients or in‐ clines. ▷ Side parking aid. With Parking Assistant Plus: Surround View Safety information Principle Surround View supports the driver in parking and maneuvering. The area around the vehicle is shown on the Control Display. General information Several cameras capture the area from different selectable perspectives. The following camera perspectives can be dis‐ played: ▷ Automatic camera perspective: the system shows the camera perspective suitable for the respective driving situation. ▷ Door opening angle. Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Overview Buttons in the vehicle ▷ Rearview camera: for representing the areas behind the vehicle. ▷ Right-hand and left-hand side view: for repre‐ senting the areas on the sides of the vehicle. 261 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS Park assistance button Display on the Control Display Panorama View Overview Sensors The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Front camera. ▷ Top view cameras. ▷ Rearview camera. Additional information: 1 Toolbar, left Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. 2 Camera image Turning on/off 3 Side view Turning on automatically 5 Movable unobstructed camera perspective The system is switched on automatically if selec‐ tor lever position R is engaged when the engine is running. 6 Toolbar, right 4 Automatic camera perspective The camera perspective suitable for the respec‐ tive driving situation is displayed. Additional information: 7 Rearview camera 8 Selection window Toolbar on the left Park Distance Control, turn on/off, refer to page 247. The left toolbar can be used for the direct selec‐ tion of various views via iDrive. Move the Control‐ ler to the left, if needed. Switching on/off manually ▷ "Parking": around the vehicle. ▷ "3D view": available camera. Press the park assistance button. ▷ On: the LED lights up. ▷ "Car wash". Side view ▷ Off: the LED goes out. Depending on the equipment version, the rear‐ view camera cannot be switched off when the reverse gear is engaged. Automatic deactivation during forward travel The system switches off when a certain driving distance or speed is exceeded. The side view can be selected for the right or left vehicle side. This view helps when positioning the vehicle at the curb or with other obstacles on the side by displaying the side surroundings. The side view looks from rear to front and in case of danger, focuses automatically on possible ob‐ stacles. Switch the system back on, if needed. 262 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems Automatic camera perspective The automatic camera perspective shows a steering-dependent view in the respective driv‐ ing direction. This perspective adapts to the respective driving situation. As soon as obstacles are detected, the view changes to a fixed display of the area in front or at the rear behind the bumper or, if necessary, changes to a side view. When reverse gear is engaged, the automatic camera perspective is, if necessary, exited and the system uses a fixed perspective of the rear‐ view camera. If necessary, manually select the automatic camera perspective when reverse gear is engaged. The automatic camera per‐ spective will be retained for the current parking operation. ▷ ▷ "Parking aid lines". ▷ "Obstacle mark.". CONTROLS "Settings": apply settings, for instance to use the activation points for Panorama View. Rearview camera This view shows the picture of the rearview cam‐ era. Selection window The individual camera perspectives can be se‐ lected in the selection window via iDrive. Parking aid lines Lanes Movable unobstructed camera perspective With selection of the movable camera perspec‐ tive, a circle appears on the Control Display. By turning the Controller or via touch function, specified perspectives on the circle can be se‐ lected. The current perspective is marked with a camera symbol. Lanes help you to estimate the space required when parking and maneuvering on level roads. To leave the function, move the Controller side‐ ways and select another camera function. Lanes depend on the steering angle and are continuously adjusted to the steering wheel movements. Toolbar on the right Turning circle lines Assistance functions can be activated and set‐ tings can be entered via the right toolbar via iDrive. Move the Controller to the right, if needed. ▷ "Autom. Parking". ▷ "Back-up Assistant". ▷ "Camera image": ▷ "Brightness". ▷ "Contrast". Turning circle lines can only be superimposed on the camera image together with lanes. 263 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Driver assistance systems Turning circle lines show the course of the small‐ est possible turning radius on a level road. Car wash view Only one turning circle line is displayed after the steering wheel is turned past a certain angle. Parking using lanes and turning circle lines 1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning circle line leads to within the limits of the parking space. 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where the green lane covers the corresponding turning circle line. The car wash view assists when entering a car wash by displaying the floor and the vehicle's own track. Obstacle marking Side parking aid Principle The system warns of obstacles on the side of the vehicle. Display Obstacles behind the vehicle are detected by the PDC Park Distance Control sensors. Obstacle markings can be shown in the camera image. The colored thresholds of the obstacle markings match the markings of the PDC Park Distance Control. To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle markings are displayed on the sides of the vehi‐ cle. ▷ No markings: no obstacles were detected. ▷ Color markings: warning against detected ob‐ stacles. Limits of the side parking aid The system only displays stationary obstacles that were previously detected by sensors while passing them. 264 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems The system does not detect whether an obstacle moves later on. For this reason, at standstill, the markings are not shown anymore in the display after a certain time. The area next to the vehicle must be newly captured. Door opening angle Principle CONTROLS Setting brightness and contrast Brightness and contrast can be adjusted with Surround View or Panorama View switched on. 1. Move the Controller to the right, if needed. 2. "Camera image" 3. Select the desired setting. Functional limitations If obstacle marking is activated, the Surround View indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the opening angles of the doors. The system can be used only to a limited extent in the following situations: The system does not provide a warning of ap‐ proaching road users. ▷ In case of soiled cameras. ▷ In poor light. ▷ With a door open. Display ▷ With the trunk lid open. ▷ With exterior mirrors folded in. Gray hatched areas with icon, for instance open door, in the camera image mark areas that are currently not displayed. System limits System limits of the sensors The maximum opening angle of the doors is dis‐ played in selector lever position P. As soon as the vehicle begins moving, the opening angles are replaced by parking aid lines. Additional information: ▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. Non-visible areas Limits of the display Because of the camera angle, the areas under the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras. The vehicle's surroundings are displayed with distorted image for technical reasons. Detection of objects Even if the symbols for the door opening angles do not cross other objects on the Control Dis‐ play, the following needs to be noted when park‐ ing next to other objects: Because of the perspective, higher, protruding objects may be closer than they appear on the Control Display. Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding objects such as ledges may not be detected by the system. Some assistance functions also consider data from the PDC Park Distance Control. Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance Con‐ trol chapter. The objects displayed on the Control Display may be closer than they appear. Do not estimate the distance from the objects on the display. 265 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS Additional information: PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 247. Depending on the equipment version, the func‐ tion can only be used when driving forward. Additional information: Malfunction Surround View, refer to page 261. A camera malfunction is displayed on the Control Display. Safety information A yellow icon is displayed and the re‐ cording range of the malfunctioning cam‐ era is displayed in black on the Control Display. With Parking Assistant Plus: Panorama View Principle Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing the traffic situation. Based on the limits of the sys‐ tem, it cannot independently react to all traffic situations. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle surroundings closely and actively intervene where appropriate. Overview Button in the vehicle Panorama View gives you an earlier view of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and inter‐ sections. General information Road users concealed by obstacles to the left and right of the vehicle can only be detected rel‐ atively late from the driver's seat. The cameras in the front and rear capture the sideways traffic area to improve the view. Yellow lines in the screen display mark the front and rear end of the vehicle. The camera image shows different levels of dis‐ tortion in some areas and is thus not suitable for distance estimations. Panorama View Sensors The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Front camera. ▷ Depending on the equipment: rearview cam‐ era. Additional information: Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. 266 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems Display on the Control Display Press the button when the engine is run‐ ning. Depending on the driving direction, the image of the respective camera is displayed: ▷ "Front": front camera image. ▷ "Rear": rear camera image. Depending on the vehicle equipment, cross traf‐ fic warning can additionally warn of approaching vehicles using radar sensors. Additional information: Cross traffic warning, refer to page 272. With navigation system: activation points CONTROLS Using activation points The use of activation points can be switched on and off. 1. Press the button. 2. Tilt the Controller to the right. 3. "Settings" 4. "Panorama View, GPS-based" 5. "Panorama View is displayed automatically when set activation points are reached." Displaying activation points 1. Press the button. 2. Tilt the Controller to the right. 3. "Manage points" A list of all activation points is displayed. Principle Positions where Panorama View should switch on automatically can be stored as activation points provided that a Global Positioning System signal is received. Renaming or deleting activation points General information 2. Tilt the Controller to the right. Up to ten activation points can be stored. 3. Activation points can be used when driving for‐ ward for the front camera. Storing activation points 1. Drive to the position at which the system is to be switched on, and stop. 2. Press the button. 3. Tilt the Controller to the right. 4. "Activation point" The current position is displayed. 5. "Save activation point" Activation points are, if possible, stored with town/city and street address, or else with the Global Positioning System coordinates. 1. Press the button. "Manage points" A list of all activation points is displayed. 4. Select an activation point as needed. 5. Select the desired setting. Functional limitations The Surround View functional limitations apply. Additional information: Surround View, refer to page 261. System limits The limits of the Surround View system apply. Additional information: Surround View, refer to page 261. 267 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS With Parking Assistant Plus: Remote 3D View Switching on/off individually Pre-adjustment 1. "CAR" Principle 2. "Settings" The BMW app and the pictures of the Surround View cameras in combination with the corre‐ sponding equipment enable the display of the vehicle’s surroundings on a mobile device. 3. "General settings" The function displays a momentary view of the situation. 6. "My BMW app & customer portal" Sensors Turning on/off The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: 1. "CAR" ▷ Front camera. 3. "General settings" ▷ Top view cameras. 4. "Data privacy" ▷ Rearview camera. 5. "Individual selection" Additional information: 4. "Data privacy" 5. "Select services individually" 7. "Remote 3D View" 2. "Settings" Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. System limits of the sensors Functional requirements ▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. ▷ Data transmission must be activated. Data protection, refer to page 68. Additional information: Functional limitations ▷ BMW app must be installed on the mobile device. The system may not be fully functional or may not be available in the following situations: ▷ ConnectedDrive countries: a driver profile with an existing ConnectedDrive account must be activated. ▷ With a door or the trunk lid open. Dark fields in the display indicate areas that are not re‐ corded by the system. Driver profiles, refer to page 69. Switching the function on/off Switching on/off with other functions 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" ▷ With manually folded in exterior mirrors. ▷ When other camera functions are being per‐ formed in the vehicle. ▷ When the vehicle moves faster than walking speed. ▷ It may not be possible to use the function in every country. ▷ For reasons of data protection, the function can only be used three times within two hours. 3. "General settings" 4. "Data privacy" 5. Select the desired setting. 268 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems Remote Control Parking CONTROLS fic and parking situation closely and actively in‐ tervene where appropriate. Principle The vehicle can be remotely parked and driven out in reverse in the case of suitable forwardparking spaces, for instance a garage. The driver controls the parking operation responsibly from the outside using the BMW display key. Stop the vehicles manually in the case of obsta‐ cles. General information The following systems are included in the sys‐ tem: ▷ Parking assistant. ▷ BMW display key. ▷ PDC Park Distance Control. Using the BMW display key, the vehicle can be moved by approx. 2 times the vehicle length. The speed is approx. 1.1 mph/1.8 km/h. Button on the BMW display key: the button on the side of the BMW display key must be pressed and held for the duration of the parking operation so that the vehicle can move. Release the button for obstacles to manually stop the ve‐ hicle. The vehicle stops with emergency braking. If the ultrasound sensors detect obstacles in the parking space or the end of the parking space, the system automatically stops the vehicle as needed. The headlight is switched on for the duration of the procedure. Safety information Warning Unauthorized persons, for instance children, can move the vehicle using the BMW display key without anybody in the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Protect the BMW display key against unauthorized use. NOTICE The system can steer the vehicle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ate. Overview Sensors The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Front camera. ▷ Top view cameras. ▷ Rearview camera. ▷ Ultrasound sensors in the front/rear bumpers. ▷ Ultrasonic sensors, side. More information: sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. Functional requirements General information Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing traffic and parking situation. Based on the limits of the system, it cannot independently react to all sit‐ uations. There is a risk of accident. Watch traf‐ There are no occupants in the vehicle during the parking procedure. Driver interventions in the vehicle's interior, such as steering, will cancel the function. 269 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS Cameras and ultrasound sensors Forward parking ▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with stick‐ ers. Parking ▷ Keep sensors clean and unobstructed. Clean them as needed. While driving forward, the system applies minor steering corrections as needed. ▷ Keep camera lenses clean and unobstructed. Clean them as needed. 1. Approach the parking space driving forward, as straight and centered as possible and with a maximum distance of 6.5 ft/2 m. Suitable parking space 2. Engage selector lever position P and set the parking brake. Switch off the drive-ready state and engine using the Start/Stop button. Alternatively, the engine can continue to run. 3. All the occupants leave the vehicle. Closing the doors. 4. If necessary, switch on the display on the BMW display key and cancel the display lock. ▷ It is possible to forward-park into the parking space in a straight, centered line. ▷ Width of the parking space: own vehicle width without exterior mirrors, plus approx. 1.3 ft/0.4 m on each side, arrow 1. ▷ Distance to parking space, max. 6.5 ft/2 m, ar‐ row 2. ▷ To move the vehicle with remote control, the driver must hold the BMW display key within the wireless range, arrow 3, outside the vehi‐ cle. Maximum distance to vehicle approx. 5 ft/1.5 m to approx. 10 ft/3 m. ▷ Uphill or downhill grades max. 5 %. ▷ No duplex garages. On the BMW display key, change to the menu: "R/C parking" BMW display key, refer to page 87. 5. Press and hold the button on the side of the BMW display key for the duration of the parking operation. 6. Wait, until operational readiness is indicated on the display. Observe possible text mes‐ sages. 7. "ENGINE START": tap the button to start the engine if necessary. 8. To start the parking operation: touch the ar‐ row symbol for "drive forward" on the display. Press and hold the button: the vehicle moves as long as the button is pressed. Re‐ lease the button for obstacles within the driv‐ ing range to stop the vehicle. For approach movements: touch the arrow symbol for "drive backward". 9. At the end of the parking operation, release the button on the side of the BMW display key. The vehicle stops. "ENGINE STOP": tap the button. ▷ The parking brake is set. ▷ The engine is switched off. 270 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems Lock the vehicle with the BMW display key. Cancel, pause, continue the parking operation Cancel or interrupt the parking operation: CONTROLS 8. At the end of the reversing out operation, re‐ lease the button on the side of the BMW dis‐ play key. The vehicle stops. 9. Enter using the BMW display key and drive off as normal. Release button. The vehicle stops with emer‐ gency braking. Alternatively, the vehicle can be switched off using the BMW display key: Continue the parking operation: "ENGINE STOP": tap the button. Press button again. Observe possible text messages. ▷ The parking brake is set. Driving out in reverse Driving out of parking spaces ▷ The engine is switched off. Lock the vehicle with the BMW display key, where applicable. Cancel, pause, continue the parking operation When driving in reverse, the vehicle drives back‐ ward in a straight line without steering. Cancel or interrupt the parking operation: 1. If necessary, switch on the display on the BMW display key and cancel the display lock. Release button. The vehicle stops with emer‐ gency braking. BMW display key, refer to page 87. 2. Unlock the vehicle. 3. On the BMW display key, change to the menu: "R/C parking" 4. Press and hold the button on the side of the BMW display key for the duration of the parking operation. 5. Wait, until operational readiness is indicated on the display. Observe possible text mes‐ sages. 6. "ENGINE START": tap the button. The en‐ gine starts. 7. To start the reversing out operation: touch the arrow icon for "drive backward" on the display. Press and hold the button: the vehicle moves as long as the button is pressed. Re‐ lease the button for obstacles within the driv‐ ing range to stop the vehicle. Continue the parking operation: Press button again. Observe possible text messages. Messages on the BMW display key The icon identifies system messages. System limits Safety information Warning The system is designed to operate in certain conditions and circumstances. Due to condi‐ tions or other factors, the system may not re‐ spond. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer to the information in this Own‐ er’s Manual regarding the scope of the sys‐ tem’s operation and limitations. 271 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems CONTROLS No parking assistance Limits of ultrasonic measurement The Automatic Parking Assistant does not offer assistance in the following situations: The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas‐ urements can run into physical limits. ▷ In tight curves. The limits of the ultrasonic measurement of the Park Distance Control PDC apply. ▷ For diagonal parking spaces. ▷ At very high or very low external tempera‐ tures. System limits of the sensors Additional information: ▷ Cameras, refer to page 35. ▷ Ultrasonic sensors, refer to page 37. Functional limitations The system may be limited in the following situa‐ tions: ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel roads. ▷ On slippery ground. Additional information: PDC Park Distance Control, refer to page 247. Cross traffic warning Principle At blind driveway exits or when driving out of per‐ pendicular parking spaces, road users approach‐ ing from the side are detected sooner by the cross traffic warning than is possible from the driver's seat. General information ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the parking space. ▷ With a mounted emergency wheel. ▷ In case of changes to an already-measured parking space. ▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an edge of a port. ▷ Parking spaces that are not suitable may be detected or suitable parking spaces may not be detected at all. Functional limitations due to radio interference In the case of radio interference, functional limita‐ tions may occur during Remote Control Parking with the BMW display key. Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor the area behind the vehicle. The system indicates approaching road users. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the traffic area in front of the vehicle is monitored as well. Two additional radar sensors are located in the front bumpers. Additional information: Malfunction, refer to page 90. 272 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driver assistance systems Safety information CONTROLS Switching on/off Activating/deactivating the system Warning The system cannot serve as a substitute for the driver’s personal judgment in assessing visibility and traffic situation. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ propriate. With the button 1. Press the park assistance button. 2. Tilt the Controller to the right. 3. "Settings" 4. "Cross Traffic Warning" 5. "Cross traffic warning" Overview Button in the vehicle Via iDrive 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driver Assistance" 4. "Parking and Maneuvering" 5. "Cross Traffic Warning" 6. "Cross traffic warning" Turning on automatically Park assistance button Sensors The system is controlled by the following sen‐ sors: ▷ Radar sensors, side, rear. ▷ Depending on the equipment: radar sensors, side, front. If the system was activated on the Control Dis‐ play, it is automatically switched on as soon as PDC Park Distance Control or Panorama View is active and a gear is engaged. If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is switched on. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the front system is switched on when a forward gear is engaged. Additional information: Switching off automatically Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35. The system is automatically switched off in the following situations: ▷ When the speed exceeds walking speed. ▷ When a certain driving distance is exceeded. ▷ With an active parking operation of the Auto‐ matic Parking Assistant. 273 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Driver assistance systems Warning Display in the camera view General information The respective display is called up on the Con‐ trol Display. A signal tone may sound and the light in the exterior mirror may flash. Light in the exterior mirror The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the camera view flashes red, if vehicles are detected by the sensors. Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your own vehicle. The light in the exterior mirror flashes if vehicles are detected by the rear sensors and your own vehicle is moving in reverse. Display in the PDC Park Distance Control view Acoustic warning In addition to the optical indicator, a warning sig‐ nal sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re‐ spective direction. System limits System limits of the sensors Additional information: ▷ Radar sensors, refer to page 36. Functional limitations The system may be limited in the following situa‐ tions: ▷ In tight curves. In the PDC Park Distance Control view, the re‐ spective boundary area flashes red, if vehicles are detected by the sensors. ▷ When crossing objects move at a very slow or a very fast speed. ▷ If other objects are in the capture range of the sensors, that hide cross traffic. 274 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving comfort CONTROLS Driving comfort Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Chassis components Safety information Warning Adjusting the vehicle height may result in trap‐ ped body parts or damaged vehicle parts. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When adjusting the vehicle height, make sure that the areas of movement around the vehicle and at the wheel housing are free. Overview Button in the vehicle The chassis components are optimized for the vehicle and its application range and thereby en‐ sure the best possible Driving Dynamics. Air suspension Principle Air suspension ensures best possible driving comfort under all load conditions. Due to a varia‐ ble adjustment of the front and rear axles, the damping is adjusted to the vehicle state. Level adjustment Adjusting the level manually Press the button. General information In the case of an uneven road surface, the vehi‐ cle level can be elevated to increase ground clearance. ▷ Normal level, for normal road condition. ▷ Raised level, when the road condition is poor. In the SPORT driving mode or at higher speeds, the vehicle lowers itself. In the low speed range, the vehicle is raised to the raised level with a press of the button. Starting at a speed of approx. 20 mph/35 km/h the vehicle lowers itself automatically to the nor‐ mal level. Display ▷ LED off: normal level. ▷ LED flashes: level is being adjusted. 275 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Driving comfort ▷ LED lit: raised level. ▷ LED flashes rapidly: level adjustment not pos‐ sible. System limits ▷ It is not possible to change the level during sporty driving. ▷ It may only be possible to lift the vehicle level while the engine is running. ▷ If the state of charge of the vehicle battery is too low, a level change may not be possible. ▷ If level adjustment is activated frequently in quick succession, the system switches off to prevent overheating and is temporarily un‐ available or operates with a delay. Let the system cool down, if needed. The rapidly blinking LED on the button indi‐ cates that the system is unavailable. ▷ If the load is increased, the highest driving level may be disabled or automatically exited in order to protect the system. Wheel change Before a wheel change, deactivate the system: Press the button and hold for approx. 7 seconds, until the LED flashes rapidly. To activate system: Press the button and hold for approx. 7 seconds, then release. Malfunction A Check Control message is displayed. The sys‐ tem is impaired. Vehicle handling may be altered and driving comfort may be noticeably reduced. Visit the nearest dealer's service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop. Long periods when vehicle is parked During long periods when the vehicle is parked, it can lower itself. This is not a malfunction. When the drive-ready state is switched on with the doors closed, the vehicle is raised to the nor‐ mal level automatically. Adaptive chassis Principle The adaptive suspension is an intelligent control‐ lable suspension. The chassis reduces body movements with a sporty driving style or on an uneven road. General information The intelligent control of the chassis increases the driving dynamics and driving comfort de‐ pending on the road condition and driving style. Tuning The system offers different shock absorber set‐ tings ranging from comfortable travel to sporty driving. The shock absorbers are adjusted depending on the road condition and driving style as well as, depending on the equipment, the selected driv‐ ing mode. Additional information: Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 140. Executive Drive Pro Principle Executive Drive Pro is an actively controlled chassis. The system increases driving comfort and minimizes the lateral tilt when driving around curves. General information For active control, this system uses the available information, for instance from the navigation sys‐ tem, the Driving style analysis and the camerabased look-ahead data. 276 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Driving comfort This information influences the control of the fol‐ lowing systems, especially in ADAPTIVE driving mode: ▷ Adaptive chassis. ▷ Active roll stabilization. This further increases the agility and comfort of the vehicle. The function may be restricted if the navigation data is invalid, outdated or not available, for ex‐ ample. CONTROLS Engine sound Depending on the equipment and national-mar‐ ket version, you may be able to configure the sound of the engine. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Engine sound" 5. Select the desired setting. Active roll stabilization Principle Active roll stabilization reduces the roll tendency of the body that occurs during rapid cornering or during quick evasive maneuvers. General information The lateral tilt of the vehicle is balanced out by permanent adjustment on the front and rear axles. The vehicle is thus always stabilized. Agility and driving comfort are increased under all driving conditions. Tuning The system offers different settings ranging from comfortable travel to sporty driving. The settings are assigned to the different driving modes of the Driving Dynamics Control. Additional information: Driving Dynamics Control, refer to page 140. 277 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Climate control CONTROLS Climate control Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Automatic climate control Overview Buttons in the vehicle Air quality General information The air quality in the interior is improved by the following components: ▷ Emission tested passenger compartment. Climate control functions Button Function Temperature. ▷ Interior filter. ▷ Air conditioning system to control the tem‐ perature, air flow and recirculated-air mode. Air conditioning. ▷ Pre-ventilation. ▷ Ionizer. Maximum cooling. ▷ Fragrancing. ▷ Automatic recirculated-air control. AUTO program. Interior filter Depending on the equipment, the interior filter cleans the inflowing outside air and improves the air quality: Air recirculation mode. ▷ Dust and pollen is filtered out from the inflow‐ ing air. Intensity AUTO program. ▷ Nano-particle emissions are reduced. ▷ Gaseous pollutants are filtered. ▷ Microbial particles and allergens are filtered. Air flow, manual. Air distribution, manual. SYNC program. 278 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Climate control Button CONTROLS Function Temperature Defrost function. Principle Rear window defroster. Active seat ventilation, refer to page 129. The automatic climate control cools or heats to the configured temperature and then keeps the temperature constant. Setting the temperature Turning the wheel clockwise or counter-clockwise: lowering or raising the temperature. Seat and armrest heating, refer to page 128. Fragrancing, refer to page 290. Some of the functions can also be used via voice, e.g., temperature. Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐ ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature. Switching climate control functions on/off Temperature of the ventilation Turning on General information Press one of the following buttons: ▷ Air conditioning. ▷ Maximum cooling. ▷ AUTO program. ▷ Air recirculation mode. ▷ Right side of the air flow, manual button. ▷ Air distribution, manual. ▷ Defrosting the windshield ▷ Fragrancing. The temperature of the ventilation in the upper body region can be adjusted. The air flow of the ventilation in the upper body region heats or cools noticeably, depending on the adjusted temperature. This does not change the set interior tempera‐ ture for the driver and front passenger. Adjust temperature of the ventilation 1. "CAR" Turning off 2. "Settings" Complete system: ▷ Button on the driver's side: Press and hold the left side of the button until the control panel switches off. ▷ Button on the passenger's side: Press and hold the left side of the button. 3. "Climate control" 4. "Heating/ventilation" 5. "Temperature adjustment" 6. Set the desired temperature. The temperature is individually adjusted, e.g. colder toward blue, warmer toward red. 279 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Climate control CONTROLS Air conditioning Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body region. The air vents need to be open for this. Principle Adjust air flow on the driver's side with the pro‐ gram active. The air in the car's interior will be cooled and de‐ humidified and, depending on the temperature setting, warmed again. AUTO program Functional requirement Principle The car's interior can only be cooled with the drive-ready state switched on. The AUTO program cools, ventilates or heats the car's interior automatically. Switch climate control function on/off The air distribution and the temperature are con‐ trolled automatically depending on the interior temperature and the desired temperature setting including the selected intensity of the air flow. Press the button. The LED is illuminated with air condi‐ tioning switched on. Switching the AUTO program on/off Depending on the weather, the windshield and the side windows may fog up briefly when driveready state is switched on. The LED of the button is illuminated with the AUTO program switched on. Air conditioning is switched on automatically with the AUTO program. Depending on the selected settings and outside influences, the air is directed to the windshield, side windows, upper body, and into the floor area. When using the cooling mode, condensation that will exit below the vehicle. Press the button. Point the side air vents toward the side windows. Maximum cooling The cooling function is switched on with the AUTO program. Principle At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐ trols the program so as to prevent window con‐ densation as much as possible. The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐ timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the drive-ready state switched on. Functional requirement The function is available with outside tempera‐ tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the drive-ready state switched on. Switching maximum cooling on/off Press the button. The LED is illuminated when maximum cooling is switched on. The AUTO program is switched off automati‐ cally, when manual air distribution is set. Controlling the intensity of the air flow With the AUTO program switched on, the inten‐ sity can be adjusted. This changes the automatic control for the air mass. Press the left or right side of the button: to decrease or increase intensity. The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. 280 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Climate control Automatic recirculated-air control Principle The automatic recirculated-air control recognizes pollutants in the outside air. The outside air sup‐ ply is shut off and the interior air is recirculated. General information CONTROLS The LED of the button is illuminated when the air-recirculation mode is switched on. To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air mode switches off automatically after a certain amount of time, depending on the environmental conditions. With constant air recirculation mode, the air qual‐ ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window fogging increases. If the system is activated, a sensor detects pollu‐ tants in the outside air and controls the shut-off automatically. If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐ culated-air mode or defog the windows. If the system is deactivated, outside air continu‐ ously flows into the car's interior. Air flow, manual Principle With constant air recirculation mode, the air qual‐ ity in the car's interior deteriorates and window fogging increases. The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually. If there is window condensation, switch off recir‐ culated-air mode or defog the windows. Adjusting the air flow manually Switching automatic recirculated-air control on/off Press the left or right side of the button: to decrease or increase air flow. The selected air flow is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" The air flow of the automatic climate control may be reduced automatically to save battery power. 3. "Climate control" 4. "Air quality" 5. "Auto-recirculate" Manual air distribution Air recirculation mode Principle Principle The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐ justed manually. You may react to unpleasant odors or pollutants in the immediate environment by temporarily suspending the supply of outside air. The system then recirculates the interior air. Adjusting the air distribution manually When recirculated-air mode is switched off, fresh air is directed into the vehicle's interior. Press the button repeatedly. Select the desired setting: ▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor area. Switch air recirculation on/off Press the button. ▷ Upper body region and floor area. ▷ Floor area. ▷ Windows and floor area. 281 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Climate control CONTROLS ▷ Windows: driver's side only. ▷ Windows and upper body region. ▷ Upper body region. The selected air distribution is shown on the cli‐ mate control display. The air flow can be adjusted manually with the system switched on. If there is any window condensation, switch on the air conditioning. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield. Rear window defroster SYNC program Principle Principle The Sync program can be used to apply the set‐ tings on the driver's side to the passenger's side and the rear. Switching the SYNC program on/off Press the button. Ice and condensation are removed from the rear window quickly. Functional requirement The function is operational when the drive-ready state is switched on. The LED of the button is illuminated when the SYNC program is switched on. Switching rear window defroster on/off Depending on the equipment, the following set‐ tings of the driver's side can be transferred to the front-passenger side and the rear: Press the button. The LED is illumi‐ nated with rear window defroster switched on. ▷ Temperature. The rear window defroster switches off automat‐ ically after a certain period of time. ▷ Air flow. ▷ Air distribution. ▷ AUTO program. The program is switched off automatically if the settings on the front passenger side or in the rear are changed. Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter The microfilter removes dust and pollen from the incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter also removes gas‐ eous pollutants from the outside air that enters the vehicle. Defrost function Principle Ice and condensation are quickly removed from the windshield and the front side windows. Switching the Defrost function on/off Press the button. The LED of the button is illuminated when the system is switched on. Have this combined filter changed during vehicle maintenance. Ventilation Principle The air flow directions can be adjusted individu‐ ally for direct or indirect ventilation. 282 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Climate control Setting the ventilation CONTROLS Ventilation in rear, center General information Open the air vents and position them to ensure effective climate control. Direct ventilation The air flow is directed towards the passengers. The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depending on the adjusted temperature. Indirect ventilation The air flow is not directed towards the passen‐ gers. The vehicle interior is warmed or cooled in‐ directly, depending on the set temperature. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ row 1. ▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing of the air vents, arrow 2. Ventilation in the rear, on the side Front ventilation ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ row 1. ▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing of the air vents, arrow 2. ▷ Touch sensor or thumbwheel to vary the ven‐ tilation temperature, arrow 3. ▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction, ar‐ row 1. ▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and closing of the air vents, arrow 2. With touch sensor, push the marking in the desired direction. 283 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Climate control CONTROLS Rear automatic climate control Switching climate control functions on/off Functional requirement Overview Buttons in the vehicle The rear automatic climate control is not ready for operation if the automatic climate control is switched off or if the function for defrosting the windows and removing condensation is active. Switching on/off using iDrive 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" 4. "Heating/ventilation" 5. "Rear climate control" Climate control functions Button Switching on using the button Press one of the following buttons: Function Temperature. ▷ Maximum cooling. ▷ AUTO program. ▷ Right side of the air flow, manual button. ▷ Air distribution, manual. Maximum cooling. AUTO program. Air flow, manual. Intensity Auto program. Air distribution, manual. Active seat ventilation, refer to page 129. Seat and armrest heating, refer to page 128. Switching off using the button Press and hold the left side of the but‐ ton. Temperature Principle The automatic climate control cools or heats to the configured temperature and then keeps the temperature constant. Setting the temperature Turning wheel clockwise or coun‐ ter-clockwise: lowering or raising the temperature. 284 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Climate control Do not rapidly switch between different tempera‐ ture settings. Otherwise, the automatic climate control will not have sufficient time to adjust the set temperature. CONTROLS Controlling the intensity of the air flow With the AUTO program activated, the automatic intensity control can be changed: Pressing the left or right side of the but‐ ton repeatedly: decrease or increase in‐ Maximum cooling Principle tensity. The system is set to the lowest temperature, op‐ timum air flow and recirculated-air mode with the drive-ready state switched on. The selected intensity is shown on the display of the automatic climate control. Functional requirement Air flow, manual Principle The function is available with outside tempera‐ tures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the drive-ready state switched on. The air flow for climate control can be adjusted manually. Switching maximum cooling on/off General information Press the button. The LED of the button is illuminated when maximum cooling is switched on. Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body region. The air vents need to be open for this. To adjust the air flow manually switch off AUTO program first. Adjusting the air flow manually Pressing the left or right side of the but‐ ton repeatedly: decrease or increase air flow. AUTO program Principle The selected air flow is shown on the climate control display. The air flow, air distribution and the temperature are controlled automatically. Manual air distribution Switching the AUTO program on/off Principle Press the button. The LED of the button is illuminated with the AUTO program switched on. Depending on the selected settings and outside influences, the air is directed to the upper body and into the floor area. The air distribution for climate control can be ad‐ justed manually. Adjusting the air distribution manually Press the button repeatedly. Select the desired setting: ▷ Upper body region. ▷ Upper body region and floor area. ▷ Floor area. 285 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Climate control CONTROLS BMW Touch Command Using the button Operation of the rear automatic climate control is also possible via BMW Touch Command. General information Pre-ventilation When the vehicle is in standby state, the preventilation can be switched on or off via the auto‐ matic climate control buttons. Turning on Principle The car's interior can be cooled or heated before driving off with the pre-ventilation. Depending on set temperature and ambient temperature, the car's interior is ventilated or possibly heated us‐ ing the residual engine heat. Press any button except: ▷ Rear window defroster. ▷ Left side of air flow button. ▷ Seat heating. ▷ Seat ventilation. General information ▷ SYNC program. The system can be switched on and off directly or via a preset departure time. Turning off The activation time is determined based on the outside temperature. The system promptly switches on before the selected departure time. Functional requirements Press and hold the left side of the but‐ ton. The system switches off after leaving and lock‐ ing the vehicle. ▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state and not in drive-ready state. Via iDrive ▷ The battery is sufficiently charged. Turning on If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the maximum activation time to save the vehicle battery. The system will be available again af‐ ter the engine is started or after a short trip. ▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly. ▷ Open the air vents to allow air to flow out. Switching on/off directly General information There are different ways to switch the system on or off. The system switches off automatically after a certain period of time. The system continues to run for some time after being switched off. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" 4. "Pre-ventilation" 5. "Start now" Via BMW display key Turning on 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display key. 2. "Preconditioning setting" 3. Tap the icon or the 4. "Activate now" 5. "Start" 286 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 icon. Climate control CONTROLS Turning off 4. "Pre-ventilation" 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display key. 5. "Departure plan" 2. "Preconditioning setting" 7. Set the departure time. 3. Tap the icon or the icon. 6. Select the desired departure time. 8. Select day of the week, if needed. 4. "Stop" 9. "OK" Display Via BMW display key icon on the automatic climate control indi‐ cates the system is switched on. 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display key. REST is shown on the climate control display. The residual engine heat is used. 2. "Preconditioning setting" Departure time 4. Select the desired departure time. Principle 6. Select day of the week, if needed. Different departure times can be set to ensure a comfortable interior temperature in the vehicle at the time of departure. 7. "OK" 3. Tap the icon or the icon. 5. Set the departure time. ▷ One-time departure time: the time can be set. The system is switched on once. ▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day of the week can be set. On the desired weekdays, the system will be switched on before the set departure time. The departure time is preselected in two steps: ▷ Set departure times. ▷ Activate departure times. A minimum of 10 minutes should pass between setting/activating the departure time and the planned departure time to allow a sufficient pe‐ riod of time for the climate control. Activating the departure time Functional requirement To switch on the parked-car ventilation automati‐ cally at the departure time, the departure time must be activated first. Via iDrive 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" 4. "Pre-ventilation" 5. "Departure plan" 6. Activate the desired departure time. Via BMW display key Setting the departure time 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display key. Via iDrive 2. "Preconditioning setting" 1. "CAR" 3. Tap the 2. "Settings" 4. 3. "Climate control" 5. Activate the desired departure time. icon or the icon. Tap on the icon. 287 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Climate control Display , Symbol on the climate control display signals an activated departure time. combustible materials can come in contact with hot vehicle parts during stationary climate con‐ trol operation, e.g. leaves, grass, gas, gasoline, oil or other combustible objects. Pre-conditioning through Remote Engine Start Functional requirements Principle ▷ Battery is sufficiently charged. Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's interior prior to departure to a comfortable temperature. The system automatically cools, vents, and heats depending on the interior, external, and set tem‐ perature. Snow and ice may be removed more easily. ▷ For reasons of safety, the system can only be switched on twice consecutively. The system will be available again as soon as the driveready state is activated and deactivated again. The system starts the engine automatically and allows it to run for a limited period of time. ▷ Hood is closed. Safety information ▷ The vehicle is in idle state or standby state and not in drive-ready state. ▷ The fuel tank capacity is sufficient. ▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are set correctly. ▷ Air vents are opened. DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐ sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pollute the area in and around the vehicle or enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐ tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐ closed areas or areas with insufficient ventila‐ tion, exhaust gases can also accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suffi‐ cient ventilation. Do not switch on stationary cli‐ mate control in enclosed areas or areas with in‐ sufficient ventilation, e.g. in enclosed garages. Enabling the automatic engine start function The automatic engine start must be enabled be‐ fore using the system. Otherwise, the engine cannot switch on automatically to climatize the car's interior. Via iDrive: 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" 4. "Preconditioning/ventilation" 5. "Remote Engine Start" 6. "Starting engine for clim. control" Warning When stationary climate control is in operation, high temperatures can occur underneath the body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas system. If combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust gas system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make sure that no 7. Confirm the disclaimer. Switching on/off directly General information The system switches off automatically after ap‐ prox. 15 minutes. 288 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Climate control For reasons of safety, the system can only be switched on twice consecutively. The system will be available again as soon as the drive-ready state is activated and deactivated again. Switching on via iDrive 1. "CAR" CONTROLS Switching off with the Start/Stop button The system can be switched off directly as fol‐ lows: pressing the Start/Stop button, without op‐ erating the brake pedal. Switching on via departure time 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" General information 4. "Preconditioning/ventilation" Scheduled departure times can be set up in the system to ensure a comfortable interior tempera‐ ture in the vehicle at the time of departure. 5. "Start now" Switching on/off via vehicle key The system can be switched on and off using the vehicle key. Press the button on the vehicle key three times within 1 second. After operating the vehicle key, it will take ap‐ proximately 3 seconds until the engine is switched on. To switch off the system, press the button again three times. Switching on via BMW display key 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display key. 2. "Preconditioning setting" 3. Tap on the icon. 4. "Activate now" 5. "Start" Switching off via BMW display key 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display key. 2. "Preconditioning setting" 3. Tap on the icon. ▷ One-time departure time: the time of the scheduled departure can be set. The system is switched on once. ▷ Departure time with weekday: time and day of the week of the scheduled departure can be set. The departure time is preselected in two steps: ▷ Set departure times. ▷ Activate departure times. The climate control function will start approxi‐ mately 10 minutes before the set departure time and continue for approximately 5 more minutes after the departure time. A minimum of 10 minutes should pass between setting/activating the departure time and the planned departure time to allow a sufficient pe‐ riod of time for the climate control. For reasons of safety, the system can only be switched on once. The system will be available again as soon as the drive-ready state is acti‐ vated and deactivated again. Observe the information about the intended use of the vehicle. Additional information: For Your Own Safety, refer to page 8. 4. "Stop" 289 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Climate control CONTROLS Adjusting the departure time via iDrive Display In the instrument cluster: 1. "CAR" The engine runs for the purpose of operating the pre-conditioning. The vehicle is not ready to drive. 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" 4. "Preconditioning/ventilation" 5. "Departure plan" 6. Select the desired departure time. 7. Set the departure time. 8. Select day of the week, if needed. Adjusting the departure time via BMW display key 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display key. 2. "Preconditioning setting" 3. The icon on the automatic climate con‐ trol signals an activated departure time. The icon flashes while Remote Engine Start is running. Confirmation signals from the vehicle The activation of the system is confirmed by flashing twice. The parking lights are switched on as long as the system is switched on. Tap on the icon. 4. Select the desired departure time. 5. Set the departure time. 6. Select day of the week, if needed. 7. "OK" Activating the departure time via iDrive Ambient air package Principle The Ambient Air Package can be used to clean and scent the interior air with high-quality fra‐ grances. 1. "CAR" General information 2. "Settings" Two different fragrances can be selected in the vehicle. A variety of other fragrances is possible by replacing the fragrance cartridges. 3. "Climate control" 4. "Preconditioning/ventilation" 5. "Departure plan" 6. Activate the desired departure time. The following criteria can influence the percep‐ tion of scents in the vehicle interior: ▷ Automatic climate control settings. Activating the departure time via BMW display key ▷ Temperature and atmospheric humidity. 1. Switch on the display of the BMW display key. ▷ Physical condition of the vehicle occupants, for instance fatigue. 2. "Preconditioning setting" BMW recommends the use of genuine BMW fragrance cartridges. 3. Tap on the icon. ▷ Time of day and season. 4. Activating the desired departure time: Tap on the icon. 290 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Climate control The genuine BMW fragrance cartridges are not suitable for refilling. When a cartridge is empty, replace it with a new fragrance cartridge. Safety information CONTROLS was switched on at the completion of the last trip. Overview Button in the center console Warning Refilled genuine BMW fragrance cartridges can cause the emission of harmful substances, mal‐ functions, and damage to the system. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not refill genuine fragrance cartridges. When a cartridge is empty, replace it with a new fra‐ grance cartridge. Fragrancing Ionizer Principle Functional requirements The ionizer cleans the car's interior air of sus‐ pended particles and improves the air quality. ▷ The fragrance cartridges are sufficiently filled. Switching the ionizer on/off 1. "CAR" ▷ The interior temperature is be‐ tween 41 ℉/+5 ℃ and 104 ℉/+40 ℃. ▷ Open the air vents to allow the fragrance to flow out. 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" Selecting the fragrance 4. "Air quality" The car's interior is fragranced depending on the selected fragrance. 5. "Ionization" Two different fragrances can be selected in the vehicle. Fragrancing General information Fragrancing is done at intervals in order to avoid a habituation effect. Two fragrance cartridges in the vehicle allow switching between the fragrances. The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove compartment. To ensure a pleasant fragrance inside of the ve‐ hicle when starting the trip, fragrancing can occur prior to the trip. The system is automatically switched on with the pre-ventilation if fragrancing 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" 4. "Fragrance" 5. Select the desired fragrance. Switching fragrancing on/off, adjusting intensity Using the button Press the button repeatedly. Decreasing or increasing intensity. 291 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Climate control CONTROLS Highest intensity if three bars are shown on the climate control display. Fragrancing is switched off if no bars are dis‐ played. When an empty fragrance cartridge is indicated, the cartridge still contains a fluid carrying the fra‐ grance. However, it is not sufficient for fragranc‐ ing. When a fragrance cartridge requires replace‐ ment, a Check Control message is displayed. Via iDrive 1. "CAR" Inserting fragrance cartridges 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove compartment. 4. "Fragrance" 1. Open the glove compartment. 5. "Level" 6. Select the desired setting. Front passenger side glove compartment, re‐ fer to page 310. 2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder. Display The cartridge holder slides down. General information With operation via button, the menu of the Ambi‐ ent Air Package is displayed on the Control Dis‐ play automatically. Settings Further settings can be adjusted. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. Remove the cover of the new fragrance car‐ tridge. Hold the cover on the top to slide it from the fragrance cartridge. 3. "Climate control" 4. "Fragrance" 5. "Show fragrance setting" The menu is shown on the Control Display. Fragrance cartridge filling level The illustrations on the Control Display show the actual filling level of the fragrance cartridges. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Climate control" 4. "Fragrance" The fill level of the current fragrance is dis‐ played. 292 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Climate control 4. Insert the removed cover on the rear of the fragrance cartridge. CONTROLS Removing the fragrance cartridge The fragrance cartridges are located in the glove compartment. 1. Open the glove compartment. Front passenger side glove compartment, re‐ fer to page 310. 2. Press on the bottom of the cartridge holder. The cartridge holder slides down. 5. Position fragrance cartridge such that the chip faces away from the cartridge holder. 3. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the holder. 6. Insert the fragrance cartridge without pres‐ sure into the cartridge holder. The cartridge snaps lightly into place. Fragrance cartridge, arrow 1: first fragrance indicated on the Control Display. 7. Push the cartridge holder up, until it engages. Make sure that no objects press against the cartridge holder from below, otherwise the function of the ambient air package could be impacted. 8. Close the glove compartment. 293 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Climate control CONTROLS Fragrance cartridge, arrow 2: second fra‐ grance indicated on the Control Display. 4. Pull desired fragrance cartridge from the holder. Recycling Empty fragrance cartridges can be taken to a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop for recycling. BMW Touch Command The Ambient Air Package can also be operated using BMW Touch Command. 294 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Interior equipment CONTROLS Interior equipment Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Integrated Universal Remote Control Principle The integrated Universal Remote Control in the interior mirror can operate up to 3 functions of remote-controlled systems such as garage door drives, barriers, or lighting systems. General information The Integrated Universal Remote Control repla‐ ces up to 3 different hand-held transmitters. To operate the remote control, the buttons on the interior mirror must be programmed with the de‐ sired functions. The hand-held transmitter for the particular system is required in order to program the remote control. Safety information Warning The operation of remote-controlled systems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may result in injury, for example, body parts becoming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information for the hand-held trans‐ mitter. Compatibility If this symbol is printed on the packaging or in the operating instructions of the system to be controlled, the system is generally compatible with the integrated Univer‐ sal Remote Control. Additional questions are answered by: ▷ A dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. ▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet. HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored func‐ tions for the sake of security. If possible, do not install the antenna of the re‐ mote-controlled system, e.g. the garage door drive, near metal objects to ensure the best pos‐ sible operation. 295 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Interior equipment Control elements on the interior mirror Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐ terior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds. 6. ▷ The LED lights up green: programming completed. Release the button. ▷ The LED flashes fast: programming is not complete. ▷ Buttons, arrow 1. ▷ LED, arrow 2. ▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐ quired for programming. Programming Press the button on the interior mirror for 2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐ cedure three times to complete the pro‐ gramming procedure. If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, continue with the special features for change code wireless systems. ▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐ onds: programming not completed. General information The battery of the hand-held transmitter must be fully charged at the time of programming to en‐ sure an optimal range of the integrated universal remote control. Repeat steps 3 to 6. To program other functions on other buttons, re‐ peat steps 3 to 5. Special feature of the rolling code wireless system 1. Turn on standby state. 2. Initial commissioning: Press and hold the two outer buttons on the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi‐ mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green rapidly. This erases all programming of the buttons on the interior mirror. 3. Press the interior mirror button to be pro‐ grammed. The LED on the interior mirror will slowly begin flashing orange. 4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the handheld transmitter. If you are unable to operate the remote-control‐ led system after repeated programming, please check if the system to be controlled features a rolling code radio system. Refer to the operating instructions for the sys‐ tem. For systems with a rolling code radio system, the integrated Universal Remote Control and the system also have to be synchronized. Please read the operating instructions to find out how to synchronize the system. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a second person. 5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter. 296 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Interior equipment Synchronizing the universal remote control with the system: 1. Park the vehicle within range of the remotecontrolled system. 2. Program the relevant button on the interior mirror as described. 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button on the system being programmed, e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx. 30 seconds for the next step. 4. Hold down the programmed button on the in‐ terior mirror for approximately 3 seconds and then release it. If necessary, repeat this step up to three times in order to end synchroniza‐ tion. Once synchronization is complete, the programmed function will be carried out. Reprogramming individual buttons 1. Turn on standby state. 2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to be programmed. 3. As soon as the LED on the interior mirror flashes orange after approx. 20 seconds, re‐ lease the button. 4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons on the interior mirror. The required distance depends on the handheld transmitter. 5. Press and hold the button of the desired function on the hand-held transmitter. Canada: if programming with the hand-held transmitter was interrupted, hold down the in‐ terior mirror button and repeatedly press and release the hand-held transmitter button for 2 seconds. 6. The LED can light up in different ways. ▷ The LED lights up green: the program‐ ming procedure is completed. CONTROLS Release the button. ▷ The LED flashes fast: the hand-held transmitter was detected but program‐ ming is not complete. Press the button on the interior mirror for 2 seconds and release. Perform this pro‐ cedure three times to complete the pro‐ gramming procedure. If the integrated universal remote control remains nonoperational, continue with the special features for change code wireless systems. ▷ LED does not flash green after 60 sec‐ onds: programming not completed. Repeat steps 3 to 6. If the programming procedure is not completed, the previous programming will remain un‐ changed. Operation Warning The operation of remote-controlled systems with the integrated universal remote control, such as the garage door, may result in injury, for example, body parts becoming jammed in a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the area of movement of the respective system is clear during programming and operation. Also follow the safety information for the hand-held trans‐ mitter. The system, such as the garage door, can be op‐ erated using the button on the interior mirror while the drive-ready or standby state is switched on. To do this, hold down the button within receiving range of the system until the function is activated. The interior mirror LED stays lit while the wireless signal is being trans‐ mitted. 297 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Interior equipment CONTROLS Deleting stored functions All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐ tions cannot be deleted individually. Press and hold the two outer buttons on the in‐ terior mirror simultaneously for approximately 10 seconds until the LED on the interior mirror flashes green fast. Ashtray Front center console Opening 1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐ hind the cup holders. Sun visor Glare shield Fold the sun visor down or up. Glare shield from the side Folding out 2. Push the cover forward again until it engages behind the storage compartment. 1. Fold the sun visor down. 2. Unhook it from the holder and swing it to the side. 3. Fold the cover upward. 3. Move it back to the desired position. Folding in Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun vi‐ sor. Vanity mirror A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor behind a cover. When the cover is opened, the mirror lighting switches on. 298 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Interior equipment Emptying CONTROLS Emptying 1. Pull the ashtray with the closed cover out of the cup holder. Grasp the insert on the side and remove it. 2. Turn the lid counterclockwise to open it. Cigarette lighter Safety information Warning 3. Empty the container. Always empty the ashtray with the container open to prevent contamination of the lid. Rear door Contact with the hot heating element or the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can cause burns. Flammable materials can ignite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is held against the objects. There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Take hold of the ciga‐ rette lighter by its handle. Make sure that chil‐ dren do not use the cigarette lighter. Opening NOTICE If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. In‐ sert the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket. Press on the cover. 299 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Interior equipment CONTROLS Front center console 1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐ hind the cup holders. With rear console: opening and closing Push the cover backward until it engages. 2. Push the cover forward again until it engages behind the storage compartment. The cigarette lighter is located between the cup holders. Rear center console The cigarette lighter is located between the cup holders. Tap the cover on the handle bar to close it. Operation Push in the cigarette lighter. Without rear console: opening and closing The cigarette lighter can be re‐ moved as soon as it pops back out. Sockets Principle The cigarette lighter is on the left side. The lighter socket can be used as a socket for electrical equipment when standby and driveready state are switched on. Open: press on the cover. To close: press the cover closed again. 300 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Interior equipment General information CONTROLS Front center armrest The total load of all sockets must not exceed 140 watts at 12 volts. Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐ patible connectors. Safety information Warning Devices and cables in the unfolding area of the airbags, such as portable navigation devices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or be thrown around in the car's interior during un‐ folding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that devices and cables are not in the airbag's area of unfolding. The center armrest contains a socket. Front center console NOTICE Battery chargers that charge the vehicle battery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V electrical system. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐ ment. Push the cover forward until it engages. A socket is located between the cup holders. Rear center console Without rear console: opening and closing NOTICE If metal objects fall into the socket, they can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. In‐ sert the cigarette lighter or socket cover again after using the socket. One socket is located in the rear center console. Open: press on the cover. To close: press the cover closed again. 301 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Interior equipment With rear console: opening and closing Push the cover backward until it engages. In the cargo area A socket is located on the right side in the cargo area. Unfold the cover. USB port General information Follow the information regarding the connection of mobile devices to the USB port in the section on USB connections. A socket is located between the cup holders. Tap the cover on the handle bar to close it. Additional information: USB connections, refer to page 80. In the center armrest With rear console: rear center armrest A USB port is located in the center armrest. Properties: The center armrest contains a socket. ▷ USB port Type C. ▷ For charging mobile devices and for data transmission. ▷ Charge current: max. 3 A. 302 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Interior equipment In the front center console CONTROLS In the rear center console NOTICE Objects in the storage compartment, e.g., large USB connectors, may block or damage the cover when it is being opened or closed. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the area of movement of the cover is clear while opening and closing it. Two USB ports are located in the center console in the rear passenger compartment. Properties: ▷ USB port Type C. ▷ For charging of mobile devices. ▷ Charge current: maximum 3 A per port. Wireless charging tray 1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐ hind the cup holders. 2. Push the cover forward again until it engages behind the storage compartment. Principle The wireless charging tray enables the following wireless functions: ▷ Charging the rechargeable battery of a mo‐ bile phone with Qi capability and of other mo‐ bile devices, which support the Qi standard. ▷ Charging the BMW Display key. General information A USB port is located in the center console. Properties: ▷ USB port Type A. ▷ For charging mobile devices and for data transmission. ▷ Charge current: max. 1.5 A. When inserting the mobile phone, make sure there are no objects between it and the wireless charging tray. During charging, the surface of the tray and the mobile phone may become warm. Higher tem‐ peratures may lead to a reduction in the charge current through the mobile phone, and in iso‐ lated cases the charging process is paused tem‐ porarily. Follow the relevant instructions in the mobile phone owner's manual. The charge indicator shows on the Control Display whether a mobile phone with Qi capabil‐ ity is being charged. 303 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Interior equipment CONTROLS NOTE This device has been tested for human exposure limits and found compliant at a minimum dis‐ tance of 2 in/5 cm during operation. Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be maintained in every direction when operating the device. 1 LED 2 Storage area Functional requirements ▷ The mobile phone must compatibly support the required Qi standard. Mounting position of the product. Safety information ▷ Standby state is switched on. ▷ A possible parking operation via Remote Control Parking must be completed. Warning When charging a device that meets the Qi standard in the wireless charging tray, any metal objects located between the device and the tray can become very hot. Placing storage devices or electronic cards, such as chip cards, cards with magnetic strips or cards for signal transmission, between the device and the tray may impair the card function. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. When charging mobile devices, make sure there are no objects between the device and the tray. Overview Tray in the center console: If the mobile phone does not support the Qi standard, the mobile phone can be charged using a special Qi-compatible charging case. ▷ Observe the maximum dimensions of the mobile phone. ▷ Use only protective jackets and covers up to a maximum thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm; other‐ wise, the charging function may be impaired. ▷ The mobile phone to be charged is located in the center of the tray. Operation Inserting the mobile phone The mobile phone must not exceed the maxi‐ mum size of approximately 6.0 x 3.1 x 0.7 in/154.5 x 80 x 18 mm. 1. Open the tray cover. 2. Place the mobile phone centered in the tray with the display facing up. 3. Close the tray cover. 304 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Interior equipment CONTROLS Removing the mobile phone System limits 1. Open the tray cover. At high temperatures on the mobile phone or in the vehicle, the charging functions of the mobile phone may be limited and some functions may no longer work. 2. Remove the mobile phone. LED displays Color Meaning Blue The mobile phone is charging. The blue LED stays illuminated once the inserted mobile phone with Qi ca‐ pability is fully charged. Orange The mobile phone is not charging. Temperature on the mobile phone possibly too high or foreign object in charging tray. Red The mobile phone is not charging. Contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop. Forgotten warning General information If the vehicle is equipped with the forgotten warning function, a warning can be output if a mobile phone with Qi capability was forgotten in the wireless charging tray when leaving the vehi‐ cle. The forgotten warning is displayed in the instru‐ ment cluster. Your car is equipped with a wireless charging tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone and connect it to the mobile network. To ensure the best possible connection a signal booster (LTECompensator) is used in conjunction with the WCA. The following paragraphs refer to this booster: This is a CONSUMER device. BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DE‐ VICE with your wireless provider and have your provider's consent. Most wireless providers con‐ sent to the use of Compensators. Some provid‐ ers may not consent to the use of this device on their network. If you are unsure, contact your provider. You MUST operate this device with ap‐ proved antennas and cables as specified by the manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed at least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You MUST cease operating this device immediately if requested by the FCC or a licensed wireless service provider. Warning E911 location informa‐ tion may not be provided or may be inaccurate for calls served by using this device. Please observe additionally the following infor‐ mation ▷ Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to register their signal boosters by calling their toll-free number. Activating 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "General settings" 4. "Wireless charging tray" 5. Activate reminder. LTE-Compensator - Information and User Manual ▷ T-Mobile online registration link: (www.T-Mo‐ bile.com/BoosterRegistration); (https://saqat.tmobile.com/sites/SignalBooster#). ▷ Verizon’s online registration link: (http:// www.verizonwireless.com/wcms/consumer/ register-signal-booster.html). 305 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Interior equipment CONTROLS ▷ AT&T online registration link (https:// securec45.securewebsession.com/attsignal‐ booster.com/). ▷ U.S.Cellular online registration link (http:// www.uscellular.com/uscellular/support/fccbooster-registration.jsp). Before use you must register your booster de‐ vice with your wireless provider. If you should be requested by the FCC to cease operating your booster you are not allowed to in‐ sert your mobile phone in the charging tray any‐ more unless the booster is permanently deacti‐ vated by your local BMW dealer. You must not remove the booster from the car nor use it with any other than the preinstalled coupling device or antenna. Any modification of the existing antenna or coupling device as well as the use of other antennas or coupling devices will cause the cease of the booster´s operating li‐ cense. The booster device fulfills the network protection standards as required by the FCC, such as inter‐ modulation limits, oscillation detection and gain limits. Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive Model Number: LTECOMPB0 Safety information Warning A folded-out folding table protrudes into the ve‐ hicle interior and, in case of accident, braking or evasive maneuvers can cause injuries. Objects on the table can be thrown around the car's in‐ terior while driving. There is a risk of injury. Do not unfold or use folding table while driving. Folding open the folding table 1. Open the center armrest. Press the button for this purpose. 2. Grasp the folding table at the rear and fold forward in the center armrest. Part Number: 6803145-01 FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0 Folding table in the rear General information There is a folding table in the center armrest of the rear console. 3. Pull the folding table from the center armrest. 306 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Interior equipment 4. Close the cover of the center armrest. Opening 5. Fold the folding table down and adjust as needed. 1. Fold down the center armrest. CONTROLS Center armrest rear, refer to page 312. 2. Opening the through-loading system. Through-loading system, refer to page 318. 3. Pull on the handle and fold the cover forward. Folding in the folding table Proceed in reverse order to fold in the folding ta‐ ble. Turning on Rear cooler The cooler box can be operated at two levels. Safety information 1. Turn on standby state. 2. Warning The cover of the opened cooler box protrudes into the car's interior. Injuries can occur in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneu‐ ver. The content of the cooler box can be thrown into the car's interior and injure occu‐ pants. There is a risk of injury. Close the cooler box after use when driving. Press the button once for each cool‐ ing level. The highest cooling power is active when two LEDs are lit. If the cooler box was switched on the last time standby state was switched off, it will be switched on automatically the next time standby state is switched on. Turning off Press the button repeatedly until the LEDs turn off. NOTICE If the cooler box is lying down, the oil from the compressor will spread through the cooling cir‐ cuit. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Place the cooler box vertically for at least one hour prior to operation so that the oil can return into the compressor. 307 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Interior equipment Ejecting Installing 1. Fold the cover away to the side. 1. Open the cover. 2. Pull on the rear handle. 2. Slide the cooler box into the guide rail, until it stops. 3. Pull cooler box backward and remove it. 4. Fold the cover back. 3. Fold the cover back and secure to cooler box. Malfunction Message One of the LEDs flashes. The cooler box cannot be switched on or switches off, for instance when the cooling sys‐ tem overheats or if the battery voltage is low. 308 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Interior equipment CONTROLS Rectifying the fault 1. If necessary, allow the cooling system of the cooler box to cool down. 2. Start the engine. 3. Switch on cooler box. If the LED flashes even after a short time, have the cooler box checked. 309 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Storage compartments CONTROLS Storage compartments Vehicle features and options Front passenger side glove compartment This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Safety information Storage compartments General information Warning Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐ partment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐ cident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the glove compart‐ ment immediately after using it. Opening the glove compartment The vehicle interior contains multiple storage compartments for stowing objects. Safety information Warning Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐ tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐ terior. Pull the handle. The light in the glove compartment switches on. Closing the glove compartment Fold cover closed. Locking the glove compartment NOTICE Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can dam‐ age the dashboard. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not use anti-slip pads. The glove compartment can be locked with an integrated key. This prevents access to the glove compartment. After the glove compartment is locked, the vehi‐ cle key can be handed over without the 310 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Storage compartments integrated key, for instance when the vehicle is parked by valet parking. Additional information: Integrated key, refer to page 91. Driver's side glove compartment Safety information CONTROLS Safety information Warning Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or glasses, can break in the event of an accident or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken glass can be scattered in the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not use any breakable objects while driving. Only stow breakable objects in closed storage compartments. Warning Folded open, the glove compartment protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the glove com‐ partment can be thrown into the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐ cident, braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Always close the glove compart‐ ment immediately after using it. Storage compartment in the center console Opening the storage compartment Opening the glove compartment 1. Push the cover forward until it engages be‐ hind the cup holders. 2. Push the cover forward again until it engages behind the storage compartment. Pull the handle. Closing the glove compartment Fold cover closed. Compartments in the doors Closing the storage compartment 1. Tap the cover on the handle bar. The cover closes up to the cup holders. 2. Tap the cover again. The cover closes fully. General information There are storage compartments in the doors. 311 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Storage compartments CONTROLS Storage compartment in the rear center console Opening the storage compartment The rear center console contains a storage com‐ partment. Storage compartment between the rear seats General information A storage compartment is located behind the cover between the backrests. Opening Press the button. Closing the storage compartment Press cover down until it engages. Rear center armrest General information A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the seats. Push the cover up until it engages. Folding down Closing Push the cover up again. The cover slides down. Center armrest, front General information A storage compartment is located in the center armrest between the seats. Reach into the recess and fold the center arm‐ rest forward. Opening Depending on the equipment, proceed as fol‐ lows: 312 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Storage compartments CONTROLS Front cup holder Safety information Warning Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the cover up, arrow 2. Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled liquids can distract from the traffic conditions and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐ weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot beverages. Opening the cup holder Press the button, arrow 1, and fold the cover up, arrow 2. Push the cover forward until it engages. Press the button. Closing the storage compartment Press cover down until it engages. Two cup holders are located in the center con‐ sole. 313 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Storage compartments CONTROLS Closing the cup holder Tap the cover on the handle bar. The cover closes. Without rear console: opening and closing the cup holder Opening the cup holder Rear cup holder Safety information Warning Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may damage the cup holders or be thrown about the car’s interior in the event of an accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking. Spilled liquids can distract from the traffic conditions and lead to an accident. Hot drinks can damage the cup holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not force objects into the cup holder. Use light‐ weight, shatterproof, and sealable containers. Do not transport hot beverages. Fold the center armrest forward. Press the button. Closing the cup holder Push back the cup holder. With rear console: opening and closing the cup holder Opening the cup holder NOTICE With an open cup holder, the center armrest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Press back the covers before the cen‐ ter armrest is folded up. Push the cover backward until it engages. Closing the cup holder Tap the cover on the handle bar. The cover closes. 314 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Storage compartments CONTROLS Clothes hooks General information The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐ dles in the rear and on the door pillar in the rear. Safety information Warning Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can ob‐ struct the view while driving. There is a risk of accident. When suspending clothing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure that they will not obstruct the driver's view. Warning Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang light‐ weight objects, for instance clothing articles, from the clothes hooks. 315 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Cargo area Cargo area Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Loading Safety information Warning Improperly stowed objects can shift and be thrown into the car's interior, for instance in the event of an accident or during braking and eva‐ sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects and cargo properly. NOTICE Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that no flu‐ ids leak in the cargo area. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit Warning High gross weight can overheat the tires, dam‐ age them internally and cause a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving characteristics may be negatively impacted, reducing lane stability, lengthening the braking distances and chang‐ ing the steering response. There is a risk of ac‐ cident. Pay attention to the permitted load ca‐ pacity of the tires and never exceed the permitted gross weight. Warning Loose objects or devices with a cable connec‐ tion to the vehicle, for instance mobile phones, can be thrown about the car's interior while driving, for instance in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose objects or devices with a cable connection to the vehicle in the car's in‐ terior. 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your ve‐ hicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas‐ sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐ ble cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs) 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available 316 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Cargo area cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your ve‐ hicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. Payload CONTROLS Lashing eyes in the cargo area General information Attach load securing aids, such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area. Lashing eyes The maximum load is the sum of the weight of the occupants and the cargo. The greater the weight of the occupants, the less cargo that can be transported. Stowing and securing cargo ▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the cargo. ▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests. ▷ Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos‐ sible, directly behind and at the bottom of the rear passenger seat backrests. When the rear seat is not occupied, secure each of the outer safety belts in the opposite buckle. ▷ Small and light cargo: secure with ratchet straps or, depending on the equipment, with a cargo net or draw straps. ▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo straps. There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area for securing cargo. Multifunction hook General information A multifunction hook is located on the left side in the cargo area. Safety information Warning Improper use of the multifunction hooks can lead to a risk of objects flying about during braking and evasive maneuvers, for example. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only hang lightweight objects from the multifunction hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in the cargo area if it has been appro‐ priately secured. 317 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Cargo area CONTROLS Folding out the multifunction hook With emergency wheel: storage compartment under the cargo floor panel General information There is a storage compartment under the cargo floor panel. Press on the multifunction hook and turn until it engages. Opening the storage compartment Storage compartment on the right side A storage compartment is available on the right side of the cargo area. Fold up the cargo floor panel. Storage compartment on the left side General information Closing the storage compartment Push the cargo floor panel downward. A storage compartment is located on the left side in the cargo area. Through-loading system Opening the storage compartment Principle The through-loading system allows the transport of long objects, such as skies. Pull the handle. 318 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Cargo area Without comfort seats: opening through-loading CONTROLS With rear console 1. Push the cover up until it engages. 1. Fold down the center armrest. 2. Remove flap. 2. Pull on the loop. 3. Pull handle, arrow 1, down and fold panel for‐ ward, arrow 2. With an emergency wheel: enlarging the cargo area With comfort seats: opening through-loading Without rear console Principle The emergency wheel and any related compo‐ nents can be temporarily removed to enlarge the cargo area. Pull the loop and fold down the center armrest. 319 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 CONTROLS Cargo area Removing the emergency wheel and the storage compartments 7. Remove the storage well. 1. To remove the cargo area floor, pull it upward directly behind the rear backrests. 8. Insert the cargo floor panel. Inserting the emergency wheel and the storage compartments 2. Open the ratchet strap. Proceed in reverse order to insert the emergency wheel and the storage compartments. 3. Remove the tool holder. Ski and snowboard bag The ski and snowboard bag is contained in a protective jacket in the cargo area. Follow the installation and operating instructions included in the protective jacket. 4. Remove the emergency wheel from the stor‐ age well. 5. Loosen the ratchet strap from the lashing eyes. Depending on the vehicle equipment: remove the emergency wheel from the vehicle to mount the ski and snowboard bag. 6. Remove the storage compartment. 320 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Cargo area CONTROLS 321 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Engine, transmission, and axle drive Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km Do not exceed the maximum engine and road speed: ▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and 100 mph/160 km/h. Avoid full throttle or kickdown under all circum‐ stances. From 1,200 miles/2,000 km The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be increased. Break-in General information Moving parts need to begin working together smoothly. The following instructions will help you to ach‐ ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency. Tires Tire traction is not optimal due to manufacturing circumstances when tires are brand-new; they achieve their full traction potential after a break-in time. During break-in, do not use the Launch Control. Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km. Safety information Brake system Warning Due to new parts and components, safety and driver assistance systems can react with a de‐ lay. There is a risk of accident. After installing new parts or with a new vehicle, drive conser‐ vatively and intervene early if necessary. Ob‐ serve the break-in procedures of the respective parts and components. Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately during this break-in period. Following part replacement Observe the break-in procedures again, if com‐ ponents mentioned above are replaced. 322 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Things to remember when driving General driving notes Closing the trunk lid Safety information DRIVING TIPS hot vehicle parts while driving, at idle or during parking. Climate comfort windshield Warning An open trunk lid protrudes from the vehicle and can endanger occupants and other road users or damage the vehicle in the event of an accident, braking or evasive maneuvers. In ad‐ dition, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle in‐ terior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. Do not drive with the trunk lid open. Driving with the trunk lid open If driving with the tailgate open cannot be avoided: ▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof. ▷ Greatly increase the blower output. ▷ Drive moderately. Hot exhaust gas system The marked area is not covered with heat reflec‐ tive coating. Use the marked area for garage door openers, devices for electronic toll collection, payment systems, etc. Climate comfort laminated safety glass The vehicle glass provides full protection against the harmful effects of UV radiation on the skin. Mobile communication devices in the vehicle Warning High temperatures can occur underneath the body, for instance caused by the exhaust gas system, while driving. Contact with the exhaust gas system can cause burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not touch the hot exhaust gas sys‐ tem, including the exhaust pipe. Warning If combustible materials, such as leaves or grass, come in contact with hot parts of the ex‐ haust gas system, these materials can ignite. There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard. Do not remove the heat shields installed and never apply undercoating to them. Make sure that no combustible materials can come in contact with Warning Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can in‐ fluence one another. There is radiation due to the transmission operations of mobile phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. If possible, in the car's interior use only mobile phones with direct connections to an external antenna in order to exclude mutual interference and deflect the radiation from the car's interior. Aquaplaning On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can form between the tires and road surface. 323 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS This phenomenon is referred to as aquaplaning. It is characterized by a partial or complete loss of contact between the tires and the road surface, ultimately undermining your ability to steer and brake the vehicle. Driving through water General information When driving through water, follow the following: ▷ Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function. ▷ Drive through calm water only. ▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm. ▷ Drive through water no faster than walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. Safety information NOTICE When driving too quickly through too deep wa‐ ter, water can enter into the engine compart‐ ment, the electrical system or the transmission. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. When driving through water, do not exceed the maximum indicated water level and the maximum speed for driving through water. In certain braking situations, the perforated brake discs can emit functional noises. However, func‐ tional noises have no effect on the performance and operational reliability of the brake. Objects in the area around the pedals Warning Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐ curely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning. Pedal feel when driving off After turning on the drive-ready state from the idle state, the pedal may feel unusual, short pedal distance. After the brake pedal has been fully released, the pedal will feel as usual again. Driving in wet conditions In case of wet roads, exposure to road salt, in heavy rain, gently press the brake pedal every few kilometers. Braking safely General information The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock Braking System ABS as a standard feature. Ensure that this action does not endanger other road users. Perform emergency braking in situations that re‐ quire such. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion. Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid any obstacles with a minimum of steering effort. In this way braking efficiency will be available when you need it. Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from the hydraulic circuits indicate that the Antilock Brak‐ ing System ABS is in its active mode. 324 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS Condensation water under the parked vehicle Hills General information Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the gear that requires least braking effort. Otherwise, the brake system may overheat and reduce braking effect. You can increase the engine's braking effect by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, if needed. When using the automatic climate control, con‐ densation water develops and collects under‐ neath the vehicle. Flag bracket Safety information NOTICE Safety information Warning Light but consistent pressure on the brake pedal can lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out and possibly even brake system failure. There is a risk of accident. Avoid placing excessive stress on the brake system. At high speeds, a mounted flag can cause damage to the vehicle, the flag bracket, and the flag itself. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph / 130 km/h. Remove flag before trips at high speeds. Overview Warning In idle state or with the engine switched off, safety functions, for instance engine braking ef‐ fect, braking assistance and steering assis‐ tance, may not be available. There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt to drive in idle state or with the engine switched off. Brake disc corrosion The flag bracket is located on the side of the ve‐ hicle. Corrosion on the brake discs and contamination on the brake pads are increased by the following circumstances: Mounting ▷ Low mileage. 1. Remove the protective cap. ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not used at all. 2. Insert flag horizontally. ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes. 3. Turn the flag clockwise by 90° to lock the flag. ▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning agents. Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in their response generally this cannot be corrected. 325 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS M Driver's Package: driving in the higher speed range Warning Damage to vehicle components can negatively impact handling at high speeds. This includes, among other things, tires, undercarriage and parts for improving aerodynamics. There is a risk of accident. Have damage corrected by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Do not drive at high speeds until the damage is corrected. Fold the cover outward. Mounting Follow the installation instructions of the roof rack. Roof-mounted luggage rack General information Installation only possible in roof drip rail with flaps. Further information is available from a deal‐ er's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Roof racks are available as special accessories. Safety information Warning When driving with a roof load, for instance with roof-mounted luggage rack, the vehicle's cen‐ ter of gravity is higher, which increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in critical driving situa‐ tions. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Driving with roof load only with activated Dynamic Stability Control. Be sure that adequate clearance is maintained for tilting and opening the glass sunroof. Magnetic roof-mounted luggage racks Because of the aluminum roof, magnetic roofmounted luggage racks cannot be used. Loading Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on vehicle handling and steering response. Therefore, note the following when loading and driving: ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle weights and the approved gross vehicle weight. ▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐ tained for tilting and opening the glass sun‐ roof. ▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly. Roof drip rail with flaps The fixing points are located in the roof drip rail above the doors. ▷ The roof load should not extend past the loading area. ▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the bot‐ tom. ▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance using ratchet straps. 326 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening path of the trunk lid. ▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden accelera‐ tion and braking maneuvers. Take corners gently. Driving on racetracks Warning The vehicle is not designed for use in M Sport or motor sport type competition. There is a risk of accident. Do not use the vehicle for M Sport or motor sport type competitions. Higher mechanical and thermal loads during racetrack operation lead to increased wear. Use of the vehicle in M Sport or motor sport type competition is an improper use of the vehicle and may affect your warranty coverage. Please con‐ sult the “New Vehicle Limited Warranty” Booklet for further information on warranty matters. 327 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS Saving fuel Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Close the windows and glass sunroof Driving with the glass sunroof and windows open results in increased drag and raises fuel con‐ sumption. Tires General information Tires can affect consumption in various ways, for instance tire size may influence consumption. Check the tire pressure regularly Reducing fuel consumption General information The vehicle contains advanced technologies for the reduction of consumption and emission val‐ ues. The fuel consumption depends on various fac‐ tors, such as driving style, road conditions, main‐ tenance or environmental factors. Carrying out certain measures, such as a moder‐ ate driving style and regular maintenance, can in‐ fluence fuel consumption and the environmental impact. Remove unnecessary cargo Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Remove attached parts following use Remove roof-mounted which are no longer re‐ quired following use. Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aerody‐ namics and increase the fuel consumption. Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation pressure at least twice a month and before start‐ ing on a long trip. Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and tire wear. Observe the correct tire inflation pressure as well as the ECO tire inflation pressure, where applica‐ ble. Additional information: Tire pressure specifications, refer to page 336. Drive away without delay Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right away, but at moderate RPM. This is the fastest way of warming the cold en‐ gine up to operating temperature. Proactive driving Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel consumption. Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking. By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehicle driving ahead of you. 328 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS Avoid high RPM Have maintenance carried out Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐ sumption and reduces wear. Have the vehicle maintained regularly to achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life. BMW recommends that maintenance work be per‐ formed by a BMW service center. If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift indi‐ cator. Also refer to BMW Maintenance System. Using coasting overrun mode When approaching a red light, take your foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to a halt. For going downhill take your foot off the acceler‐ ator and let the vehicle roll. The fuel supply is interrupted in coasting overrun mode. Switch off the engine during longer stops Switching off the engine Switch off the engine during longer stops, for in‐ stance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in traffic jam. Auto Start/Stop function The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle auto‐ matically switches off the engine during a stop. If the engine is switched off and then restarted rather than leaving the engine running con‐ stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are re‐ duced. Savings can begin within a few seconds of switching off the engine. ECO PRO Principle ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves on consumption. For this purpose, the engine con‐ trol and comfort features, for instance the climate control output, are adjusted. Steptronic transmission: under certain conditions the engine is automatically decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce consumption. The D selector lever po‐ sition remains engaged. In addition, context-sensitive information, ECO PRO tips, are displayed to assist with an efficient driving style. The achieved extended range is displayed in the instrument cluster as bonus range. General information The system includes the following EfficientDynamics functions and EfficientDynamics displays: Switch off any functions that are not currently needed ▷ ECO PRO bonus range. Functions such as seat heating and the rear win‐ dow defroster require a lot of energy and in‐ crease fuel consumption, especially in city and stop-and-go traffic. ▷ ECO PRO climate control. Switch off these functions if they are not needed. The ECO PRO driving mode supports the en‐ ergy conserving use of comfort features. These functions are automatically deactivated partially or completely. ▷ ECO PRO seat climate control. ▷ ECO PRO light and sight. ▷ ECO PRO Limit. ▷ Coasting driving condition. ▷ Driving style analysis. 329 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS Overview Activating/deactivating ECO PRO functions The following ECO PRO functions can be acti‐ vated/deactivated: ▷ "Coasting" ▷ "ECO PRO seat heating" ▷ "ECO PRO climate control" ▷ "ECO PRO light and sight" Coasting Button Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging the engine and coasting with the engine idling. Activating ECO PRO Press the button. ECO PRO is displayed in the instrument cluster. Configuring ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL ECO PRO seat climate control The activation of ECO PRO will reduce the out‐ put of the seat heating. ECO PRO climate control Climate control is set to be efficient. 2. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" This means, it is possible to deviate slightly from the set temperature or to heat or cool down the car's interior more slowly, to economize on con‐ sumption. Via iDrive ECO PRO light and sight Via the Driving Dynamics Control 1. Activate ECO PRO. The output of exterior mirror heating and rear window defroster is reduced. 1. "CAR" 2. "Settings" 3. "Driving mode" Resetting the settings 4. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL" Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard settings: 5. Select the desired setting. "Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD" ECO PRO limit speed ▷ "ECO PRO speed": activate ECO PRO speed. An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed of the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded. ▷ "Notification at:" Set the desired speed for the ECO PRO speed. Displays in the instrument cluster General information When ECO PRO driving mode is activated, the display switches to a special configuration. 330 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Saving fuel ECO PRO bonus range A modified driving style helps you extend your driving distance. The range extension can be dis‐ played as the bonus range in the instrument cluster. The efficiency display includes the bonus range. If the bonus range appears in gray, the current driving style is inefficient. The display turns blue as soon as all conditions for efficient driving are met. DRIVING TIPS ▷ Depending on the equipment: the total dis‐ tance driven while coasting. ▷ The total time that the engine has been switched off during automatic engine stops. ▷ A gear shift indicator recommending the use of a more efficient gear. Indications on the Control Display General information The intervals for resetting the bonus range de‐ pend on the settings of the trip data. Information about the current effectiveness of the ECO PRO functions can be displayed as en‐ ergy flow. Consumption display Displaying energy flow information Instrument cluster with enhanced features: 1. "CAR" 2. "Driving information" 3. "Energy flow" The following functions are displayed: ▷ Auto Start/Stop function. ▷ Energy recovery. ▷ Coasting. A pointer in the consumption display informs about the current driving style: ▷ The current consumption in relation to the average consumption is displayed. ▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 1: display of the energy recovered by coasting or when brak‐ ing. ▷ Pointer in the area of arrow 2: display when accelerating. If the acceleration is inefficient, the area between the average consumption and the current con‐ sumption is colored red. In addition, the following information is displayed, depending on the situation: Coasting Principle Under certain conditions the engine is automati‐ cally decoupled from the transmission in the D selector lever position. The vehicle continues traveling with the engine idling to reduce con‐ sumption. Selector lever position D remains en‐ gaged. This driving condition is referred to as coasting. As soon as the brake or accelerator pedal is de‐ pressed, the engine is automatically coupled to the transmission again. 331 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS General information Display Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐ ing mode. Display in the instrument cluster Coasting is automatically activated when ECO PRO driving mode is called via the Driving Dy‐ namics Control. The coasting distance traveled is indicated in coasting mode. Indications on the Control Display A proactive driving style helps the driver to use the function often and supports the efficient ef‐ fect of coasting. The coasting mode is displayed under energy flow while driving. Functional requirements The distance traveled in coasting mode is dis‐ played in the trip data. The function is available in the speed range from approx. 16 mph/25 km/h to 100 mph/160 km/h. The function is active if the following conditions are met: ▷ The accelerator pedal is not depressed or the accelerator pedal is released. ▷ Brake pedal not depressed or only slightly depressed. ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever position D. ▷ Engine and transmission are at operating temperature. ▷ Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, ACC, not activated. Operation via shift paddles Color code blue: coasting mode. Displaying energy flow information 1. "CAR" 2. "Driving information" 3. "Energy flow" System limits Principle The coasting driving condition can be influenced with the shift paddles. Activating/deactivating coasting via shift paddles 1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right shift paddle. 2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the right shift paddle again. The function is not available under one of the fol‐ lowing conditions. ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated. ▷ Driving in the dynamic limit range and on steep uphill or downhill grades. ▷ Battery charge status temporarily too low or vehicle electrical system drawing excessive current. To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle. 332 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Saving fuel DRIVING TIPS Driving style analysis Principle The function helps develop an especially effi‐ cient driving style and to conserve fuel. For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed. The assessment is done in various categories and is displayed on the Control Display. This display will help you adjust your driving style and save some fuel. General information The current trip is assessed. To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO PRO tips are displayed during driving. The range of the vehicle can be extended by ad‐ justing your driving style. This gain in range is displayed as a bonus range in the instrument cluster and on the Control Dis‐ play. Functional requirement This function is available in ECO PRO driving mode. Calling up the Driving style analysis 1. "CAR" 2. "Driving information" 3. "Driving style analysis" Display on the Control Display The display of the Driving style analysis shows the efficiency of the Driving style. The more efficient the driving style, the more bars are displayed in color and the faster the bo‐ nus range increases. In contrast, a reduced number of bars will be dis‐ played with an inefficient driving style. 333 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Refueling MOBILITY Refueling Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Follow the following when refueling General information Follow the fuel recommendation prior to refuel‐ ing. When refueling, insert the filler nozzle completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the filler nozzle dur‐ ing refueling causes: ▷ Premature switching off. ▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors. Safety information NOTICE With a driving distance of less than 30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐ sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Re‐ fuel promptly. NOTICE Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling of the fuel tank can damage the fuel system. Painted surfaces may be damaged by contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the environment. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Avoid overfilling. Fuel cap Opening 1. To open the fuel filler flap, press on the rear edge, arrow. The fuel filler flap opens. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off the first time. Make sure that the fuel cap is closed properly af‐ ter refueling, otherwise the emissions warning light may light up. Follow safety regulations posted at the filling sta‐ tion. Additional information: Fuel quality, refer to page 370. 334 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Refueling 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise. MOBILITY Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop. 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached to the fuel filler flap. Closing Warning The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be jam‐ med and crushed during closing. The cap can‐ not be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐ age to property. Pay attention that the retaining strap is not jammed or crushed when closing the cap. 1. Fit the fuel cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly hear a click. 2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it engages. Emergency unlocking It may be necessary in certain situations to un‐ lock the fuel filler flap manually, for instance with an electrical fault. 335 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Wheels and tires Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Tire pressure specifications In the tire inflation pressure table The tire inflation pressure table, refer to page 336, contains all tire inflation pressure specifications for the specified tire sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes approved by the manu‐ facturer of the vehicle for the vehicle type. To identify the correct tire inflation pressure, please note the following: ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle. ▷ Maximum speed for driving. Tire pressure On the Control Display General information The tire characteristics and tire pressure influ‐ ence the following: ▷ The service life of the tires. ▷ Driving safety. ▷ Driving comfort. The current tire inflation pressure values and the intended tire inflation pressure values for the mounted tires can be displayed on the Control Display. To ensure that they are displayed correctly, the tire sizes must be stored in the system and must have been set for the mounted tires. ▷ Fuel consumption. The current tire inflation pressure value is lo‐ cated on each tire. Safety information The reference tire inflation pressure value is lo‐ cated in the lower area of the Control Display. Warning Checking the tire pressure A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure may heat up significantly and sustain damage. This will have a negative impact on aspects of handling, such as steering and braking re‐ sponse. There is a risk of accident. Regularly check the tire inflation pressure, and correct it as needed, for instance twice a month and be‐ fore a long trip. General information Tires heat up while driving. The tire pressure in‐ creases with the tire temperature. Tires have a natural, consistent tire pressure loss. The displays of inflation devices may under-read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi. 336 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires Checking using tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table 1. Determine the intended tire inflation pressure levels for the mounted tires. 2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires, using a pressure gage, for example. 3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual tire inflation pressure deviates from the in‐ tended tire inflation pressure. 4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed onto the tire valves. The tire inflation pressure specifications in the tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold tires or tires at the same temperature as the am‐ bient temperature. MOBILITY Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. With Tire Pressure Monitor: The corrected tire inflation pressures are applied automatically. Make sure that the correct tire set‐ tings have been made. With tires that cannot be found in the tire pres‐ sure values on the Control Display, reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM. Tire inflation pressures up to 100 mph/160 km/h For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for optimum driving comfort, note the pressure val‐ ues in the tire inflation pressure table and adjust as necessary. Only check the tire inflation pressure levels when the tires are cold, i.e.: ▷ A driving distance of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded. ▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at least 2 hours after a trip. Check the tire inflation pressure of the emer‐ gency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and cor‐ rect it as needed. Checking using the tire inflation pressure specifications on the Control Display These pressure values can also be found on the tire pressure label on the driver's door pillar. Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h. 1. "CAR" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" 4. Check whether the current tire inflation pres‐ sure levels deviate from the intended tire pressure value. 5. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the actual tire inflation pressure deviates from the in‐ tended tire inflation pressure. After correcting the tire pressure With runflat tires: 337 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Tire pressure values up to 100 mph/160 km/h 740Li, 740Li xDrive, 750i xDrive, 750Li xDrive Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Rear: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL - Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h T 135/80 R 18 104 M 4.2 / 60 3.0 / 44 M760Li xDrive 245/50 R 18 100 2.2 / 32 V A/S 2.4 / 35 Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 245/50 R 18 100 H M+S 245/45 R 19 102 2.4 / 35 V XL A/S Tire size 2.6 / 38 245/45 R 19 102 2.4 / 35 V XL A/S 245/45 R 19 102 V XL M+S 2.6 / 38 Front: 245/45 R 19 98 Y 2.5 / 36 - 245/45 R 19 102 V XL M+S Rear: 275/40 R 19 101 Y - 2.5 / 36 Front: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL 2.7 / 39 - Front: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL 2.9 / 42 - Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL - 2.7 / 39 Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL - 3.1 / 45 Front: 245/40 R 20 99 V XL M+S 2.7 / 39 - Front: 245/40 R 2.7 / 39 20 99 V XL M+S - Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 V XL M +S - 2.7 / 39 Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 V XL M +S - 2.7 / 39 Front: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL 3.0 / 44 - Front: 245/40 ZR 2.7 / 39 20 99 Y XL - Rear: 275/35 ZR 20 102 Y XL 2.7 / 39 - 338 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires Tire inflation pressures at max. speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h Warning In order to drive at maximum speeds in excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for speeds ex‐ ceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the relevant table on the following pages. Otherwise, tire damage and accidents could occur. For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for opti‐ mum driving comfort, note the pressure values in the tire inflation pressure table and adjust as nec‐ essary. Tire pressure values over 100 mph/160 km/h 740Li, 740Li xDrive, 750i xDrive, 750Li xDrive Without high-speed tuning feature Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires MOBILITY Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Front: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL 2.9 / 42 - Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL - 3.1 / 45 Front: 245/40 R 3.0 / 44 20 99 V XL M+S - Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 V XL M +S - 3.0 / 44 Front: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL 3.0 / 44 - Rear: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL - 3.0 / 44 Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h T 135/80 R 18 104 M 4.2 / 60 With high-speed tuning feature Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 245/50 R 18 100 2.5 / 36 V A/S 2.7 / 39 245/50 R 18 100 H M+S 245/45 R 19 102 2.7 / 39 V XL A/S 2.9 / 42 245/45 R 19 102 V XL M+S 245/50 R 18 100 H M+S 2.5 / 36 2.7 / 39 245/45 R 19 102 V XL M+S 2.9 / 42 3.1 / 45 Front: 245/45 R 19 98 Y 2.7 / 39 - Front: 245/45 R 19 98 Y 2.5 / 36 - Rear: 275/40 R 19 101 Y - 2.7 / 39 Rear: 275/40 R 19 101 Y - 2.5 / 36 Front: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL 2.9 / 42 - 339 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL - 3.1 / 45 - Front: 245/40 R 20 99 V XL M +S 3.3 / 48 - Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 V M+S XL Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 V XL M +S - 3.3 / 48 Front: 245/35 R 21 96 Y XL 3.3 / 48 - Rear: 275/30 R 21 98 Y XL - 3.3 / 48 Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of 50 mph / 80 km/h T 135/80 R 18 104 M 4.2 / 60 Without high-speed tuning feature Tire size Front: 245/40 ZR 2.7 / 39 20 99 Y XL - Rear: 275/35 ZR 20 102 Y XL 2.7 / 39 Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 245/45 R 19 102 2.7 / 39 V XL A/S 2.9 / 42 245/45 R 19 102 V XL M+S Front: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL 2.7 / 39 - Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL - 2.7 / 39 Front: 245/40 R 20 99 V M+S XL 3.0 / 44 - - With high-speed tuning feature Tire size M760Li xDrive 3.0 / 44 Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 245/45 R 19 102 2.9 / 42 V XL M+S 3.1 / 45 Front: 245/40 R 20 99 Y XL 3.0 / 44 - Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 Y XL - 3.0 / 44 Front: 245/40 R 3.3 / 48 20 99 V XL M+S - Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 V XL M +S 3.3 / 48 - Front: 245/40 ZR 3.0 / 44 20 99 Y XL - Rear: 275/35 ZR 20 102 Y XL 3.0 / 44 - With M Driver’s Package 340 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires Tire size Pressure specifications in bar/PSI Specifications in bar/PSI with cold tires 245/45 R 19 102 V XL M+S MOBILITY than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire loads, respectively. Speed letter 2.9 / 42 3.1 / 45 Front: 245/40 R 3.3 / 48 20 99 V XL M+S - Rear: 275/35 R 20 102 V XL M +S - 3.3 / 48 Front: 245/40 ZR 20 99 Y XL 3.4 / 49 Rear: 275/35 ZR 20 102 Y XL 3.4 / 49 Designation Maximum speed Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h R up to 106 mph/170 km/h S up to 112 mph/180 km/h T up to 118 mph/190 km/h H up to 131 mph/210 km/h V up to 150 mph/240 km/h W up to 167 mph/270 km/h Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h (Y) above 186 mph/300 km/h Tire marking Tire Identification Number Tire size xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand 245/45 R 18 96 Y xxx: tire size and tire design 245: nominal width in mm 1921: tire age 45: aspect ratio in % Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of the U.S. Department of Transportation. DOT Code: DOT xxxx xxx 1921 R: radial tire code 18: rim diameter in inches 96: load bearing capacity Tire age Y: speed code letter Recommendation ZR tires: reinforced radial tire for speeds exceed‐ ing 150 mph/240 km/h Regardless of the tire tread depth, replace tires at least every 6 years. Maximum tire load Manufacture date Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved. You can find the manufacture date of the tire on the tire sidewall. Locate the maximum tire load on the tire sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR – on the certification label on the driver door B-pillar. Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater Designation Manufacture date DOT … 1921 19th week 2021 341 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Uniform Tire Quality Grading Temperature Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. The temperature grades are A, the highest, B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces‐ sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of perform‐ ance which all passenger car tires must meet un‐ der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Temperature A DOT Quality Grades Treadwear Traction AA A B C Temperature A B C All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Fed‐ eral Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Treadwear Warning The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfa‐ ces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydro‐ planing, or peak traction characteristics. The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐ lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in com‐ bination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. RSC – Run-flat tires Run-flat tires, refer to page 345, are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the sidewall. M+S Winter and all-season tires with better cold weather performance than summer tires. Tire tread Summer tires Do not drive with a tire tread depth of less than 0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased risk of aquaplaning. 342 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires Winter tires ▷ Unusual vibrations. Do not drive with a tire tread of less than 0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for winter operation. ▷ Unusual tire or running noises. Minimum tread depth MOBILITY ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong tendency to pull to the left or right. Damage can be caused by the following situa‐ tions, for instance: ▷ Driving over curbs. ▷ Road damage. ▷ Tire pressure too low. ▷ Vehicle overloading. ▷ Incorrect tire storage. Safety information Wear indicators are distributed around the tire circumference. These wear indicators have the legally required minimum height of 0.063 in/1.6 mm. The positions of the wear indicators are marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread Wear Indica‐ tor. Tire damage Warning Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle control. There is a risk of accident. If tire damage is suspected while driving, immediately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s service center or another qualified service cen‐ ter or repair shop. Have vehicle towed or trans‐ ported as needed. Do not repair damaged tires, but have them replaced. General information Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and sus‐ pension parts. This is more likely to occur with low-profile tires, which provide less cushioning between the wheel and the road. Be careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your speed, es‐ pecially if your vehicle is equipped with low-pro‐ file tires. Warning Tires can become damaged by driving over ob‐ stacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire crosssection. The smaller the tire cross-section, the higher the risk of tire damage. There may be a risk of accident and risk of damage to property. If possible, avoid driving over objects or road conditions that may damage tires, or drive over them slowly and carefully. Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐ functions: 343 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Changing wheels and tires Mounting and wheel balancing Have mounting and wheel balancing carried out by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Warning Mounted steel wheels can cause technical problems, for instance unexpected loosening of the lug bolts and damage to the brake discs. There is a risk of accident. Do not mount steel wheels. Approved wheels and tires Warning General information The following properties are recommended and approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle for the approved wheels and tires per vehicle type and special equipment: ▷ Wheel and tire combinations. ▷ Rim designs. ▷ Tire sizes. ▷ Tire brands. You can ask a manufacturer service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop about the approved wheels and tires for the vehi‐ cle and the special equipment. Safety information Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will impair the vehicle's handling characteristics and a variety of system functions, such as the Antilock Brak‐ ing System (ABS) or Dynamic Stability Control. There is a risk of accident. To maintain good handling and vehicle response, use only tires with a single tread configuration from a single manufacturer. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you use wheels and tires that have been recommended by the vehicle manu‐ facturer for your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have the original wheel/tire combina‐ tion remounted on the vehicle as soon as pos‐ sible. Recommended tire brands Warning Wheels and tires which are not suitable for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehicle, for in‐ stance due to contact with the body due to tol‐ erances despite the same official size rating. There is a risk of an accident. The manufac‐ turer of your vehicle strongly suggests that you use wheels and tires that have been recom‐ mended by the vehicle manufacturer for your vehicle type. For each tire size, the manufacturer of the vehi‐ cle recommends certain tire brands. The tire brands can be identified by a star on the tire sidewall. New tires Tire traction is not optimal due to production-re‐ lated circumstances when tires are brand-new. 344 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires Drive conservatively for the first 200 miles/300 km. MOBILITY Rotating wheels between axles Warning Retreaded tires Warning Retreaded tires can have different tire casing structures. With advanced age the service life can be limited. There is a risk of an accident. The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐ ommend the use of retreaded tires. The manufacturer of the vehicle does not rec‐ ommend the use of retreaded tires. Winter tires General information Winter tires are recommended for operating on winter roads. Although so-called all-season tires with M+S identification provide better winter traction than summer tires, they usually do not provide the same level of performance as winter tires. Maximum speed of winter tires If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher than the permissible speed for the winter tires, then attach a label showing the permissible maxi‐ mum speed in the field of vision. The label is available from a dealer's service center or an‐ other qualified service center or repair shop. Rotating tires between the axles on vehicles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front and rear axles can cause damage to the tires and the vehicle. There is a risk of accident. Do not rotate the tires between the axles on vehi‐ cles with different tire sizes or rim sizes on the front and rear axles. Different wear patterns can occur on the front and rear axles depending on individual driving conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs be‐ tween the axles to achieve even wear. Further in‐ formation is available from a dealer's service cen‐ ter or another qualified service center or repair shop. After rotating, check the tire pressure and correct, if needed. Storing tires Tire pressure Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐ sure indicated on the tire sidewall. Storage ▷ Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark place. ▷ Always protect tires against all contact with oil, grease, and solvents. ▷ Do not leave tires in plastic bags. With winter tires mounted, observe and do not exceed the permissible maximum speed. ▷ Remove dirt from wheels or tires. Changing runflat tires Runflat tires When changing from run-flat tires to standard tires, it must be ensured that the vehicle contains a compact spare tire ("donut") or tire mobility kit. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Principle Run-flat tires permit continued driving under re‐ stricted conditions even in the event of a com‐ plete tire pressure loss. 345 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY General information The wheels consist of tires that are self-support‐ ing, to a limited degree, and possibly special rims. The reinforcement of the sidewall allows the tire to remain drivable to a restricted degree in the event of a tire pressure loss. Follow the instructions for continued driving with a flat tire. Safety information ▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake. ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock. ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐ hicle and ensure that they remain outside the hazardous area in a safe place, such as be‐ hind a guardrail. ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance. Tire repair set Warning The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐ stance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐ cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Principle With the tire repair set, minor tire damage can be sealed temporarily to enable continued driving. General information ▷ To enable continued driving, liquid sealant is pumped into the tire, which hardens and seals the damage from the inside. Identification ▷ Follow the instructions on using the tire repair set found on the compressor and sealant bottle. ▷ Use of the tire repair set may be ineffective if the tire puncture measures approx. 4 mm or more. ▷ Contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop if the tire cannot be made drivable. The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with Run-flat System Component RSC. ▷ Do not remove foreign bodies that have pe‐ netrated the tire. Remove foreign objects only when they are visibly protruding from the tire. Repairing a flat tire ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant bot‐ tle and apply it to the steering wheel. Safety measures ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground. ▷ Turn on the hazard warning system. ▷ The use of a sealing compound can damage the wheel electronics. In this case, have the electronics checked and replaced at the next opportunity. ▷ The compressor can be used to check the tire inflation pressure. 346 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires Overview MOBILITY 3 Tire pressure display 4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button Storage 5 On/off switch 6 Compressor 7 Connector/cable for socket 8 Connection hose Safety measures ▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible from passing traffic and on solid ground. Storage for the tire repair set is provided in the left storage compartment of the trunk. ▷ Turn on the hazard warning system. Sealant bottle ▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front wheels are in the straight-ahead position and engage the steering wheel lock. ▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by setting the parking brake. ▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the ve‐ hicle and ensure that they remain outside the hazardous area in a safe place, such as be‐ hind a guardrail. ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an appropriate distance. ▷ Sealant bottle, arrow 1. ▷ Filler hose, arrow 2. Observe expiration date on the sealant bottle. Compressor Filling the tire with sealing compound Safety information DANGER If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is in‐ sufficient, harmful exhaust gases can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain pollu‐ tants which are colorless and odorless. In en‐ closed areas, exhaust gases can also accumu‐ late outside of the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and ensure suf‐ ficient ventilation. 1 Sealant bottle unlocking 2 Sealant bottle holder 347 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 MOBILITY Wheels and tires 4. Screw the filler hose of the sealant bottle onto the tire valve of the nonworking wheel. NOTICE The compressor can overheat during extended operation. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ erty, among other potential damage. Do not run the compressor for more than 10 minutes. Filling 1. Shake the sealant bottle. 5. With the compressor switched off, insert the connector into the power socket in the vehi‐ cle interior. 2. Pull filler hose completely out of the cover of the sealant bottle. Do not kink the hose. 6. With standby state or drive-ready state switched on, switch on the compressor. 3. Slide the sealant bottle into the holder on the compressor housing, ensuring that it en‐ gages audibly. Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to fill the tire with sealing compound and achieve a tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.0 bar. While the tire is being filled with sealing com‐ pound, the tire inflation pressure may sporadi‐ cally reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compressor in this phase. 348 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires Checking and adjusting the tire inflation pressure MOBILITY 4. Insert the connector into the power socket in the vehicle interior. Checking 1. Switch off the compressor. 2. Read the tire pressure on the tire pressure display. To continue the trip, a tire inflation pressure of at least 2 bar must be reached. Removing and stowing the sealant bottle 1. Unscrew the filler hose of the sealant bottle from the tire valve. 5. With standby or drive readiness turned on, turn on the compressor and let it run for a maximum of 10 minutes. 3. Remove the sealant bottle from the compres‐ sor. When the tire pressure does not reach at least 2 bar, contact a manufacturer service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 4. Wrap and store the sealant bottle in suitable material to avoid contamination of the cargo area. When a tire pressure of at least 2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached. 2. Press the red unlocking device. Minimum tire inflation pressure is not reached 1. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior. 2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to distrib‐ ute the sealing compound in the tire. 3. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐ sor directly onto the tire valve stem. 6. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ pressor from the tire valve. 7. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior. 8. Stow the tire repair set in the vehicle. Minimum tire inflation pressure is reached 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ pressor from the tire valve. 2. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior. 3. Stow the tire repair set in the vehicle. 4. Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealing compound is evenly distributed in the tire. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 12 mph/20 km/h. 349 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Adjustment Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor again. 1. Stop at a suitable location. Replace the faulty tire and the sealant bottle of the tire repair set promptly. 2. Screw the connection hose of the compres‐ sor directly onto the tire valve stem. Additional information: ▷ Run-flat tires, refer to page 358. ▷ Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 351. Tire chains Safety information 3. Insert the connector into the power socket in the vehicle interior. Warning With the mounting of tire chains on unsuitable tires, the tire chains can come into contact with vehicle parts. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Only mount tire chains on tires that are designated by their manufacturer as suitable for the use of tire chains. Warning 4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at least 2.0 bar: ▷ Increase tire pressure: with standby or drive readiness turned on, turn on the compressor and let it run for a maximum of 10 minutes. ▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press the button on the compressor. 5. Unscrew the connection hose of the com‐ pressor from the tire valve. 6. Pull the connector out of the power socket in the vehicle interior. 7. Stow the tire repair set in the vehicle. Continuing the trip Do not exceed the permissible maximum speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Insufficiently tight tire chains may damage tires and vehicle components. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. Make sure that the tire chains are always sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed according to the tire chain manufacturer's instructions. Fine-link tire chains The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends the use of fine-link tire chains. Certain types of fine-link tire chains have been tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended as road-safe and suitable. Information regarding suitable tire chains is avail‐ able from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. 350 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Use Switching off rear axle steering Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped with the tires of the following size: The rear axle steering is switched off by specify‐ ing that tire chains are installed. ▷ 245/50 R 18. 1. "CAR" ▷ 245/45 R 19. 2. "Settings" The wheel size and rim offset are located on the inside of the wheel. 3. "General settings" Follow the tire chain manufacturer's instructions. Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after mounting tire chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor after mounting tire chains, as doing so may result in incorrect readings. When driving with tire chains, briefly activate Dy‐ namic Traction Control DTC to optimize the drive power. Maximum speed with tire chains Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h when using tire chains. Rear axle steering during operation with snow chains General information In order to guarantee free movement of the wheels when operating with tire chains, rear axle steering of the integral active steering must be switched off when tire chains are mounted. Safety information Warning When rear axle steering is switched on and tire chains are mounted, there can be contact be‐ tween tire chains and the body. There may be a risk of accident or risk of damage to property. With mounted tire chains, switch off the rear axle steering. 4. "Tire chains" 5. "Tire chains installed" Starting with the permissible maximum speed with snow chains of 30 mph/50 km/h the rear axle steering will be switched on again automati‐ cally. Tire pressure monitor Principle The Tire Pressure Monitor monitors the tire pressure and issues a warning if the tire pressure has dropped. General information Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire infla‐ tion pressure and tire temperature. Using the tire settings in iDrive, the system can automatically compare the predefined target pressures with the actual tire inflation pressures. If tires are being used that are not specified on the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle, such as tires with special approval, the system needs to be actively reset. The system will then take over the actual tire inflation pressures as the target pressures. When operating the system, also note the infor‐ mation found in the Tire inflation pressure chap‐ ter. Additional information: Tire inflation pressure, refer to page 336. 351 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Safety information Tire settings General information Warning The display of the target pressures is not a substitute for the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle. Incorrect entries in the tire set‐ tings can lead to incorrect target tire inflation pressure values. In this case, it cannot be guar‐ anteed that the notification of a tire pressure loss will be reliable. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Ensure that the tire sizes of the mounted tires are displayed cor‐ rectly and match the details on the tires and on the vehicle. The tire sizes of the mounted tires can be gath‐ ered from the tire inflation pressure details on the vehicle or directly on the tires. The tire details do not need to be re-entered when the tire pressure is corrected. For summer and winter tires, the tire details en‐ tered last are stored. After a tire or wheel re‐ placement, the settings of the tire sets used last can be selected. Changing settings 1. "CAR" Functional requirements 2. "Vehicle status" The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable message of a tire pressure loss is not assured: 3. ▷ Every time a tire or wheel is changed, the correct details on the mounted tires must be entered in the tire settings. 6. "Manual" ▷ The Tire Pressure Monitor does not activate until after driving for a few minutes: ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement. ▷ After a reset, for tires with special appro‐ val. ▷ After changing the tire setting. ▷ For tires with special approval: ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset was performed with the correct tire infla‐ tion pressure. ▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐ justed to a new value, a reset was per‐ formed. ▷ Wheels with wheel electronics. "Tire Pressure Monitor" 4. "Tire settings" 5. "Tire selection" 7. "Tire type" ▷ "Summer" ▷ "Winter/All-year" 8. Select the tire type that is mounted on the rear axle. For tires with special approval: "Other tires". Observe further proceeding in the perform a reset section. 9. Select the maximum road speed that will be used with the tires. 10. "Save tire settings" The measurement of the current tire inflation pressure is started. The measurement progress is displayed. 352 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Status display Tire conditions Current status General information The system status can be displayed on the Con‐ trol Display, e.g., whether or not the system is ac‐ tive. Tire and system status are indicated by the color of the wheels and a text message on the Control Display. 1. "CAR" Any existing messages may not be deleted if the target pressure is not reached after the tire infla‐ tion pressure is corrected. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" The current status is displayed. All wheels green Current tire pressure ▷ The system is active and bases warnings on the target pressures. The current tire pressure is displayed for each tire. The current tire inflation pressures may change during driving or depending on the outside tem‐ perature. ▷ For tires with special approval: the system is active and bases warnings on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset. One to four yellow wheels Current tire temperature A flat tire or major tire pressure loss has occurred in the indicated tires. Depending on the model, the current tire tem‐ peratures are displayed. Gray wheels The current tire temperatures may change while driving or due to the outside temperature. It may not be possible to identify tire pressure losses. Possible causes: Target pressure The target pressure for the tires on the front and rear axles is displayed. The specified target pressures take the influence of driving and outside temperature on the tire temperature into account. The appropriate target pressure is always displayed, independent of the weather situation, tire temperatures and travel times. The displayed target pressure may change and may differ from the tire inflation pressure details on the door pillar of the driver's door. The tire in‐ flation pressure can thus be corrected to the value of the displayed target pressures. The target pressure is immediately adjusted if the vehicle load status is changed in the tire set‐ tings. ▷ Malfunction. ▷ During tire inflation pressure measurement, after confirmation of the tire settings. ▷ For tires with special approval: a reset is per‐ formed for the system. For tires with special approval: perform a reset 1. "CAR" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" 4. Make sure that correct tire settings have been made. Tire settings, refer to page 352. 5. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive off. 353 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 MOBILITY Wheels and tires 6. Reset tire pressure: "Perform reset". Icon 7. Drive away. Inflation was not carried out according to specifications, for instance when the tire has not been sufficiently inflated or in the case of a natural steady tire pres‐ sure loss. The wheels are displayed in gray and the follow‐ ing is displayed "Resetting tire pressure…". After a travel time of several minutes, the set tire inflation pressures are accepted as the prede‐ fined tire inflation pressures. The reset is com‐ pleted automatically while driving. After a successfully completed reset, the wheels on the Control Display are shown in green and the following is displayed: "Reset successful." You may interrupt this trip at any time. When you continue the reset resumes automatically. Messages: for tires without special approval General information A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on. Possible cause Measure Check the tire pressure and correct as needed. If the tire inflation pressure is too low Message A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster. In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes‐ sage appears on the Control Display. Icon Possible cause There is a tire pressure loss. Safety information Warning A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐ mation on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires. If a tire inflation pressure check is required Message An icon with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display. Measure 1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h. 2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a filling station, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires and correct if necessary. If there is a significant tire pressure loss Message A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster. In addition, an icon with the affected tire appears in a Check Control message on the Control Dis‐ play. 354 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires Icon Possible cause There is a flat tire or a major tire pres‐ sure loss. MOBILITY If a tire inflation pressure check is required Message An icon with a Check Control message appears on the Control Display. Measure 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. Icon Possible cause Inflation was not carried out accord‐ ing to specifications, e.g., the tire has not been sufficiently inflated. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐ mal tires or run-flat tires. The system has detected a wheel change, but no reset was done. Run-flat tires are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall. The tire inflation pressure has fallen below the level of the last reset. Run-flat tires, refer to page 345. No reset was performed for the sys‐ tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset. 3. Read the description on What to do in case of a flat tire. Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to page 356. Messages: for tires with special approval Measure 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as needed. General information 2. Perform a system reset. A low tire inflation pressure may cause the DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched on. If the tire inflation pressure is too low Safety information Message A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster. Warning A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐ mation on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires. In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes‐ sage appears on the Control Display. Icon Possible cause There is a tire pressure loss. No reset was performed for the sys‐ tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset. 355 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 MOBILITY Wheels and tires Measure Actions in the event of a flat tire 1. Reduce the vehicle speed. Do not exceed a speed of 80 mph/130 km/h. Normal tires 2. At the next opportunity, for instance at a filling station, check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires and correct if necessary. 3. Reset the system. If there is a significant tire pressure loss Message A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster. In addition, an icon with the affected tire appears in a Check Control message on the Control Dis‐ play. Icon Possible cause There is a flat tire or a major tire pres‐ sure loss. No reset was performed for the sys‐ tem. The system issues a warning based on the tire inflation pressures stored during the last reset. Measure 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐ mal tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall. Run-flat tires, refer to page 345. 3. Read the description on What to do in case of a flat tire. 1. Identify the damaged tire. Check the tire pressure in all four tires, for in‐ stance using the tire pressure display of a flat tire kit. For tires with special approval: when the tire pressure in all four tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may not have been reset. In this case, perform the reset. If tire damage cannot be found, contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel. Use of sealing compound, for instance from the flat tire kit, may damage the wheel electronics. Have the electronics replaced at the next oppor‐ tunity. Runflat tires Safety information Warning The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐ stance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐ cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Maximum speed You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Actions in the event of a flat tire, refer to page 356. 356 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Continued driving with a flat tire System limits Follow the following when continuing to drive with a damaged tire: Temperature 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. The tire inflation pressure depends on the tire's temperature. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire infla‐ tion pressure. 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. Possible driving distance with a depressurized tire The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, outside temperature. The driving distance may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used. If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐ tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km. Vehicle handling with damaged tires Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following: ▷ Greater likelihood of skidding of the vehicle. ▷ Longer braking distances. ▷ Changed self-steering properties. Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes. The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the tire temperature falls again. These circumstances may cause a warning when temperatures fall very sharply. Following a temperature-related warning, the tar‐ get pressures are displayed on the Control Dis‐ play again after a short distance. Sudden tire pressure loss The system cannot indicate sudden serious tire damage caused by external circumstances. Failure performing a reset Tires with special approval: the system will not function correctly if a reset was not performed, for example a flat tire may be indicated although the tire inflation pressures are correct. Malfunction Message The yellow warning light flashes and is then illuminated continuously. A Check Control message is displayed. It may not be possible to identify tire pressure losses. Final tire failure Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ cate the final failure of a tire. Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Measure ▷ A wheel without wheel electronics, such as an emergency wheel, is mounted: have the wheels checked, if needed. ▷ Fault caused by systems or devices with the same radio frequency: after leaving the area of the interference, the system automatically becomes active again. 357 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 MOBILITY Wheels and tires ▷ For tires with special approval: the system was unable to complete the reset. Perform a system reset again. ▷ Tire Pressure Monitor malfunction: have the system checked by a manufacturer service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Declaration according to NHTSA/ FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Each tire, including the spare (if provided) should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehi‐ cle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire in‐ flation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the ve‐ hicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pres‐ sure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pres‐ sure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐ ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi‐ nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi‐ ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi‐ cle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation has not reached the level to trigger illu‐ mination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi‐ mately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ function exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to de‐ tect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Al‐ ways check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your ve‐ hicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. Flat Tire Monitor FTM Principle The Flat Tire display detects a tire pressure loss while driving and issues a warning if the tire pres‐ sure has dropped. General information The system detects tire pressure loss on the ba‐ sis of rotation speed differences between the in‐ dividual wheels while driving. In the event of a tire pressure loss, the diameter and therefore the rotational speed of the corre‐ sponding wheel changes. The difference will be detected and reported as a flat tire. The system does not measure the actual infla‐ tion pressure in the tires. Functional requirements The following conditions must be met for the system; otherwise, reliable message of a tire pressure loss is not assured: ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initializa‐ tion was performed with the correct tire infla‐ tion pressure. ▷ After the tire pressure was adjusted to a new value, an initialization was performed. 358 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires Status display Safety information The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor FTM can be displayed, for instance whether the FTM is active. 1. "CAR" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. MOBILITY "Flat Tire Monitor" The status is displayed. Initialization required An initialization must be performed in the follow‐ ing situations: ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been ad‐ justed. Warning A damaged regular tire with low or missing tire inflation pressure impacts handling, such as steering and braking response. Run-flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not continue driving if the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Follow the infor‐ mation on run-flat tires and continued driving with these tires. Indication of a flat tire A yellow warning light is illuminated in the instrument cluster. ▷ After a tire or wheel replacement. Performing initialization When initializing, the set tire inflation pressures serve as reference values in order to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started by confirming the tire inflation pressures. Do not initialize the system when driving with tire chains. 1. "CAR" In addition, an icon with a Check Control mes‐ sage appears on the Control Display. Icon Possible cause There is a flat tire or a major tire pres‐ sure loss. Measure 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Flat Tire Monitor" 4. Turn on drive-ready state and do not drive off. 5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset" 6. Drive away. The initialization is completed while driving, which can be interrupted at any time. The initialization automatically continues when driving continues. 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with nor‐ mal tires or run-flat tires. Run-flat tires are labeled with a circular icon containing the letters RSC marked on the tire sidewall. Run-flat tires, refer to page 345. Actions in the event of a flat tire Normal tires Messages 1. Identify the damaged tire. General information When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ bility Control is switched on, if needed. To do this, check the tire pressure in all four tires, for instance using the tire pressure dis‐ play of a flat tire kit. 359 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 MOBILITY Wheels and tires When the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor FTM may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the system. If identification of flat tire damage is not pos‐ sible, please contact a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or by changing the wheel. Possible driving distance with a depressurized tire The distance for which it may be possible to drive safely varies depending on how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road conditions, outside temperature. The driving distance may be less but may also be more if an economical driving style is used. Runflat tires If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight and used under favorable conditions, the dis‐ tance for which it may be safe to drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km. Safety information Vehicle handling with damaged tires Warning The vehicle handles differently when a run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire pressure; for in‐ stance, reduced lane stability when braking, braking distances are longer and the self-steer‐ ing properties will change. There is a risk of ac‐ cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle differently, potentially leading to conditions such as the following: ▷ Greater likelihood of skidding of the vehicle. ▷ Longer braking distances. ▷ Changed self-steering properties. Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steering maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for instance curbs or potholes. Maximum speed Final tire failure You may continue driving with a damaged tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ cate the final failure of a tire. Continued driving with a flat tire Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of the tire could come loose and cause an accident. Follow the following when continuing to drive with a damaged tire: 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐ vers. 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four tires at the next opportunity. When the tire inflation pressure in all four tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not have been initialized. In this case, initialize the sys‐ tem. Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. System limits The system could be delayed or malfunction in the following situations: ▷ A natural, even tire pressure loss in all four tires will not be recognized. Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. ▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by exter‐ nal circumstances cannot be recognized in advance. 360 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY ▷ The system has not been initialized. ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road. ▷ Sporty driving style: slip on traction wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting). ▷ When driving with tire chains. Changing wheels/tires General information When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a wheel does not always need to be changed immedi‐ ately when there is a tire pressure loss due to a flat tire. If needed, the tools for changing wheels are available as accessories from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or re‐ pair shop. Safety information Warning The jack, issued by the vehicle manufacturer, is provided in order to perform a wheel change in the event of a breakdown. The jack is not de‐ signed for frequent use; for example, changing from summer to winter tires. Using the jack fre‐ quently may cause it to become jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Only use the jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in the event of a breakdown. Warning On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for example snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-re‐ sistant surface. Warning Warning The vehicle jack is only provided for short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel changes. Even if all safety measures are observed, there is a risk of the raised vehicle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. When the vehicle is raised with the vehicle jack, do not lie under the vehicle and do not switch on the drive-ready state. Warning Supports such as wooden blocks under the ve‐ hicle jack reduce the capacity of the vehicle jack to bear weight. They have the potential to exert too much strain on the vehicle jack, caus‐ ing it to tip over and the vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not place supports under the vehicle jack. The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting the vehi‐ cle and for the jacking points on the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle jack. Warning When the vehicle jack is not inserted into the jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐ hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property. When cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is in‐ serted in the jacking point next to the wheel housing. 361 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 MOBILITY Wheels and tires On a slight downhill gradient Warning A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. While the vehicle is raised, do not ex‐ ert lateral forces on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Securing the vehicle against rolling General information The vehicle manufacturer recommends to addi‐ tionally secure the vehicle against rolling away when changing a wheel. On a level surface If you need to change a wheel on a slight down‐ hill grade, place chocks and other suitable ob‐ jects, for instance rocks, under the wheels of both the front and rear axles against the rolling direction. Lug bolt lock Principle The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The lug bolts can only be released with the adapter which matches the coding. Overview The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the onboard vehicle tool kit or in a storage compartment close to the onboard vehicle tool kit. Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects in front and behind the wheel that is diagonal to the wheel to be changed. ▷ Lug lock bolt, arrow 1. ▷ Adapter, arrow 2. 362 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires Unscrewing 1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt. MOBILITY Jacking points for the vehicle jack 2. Unscrew the lug lock bolt. 3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the lug bolt. Screwing on 1. Attach the adapter to the lug lock bolt. If nec‐ essary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug lock bolt. 2. Screw on the lug lock bolt. The tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm. 3. Remove the adapter and stow it after screw‐ ing on the lug bolt. Preparing the vehicle ▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip ground at a safe distance from traffic. ▷ Turn on the hazard warning system. ▷ Set the parking brake. ▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever to position P. The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐ cated at the indicated positions. Jacking up the vehicle Warning Hands and fingers can be jammed when using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury. Com‐ ply with the described hand position and do not change this position while using the vehicle jack. ▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow, have all vehicle occupants get out of the vehicle and ensure that they remain outside the haz‐ ardous area in a safe place, such as behind a guardrail. ▷ Depending on the vehicle equipment, get wheel change tools and, if necessary, the emergency wheel from the vehicle. ▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or port‐ able hazard warning light at an appropriate distance. ▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against rolling. ▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn. ▷ Deactivate the air suspension level adjust‐ ment. Two-axle ride level control, refer to page 275. 363 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 MOBILITY Wheels and tires 1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, arrow 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank or lever with your other hand, arrow 2. 5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and at a right angle beneath the jacking point. 2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular re‐ cess of the jacking point closest to the wheel to be changed. 6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands vertically and perpendicularly beneath the jacking point after extending the vehicle jack. 3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise. 7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle jack is with the entire surface on the ground and the relevant wheel is maximum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground. Mounting a wheel Mount one emergency wheel only, as required. 1. Unscrew the lug bolts. 2. Remove the wheel. 4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under load and continue turning the vehicle jack crank or lever with one hand. 3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on and screw in at least two lug bolts in a cross‐ wise pattern until hand-tight. When non-original light-alloy wheels of the vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐ companying lug bolts may have to be used as well. 364 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires 4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐ tern. 5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclockwise to retract the vehicle jack and lower the vehi‐ cle. 6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it securely. After the wheel change 1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tighten‐ ing torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm. 2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo area, if necessary. 3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐ portunity and correct as needed. MOBILITY Safety information Warning The emergency wheel has particular dimen‐ sions. When driving with an emergency wheel, changed driving properties may occur, for in‐ stance reduced lane stability when braking, lon‐ ger braking distance, and changed self-steering properties in the limit area. There is a risk of ac‐ cident. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. Overview 4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor again. 5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight with a calibrated torque wrench. 6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the near‐ est dealer's service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop. Emergency wheel The emergency wheel and the wheel change tools are located in the cargo area under the cargo floor panel. Principle In the event of a flat tire, the emergency wheel can be used in place of the wheel with the defec‐ tive tire. The emergency wheel is only intended for temporary use until the defective tire/wheel has been replaced. General information Mount one emergency wheel only. Also check the tire inflation pressure of the emergency wheel in the cargo area regularly, and correct it as needed. 365 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Wheels and tires MOBILITY Removing the emergency wheel 1. Remove the cargo floor panel. To do this, pull the cargo floor panel upward directly behind the rear backrests. 2. Open the ratchet strap. 3. Remove the tool holder. 4. Remove the emergency wheel from the stor‐ age well. Do not remove any covers. Inserting the emergency wheel 1. Place the emergency wheel in the storage well. 2. Insert the tool holder. 3. Tie the ratchet strap. Make sure that it is cor‐ rectly and firmly seated. 4. Insert the cargo floor panel. 366 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Engine compartment MOBILITY Engine compartment Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Overview Engines with 4 or 6 cylinders 1 Filler neck for washer fluid 2 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal 5 Depending on motorization: coolant reservoir for additional radiator 3 Oil filler neck 6 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 4 Coolant reservoir, engine 7 Vehicle identification number 367 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Engine compartment MOBILITY Engines with 8 or 12 cylinders 1 Filler neck for washer fluid 5 Oil filler neck 2 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal 6 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 3 Coolant reservoir, engine 7 Vehicle identification number 4 Coolant reservoir, auxiliary cooling Hood Warning Safety information Warning Improperly executed work in the engine com‐ partment can damage vehicle components and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Have work in the engine compartment performed by a deal‐ er’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. The engine compartment accommodates mov‐ ing components. Certain components in the engine compartment can also move with the vehicle switched off, for instance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. Do not reach into the area of moving parts. Keep articles of cloth‐ ing and hair away from moving parts. Warning There are protruding parts, for instance locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay attention to protruding parts and keep clear of these areas. 368 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Engine compartment MOBILITY Hood is unlocked. Warning An incorrectly locked hood can open while driv‐ ing and restrict visibility. There is a risk of acci‐ dent. Stop immediately and correctly close the hood. Warning Body parts can be jammed when opening and closing the hood. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that the area of movement of hood is clear during opening and closing. 2. After the lever is released, pull the lever again, arrow 2. Hood can be opened. 3. Be careful of protruding parts on the hood. NOTICE Closing the hood Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood. NOTICE When the hood is closed, it must engage on both sides. Pressing again can damage the hood. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Open the hood again and then close it energetically. Avoid pressing again. Energetically close the hood from approx. 20 in/50 cm. The hood must engage on both sides. Opening hood 1. Pull lever, arrow 1. 369 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Operating materials MOBILITY Operating materials Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Fuel recommendation General information Depending on the region, many filling stations sell fuel that has been customized to winter or summer conditions. Fuel that is available in win‐ ter, for instance helps make a cold start easier. Gasoline General information For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur content. Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ taining metal must not be used. Safety information CAUTION The use of poor-quality fuels may result in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addition‐ ally, problems relating to drivability, starting and stalling, especially under certain environmental conditions such as high ambient temperature and high altitude, may occur. If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐ ommend switching to a high quality gasoline brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐ ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐ gine deposits, it is highly recommended to pur‐ chase gasoline from Top Tier retailers. Failure to comply with these recommendations may result in the need for additional mainte‐ nance. NOTICE Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel sys‐ tem and engine. Furthermore, the catalytic converter is permanently damaged. There is a risk of damage to property, among other poten‐ tial damage. Do not refuel or add the following in the case of gasoline engines: ▷ Leaded gasoline. Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of 25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refueling. ▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese or iron. Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐ dards: Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐ ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. US: ASTM 4806–xx CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx xx: comply with the current standard in each case. 370 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Operating materials MOBILITY Engine oil NOTICE Fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality can compromise engine function or cause engine damage. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property, among other potential dam‐ age. Do not fill with fuel that does not comply with the minimum quality. General information The engine oil consumption is dependent on your driving style and driving conditions. Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level af‐ ter refueling by taking a detailed measurement. The engine oil consumption can increase in the following situations, for instance: NOTICE ▷ Sporty driving style. Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system and the engine. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ erty, among other potential damage. Do not use fuels with a higher ethanol content than recommended. Do not refuel with fuels con‐ taining methanol, e.g. M5 to M100. Recommended gas quality BMW recommends AKI 91. ▷ Break-in of the engine. ▷ Idle operation of the engine. ▷ With use of engine oil types that are classified as not suitable. Different Check Control messages appear on the Control Display depending on the engine oil level. Safety information M Performance model: BMW recommends AKI 93. Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the rated performance and consumption values. Minimum fuel grade NOTICE An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐ gine damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Im‐ mediately add engine oil. BMW recommends AKI 89. If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rating, the engine may produce knocking sounds when starting at high external temperatures. This has no effect on the engine life. NOTICE Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property, among other potential dam‐ age. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 371 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Operating materials MOBILITY Electronic oil measurement Detailed measurement General information Principle The electronic oil measurement has two measur‐ ing principles: The engine oil level is checked when the vehicle is stationary and displayed via a scale. ▷ Monitoring. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed. ▷ Detailed measurement. When making frequent short-distance trips or using a sporty driving style, for instance when taking curves aggressively, regularly perform a detailed measurement. Monitoring General information During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐ creased somewhat. Functional requirements Principle ▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. The engine oil level is monitored electronically while driving and can be shown on the Control Display. ▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N or P and accelerator pedal not depressed. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible operating range, a Check Control message is displayed. A red indicator light indicates that the en‐ gine oil pressure is too low. ▷ The drive-ready state is switched on by pressing the Start/Stop button. ▷ Engine is running and is at operating temper‐ ature. Performing a detailed measurement 1. "CAR" 2. "Vehicle status" Functional requirements A current measured value is available after ap‐ prox. 30 minutes of normal driving. 3. "Engine oil level" 4. "Engine oil measurement" 5. "Start measurement" Displaying the engine oil level 1. "CAR" 2. "Vehicle status" 3. The engine oil level is checked and displayed via a scale. Adding engine oil "Engine oil level" The engine oil level is displayed. System limits When making frequent short-distance trips or using a sporty driving style, it may not be possi‐ ble to calculate a measured value. In this case, the measured value for the last, sufficiently long trip is displayed. General information Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐ played in the instrument cluster. The quantity to be added is indicated in the message shown on the Control Display. Only add suitable types of engine oil. Safely park the vehicle and switch off drive-ready state before adding engine oil. 372 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Operating materials Take care not to add too much engine oil. MOBILITY M760Li: opening/closing the flap Safety information Warning Operating materials, for instance oils, greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful ingredients. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Follow the instructions on the containers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing, skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not refill operating ma‐ terials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children. When the flap is closed, it must latch. Adding engine oil 1. Opening the hood. Opening, refer to page 369. NOTICE An engine oil level that is too low causes en‐ gine damage. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Im‐ mediately add engine oil. 2. Open the lid counterclockwise. NOTICE Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property, among other potential dam‐ age. Do not add too much engine oil. When too much engine oil is added, have the engine oil level corrected by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 3. Add engine oil. 4. Close the lid. Engine oil types to add General information Overview The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐ partment. The engine oil grade is critical for the life of the engine. Additional information: Only add with the types of engine oil which are listed. For an overview, refer to page 367. 373 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Operating materials MOBILITY Safety information Viscosity grades NOTICE Oil additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of damage to property, among other poten‐ tial damage. Do not use oil additives. When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has a suitable viscosity grade. The suitable viscosity grade is indicated on a label in the engine compartment. Viscosity grades SAE 0W-20. SAE 0W-30. NOTICE Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunctions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk of dam‐ age to property, among other potential dam‐ age. When selecting an engine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the correct oil specifica‐ tion. Suitable engine oil types Add engine oils that meet the following oil rating standards: Gasoline engine The viscosity grade SAE 0W-20 is not suitable for gasoline engines 50i and 60i. More information about suitable oil specifications and viscosity grades of engine oils can be re‐ quested from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Engine oil change NOTICE Engine oil that is not changed in timely fashion can cause increased engine wear and thus en‐ gine damage. There is a risk of damage to property. It is recommended that you do not exceed the service intervals indicated in the ve‐ hicle. BMW Longlife-01 FE. BMW Longlife-14 FE+. BMW Longlife-17 FE+. Oil specifications BMW Longlife-14 FE+ and BMW Longlife-17 FE+ are not suitable for gaso‐ line engines 50i and 60i. Alternative engine oil types The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop change the en‐ gine oil. If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an engine oil with the following oil rating can be added: Oil specification API SL. API SM. API SN. 374 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Operating materials Coolant MOBILITY Additional information: For an overview, refer to page 367. General information Coolant consists of water and coolant additive. Not all commercially available additives are suita‐ ble for the vehicle. Do not mix additives of differ‐ ent colors. Observe the water - additive mixture ratio of 50:50. Information about suitable addi‐ tives is available from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Safety information Warning Checking the coolant level 1. Let the engine cool down. 2. Opening the hood. Opening, refer to page 369. 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐ sure to dissipate, then open it. 4. Open the coolant reservoir lid. 5. The coolant level is correct if it lies between the minimum and maximum marks in the filler neck. With the engine hot and the cooling system open, coolant can escape and lead to scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open the cooling system with the engine cooled down. Warning Additives are harmful and incorrect additives can damage the engine. There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to property. Do not allow additives to come into contact with skin, eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable additives only. 6. Close the lid. Adding coolant 1. Let the engine cool down. 2. Opening the hood. Opening, refer to page 369. Coolant level General information Depending on the motorization, there are up to two coolant reservoirs in the engine compart‐ ment. Check and add the coolant levels on a reg‐ ular basis. The coolant level is indicated using minimum and maximum markings in the filler neck of the coolant reservoir. Depending on the engine installation, the coolant reservoir is located on the right side or the left side of the engine compartment. 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly counterclockwise to allow any excess pres‐ sure to dissipate, then open it. 4. Open the coolant reservoir lid. 5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to the specified level; do not overfill. 6. Close the lid. 7. Have the cause of the coolant loss eliminated as soon as possible. 375 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Operating materials MOBILITY Disposal Comply with the relevant environmental protection regulations when disposing of coolant and coolant additives. Washer fluid General information All windshield washer jets are supplied from one tank. Use a mixture of tap water and windshield washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield washer concentrate containing antifreeze can be used. Recommended minimum fill quantity: 0.2 US gal/1 liter. Safety information Warning Some types of antifreeze can contain harmful substances and are flammable. There is a risk of fire and an injury hazard. Follow the instruc‐ tions on the containers. Keep antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do not refill operating materials into different bottles. Store operating materials out of reach of children. United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual states; do not exceed the allowable washer fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the usage instructions on the washer fluid container. Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concentrate or the equivalent is recommended. Warning Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on con‐ tact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of in‐ jury or risk of damage to property. Only add washer fluid when the engine is cooled down. Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐ ervoir. NOTICE Silicon-containing additives in the washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on the windows can lead to damage to the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not add siliconcontaining additives to the washer fluid. NOTICE Mixing different windshield washer concen‐ trates or antifreeze can damage the washing system. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not mix dif‐ ferent windshield washer concentrates or anti‐ freeze. Follow the information and mixture ra‐ tios provided on the containers. Overview The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐ gine compartment. Malfunction The use of undiluted windshield washer concen‐ trate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead to in‐ correct readings at temperatures below +5 ℉/-15 ℃. 376 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Maintenance MOBILITY Maintenance Vehicle features and options General information This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Additional information: BMW maintenance system The maintenance system provides service notifi‐ cations and thereby provides support in main‐ taining road safety and the operational reliability of the vehicle. In some cases, scopes and intervals of the main‐ tenance system may vary according to the coun‐ try version. Replacement work, spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear materials are calculated separately. Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified serv‐ ice center or repair shop. Condition Based Service CBS Principle Sensors and special algorithms take into account the driving conditions of the vehicle. CBS uses these to provide maintenance recommendations. The system makes it possible to adapt the amount of maintenance corresponding to your user profile. Information on service notifications can be dis‐ played on the Control Display. Service notifications, refer to page 167. Service data in the vehicle key Information on the service notifications is contin‐ uously stored in the vehicle key. The service center can read this data out and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehicle. Therefore, hand the service advisor the vehicle key with which the vehicle was driven most re‐ cently. Storage periods Storage periods during which the vehicle battery was disconnected are not taken into account. If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop update the time-dependent maintenance proce‐ dures, such as checking brake fluid and, if neces‐ sary, changing the engine oil and the microfilter/ activated-charcoal filter. Maintenance Booklet for US Models Please consult your Maintenance Booklet for ad‐ ditional information on the performance of serv‐ ice and maintenance work. The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends that maintenance and repair be performed by a service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Records of regular maintenance and repair work should be retained. 377 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Maintenance MOBILITY Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis General information Devices connected to the OBD socket trigger the alarm system when the vehicle is locked. Re‐ move any devices connected at the OBD socket before locking the vehicle. Safety information NOTICE The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an intri‐ cate component intended to be used in con‐ junction with specialized equipment to check the vehicle’s primary emissions system. Im‐ proper use of the socket for Onboard Diagno‐ sis, or contact with the socket for Onboard Di‐ agnosis for other than its intended purpose, can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates risks of personal and property damage. Given the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle strongly recommends that access to the socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a dealer's service center or another qualified service cen‐ ter or repair shop or other persons that have the specialized training and equipment for pur‐ poses of properly utilizing the socket for On‐ board Diagnosis. Emissions ▷ The warning light lights up: Emissions are deteriorating. Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. ▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐ cumstances: This indicates that there is excessive misfiring in the engine. Reduce the vehicle speed and have the sys‐ tem checked immediately; otherwise, serious engine misfiring within a brief period can seri‐ ously damage emission control components, in particular the catalytic converter. Position Located on the driver's side is an OBD socket for reading the vehicle data. 378 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Replacing components MOBILITY Replacing components Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Vehicle tool kit switch on the wiper without a wiper blade in‐ stalled. NOTICE Folded-away wipers can be jammed when the hood is opened. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that the wipers with the wiper blades mounted are folded down onto the windshield before opening the hood. Replacing the wiper blades 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the wiper arms. Fold-away position of the wipers, refer to page 148. 2. Lift the wiper off of the windshield and hold. The onboard vehicle tool kit is located in the left storage compartment of the cargo area. Wiper blades 3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the wiper blade, arrow 2. Safety information NOTICE The window may sustain damage if the wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade installed. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper blade. Do not fold or 379 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Replacing components MOBILITY 4. Insert the new wiper blade and press it on un‐ til it you hear it snap into the holder. 5. Fold down the wipers. Lights and bulbs General information Lights and bulbs make an essential contribution to driving safety. All headlights and lights are made using LED or laser technology. Some items of equipment use light-emitting di‐ odes installed behind a cover as a light source. These light-emitting diodes are related to con‐ ventional lasers and are officially designated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes. The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you let a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop perform the work in case of a malfunction. Safety information Headlight glass The inside of the headlight glass can fog up in cool or humid weather. When driving with the lights switched on, the condensation evaporates after a short time. The headlight glass does not need to be changed. If despite driving with the headlights switched on, increasing humidity forms, for instance water droplets in the light, have the headlights checked. Vehicle battery General information The battery is maintenance-free. More information about the battery can be re‐ quested from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Safety information DANGER Warning Focused laser light can irritate or permanently damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. The manufacturer of the vehicle recom‐ mends that the work on the lighting system in‐ cluding bulb replacement be performed by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Warning Intensive brightness can irritate or damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of injury. Do not look directly into the headlights or other light sources. Do not remove the LED covers. Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage. Warning Vehicle batteries that are not compatible can damage vehicle systems and impair vehicle functions. There is a risk of an accident and damage to property. Only vehicle batteries that are compatible with your vehicle type should be installed in your vehicle. Information on com‐ patible vehicle batteries is available at your dealer’s service center. 380 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Replacing components Register the battery to the vehicle The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends that you have a service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop register the ve‐ hicle battery to the vehicle after the battery has been replaced. Once the battery has been regis‐ tered again, all comfort features will be available without restriction and any Check Control mes‐ sages displayed which relate to comfort features will disappear. MOBILITY Charging the battery Charge the battery only when the engine is off and via the starting aid terminals in the engine compartment. Additional information: Starting aid terminals, refer to page 386. Power interruption After a power interruption, some equipment needs to be newly initialized or individual settings updated, for example: Charging the battery ▷ With Memory function: store the positions again. General information ▷ Time: update. Make sure that the battery is always sufficiently charged to guarantee that the battery remains usable for its full service life. ▷ Date: update. A discharged battery is indicated by a red indicator light. Charge the battery when acceleration is insuffi‐ cient. The following circumstances can have a negative effect on the performance of the battery: ▷ Frequent short-distance drives. ▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system. Disposing of old batteries Have old batteries disposed of by a deal‐ er’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop or take them to a collection point. Maintain the filled battery in an upright position for transport and storage. Secure the battery so that it does not tip over during transport. ▷ The vehicle is not used for more than a month. Fuses Safety information General information NOTICE Battery chargers that charge the vehicle battery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the vehicle may overload or damage the 12 V electrical system. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Only connect battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐ ment. The fuses are located at different places in the vehicle. 381 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 MOBILITY Replacing components Safety information Information on the fuse layout, as well as the po‐ sitions of any other fuse boxes, is available on the Internet: www.bmw.com/fusecard. Warning Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload elec‐ trical lines and components. There is a risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a substitute of another color or amperage rating. Additional fuse boxes Additional fuse boxes are located in the vehicle. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Replacing fuses In the car's interior The fuses are located in the car's interior in the front passenger floor area behind a cover. The vehicle manufacturer recommends that you have a dealer's service center or another quali‐ fied service center or repair shop replace the fuses. Loosen fasteners, arrows, and open cover. The fuse box is located on the front right. In the cargo area The fuses are located in the cargo area on the right side behind a cover. Remove the cover on the right side trim. The fuse box may be located behind the sound insulation. 382 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Breakdown Assistance MOBILITY Breakdown Assistance Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Hazard warning flashers Warning triangle The warning triangle is located on the inside of the tailgate. Press on the release, arrow 1, and swivel the cover down, arrow 2. First-aid kit General information Some of the articles have a limited service life. Check the expiration dates of the contents regu‐ larly and replace any expired items promptly. The button is located in the center console. The red light in the button flashes when the haz‐ ard warning flashers are activated. Storage Storage for the first-aid kit is provided in the left storage compartment of the cargo area. 383 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Breakdown Assistance MOBILITY BMW Roadside Assistance mitted automatically. It may be necessary to ap‐ prove this on the Control Display. Principle Teleservice Help Contact the BMW Group Roadside Assistance if assistance is needed in the event of a break‐ down. Depending on the country, Teleservice Help en‐ ables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehicle by BMW Roadside Assistance via wireless trans‐ mission. General information In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐ cle's condition is transmitted to the BMW Road‐ side Assistance. You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting it through BMW Roadside Assistance. 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place. There are various ways of contacting BMW Roadside Assistance. 2. Set the parking brake. ▷ Via a Check Control message. 4. Confirm Teleservice Help. Supplementary text messages, refer to page 159. ▷ Calling with a mobile phone. 3. Control Display is switched on. BMW Accident Assistance ▷ Via the BMW app. Principle Functional requirements BMW Group Accident Assistance can be con‐ tacted if assistance is needed in the event of an accident. ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment with intelligent emergency call or BMW Con‐ nectedDrive services. ▷ Cellular network reception. ▷ Standby state is switched on. Starting manually If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, sup‐ port is offered through Teleservice Diagnosis. 1. "APPS" 2. "Installed apps" General information If the vehicle sensors detect a minor to moder‐ ately severe accident, which did not trigger any airbags, a Check Control message appears on the instrument cluster. In addition, a text mes‐ sage appears on the Control Display. When BMW Accident Assistance is activated, data on the vehicle's condition is sent to BMW. Functional requirements 3. "BMW Assist" 4. If necessary, "BMW Roadside Assistance" A voice connection is established. Teleservice Diagnosis ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equipment with intelligent emergency call or BMW Con‐ nectedDrive services. ▷ Cellular network reception. ▷ Standby state is switched on. Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐ portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is trans‐ 384 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Breakdown Assistance MOBILITY Starting BMW Accident Assistance For technical reasons, the Emergency Call can‐ not be guaranteed under unfavorable conditions. If an accident is detected automatically Overview A text message relating to BMW Accident Assis‐ tance appears on the Control Display. The connection can be established directly: "Contact accident assistance" The Check Control message for BMW Accident Assistance can also be called up from the stored Check Control messages for a certain length of time. Additional information: Check Control, refer to page 158. SOS button. Functional requirements Starting manually ▷ Standby state is switched on. BMW Accident Assistance can also be con‐ tacted independently of the automatic accident detection function. ▷ The Assist system is functional. 1. "APPS" 2. "Installed apps" ▷ If the vehicle is equipped with intelligent emergency call: the integrated SIM card in the vehicle has been activated. Automatic triggering 3. "BMW Assist" 4. "BMW Accident Assistance" Follow the displays on the Control Display. A voice connection is established. Emergency Call Intelligent emergency call Principle In case of an emergency, an emergency call can be triggered automatically by the system or man‐ ually. Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐ bags trigger, an emergency call is automatically initiated immediately after an accident of corre‐ sponding severity. Automatic Collision Notifica‐ tion is not affected by pressing the SOS button. Manual triggering 1. Tap the cover. 2. Press and hold the SOS button until the LED in the area of the button illuminates green. ▷ The LED is illuminated green when an emer‐ gency call has been initiated. If a cancel prompt appears on the Control Display, the emergency call can be aborted. General information Only press the SOS button in an emergency. The Intelligent Assist system establishes a con‐ nection with the BMW Response Center. 385 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Breakdown Assistance MOBILITY If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle until the voice connection has been established. ▷ The LED flashes green when a connection to the BMW Response Center has been estab‐ lished. The BMW Response Center then makes contact with the occupants of the vehicle and initiates further steps to help. Even if you are unable to respond, the BMW Response Center can take further steps to help you under certain circumstances. For this purpose, data that serves to deter‐ mine the necessary rescue measures, for in‐ stance the current position of the vehicle when it can be determined, is transmitted to the BMW Response Center. Even if the BMW Response Center is no lon‐ ger heard through the loudspeakers, the BMW Response Center may still be able to hear the occupants of the vehicle. The BMW Response Center ends the emer‐ gency call. Safety information DANGER Contact with live components can lead to an electric shock. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Do not touch any components that are under voltage. Warning If the jumper cables are connected in the incor‐ rect order, sparking may occur. There is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order dur‐ ing connection. NOTICE In the case of body contact between the two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during jumpstarting. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Make sure that no body contact occurs. Malfunction The function of the Emergency Request may be impaired. The LED in the area of the SOS button lights up for approximately 30 seconds. A Check Control message is displayed. Have it checked by a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Preparation 1. Check whether the battery of the other vehi‐ cle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage in‐ formation can be found on the battery. 2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehicle. 3. Switch off any electrical components in both vehicles. Starting aid terminals Jump-starting General information If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started using the battery of another vehicle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper cables with fully insulated clamp handles. The starting aid terminal in the engine compart‐ ment acts as the positive battery terminal. A special connection on the body in the engine compartment acts as the negative battery termi‐ nal. Additional information: Overview of engine compartment, refer to page 367. Open the cover of the positive battery terminal. 386 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Breakdown Assistance MOBILITY Connecting the cables Tow-starting and towing Before you begin, switch off all unnecessary electronic systems/components, such as the radio, on the assisting and receiving vehicles. Safety information 1. Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive jumper cable to the positive battery terminal, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle providing assistance. 3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end of the cable to the positive battery terminal, or to the corresponding starting aid terminal of the vehicle to be started. 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative jumper cable to the negative battery terminal, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of assisting vehicle. 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the neg‐ ative battery terminal, or to the corresponding engine or body ground of the vehicle to be started. Starting the engine Never use spray fluids to start the engine. 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run for several minutes at an increased idle speed. 2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be started in the usual way. If the first starting attempt is not successful, wait a few minutes before making another at‐ tempt in order to allow the discharged battery to recharge. 3. Let both engines run for several minutes. 4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the reverse order. Check the battery and recharge, if needed. Warning Due to system limits, individual functions can malfunction during tow-starting/towing with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. There is a risk of accident. Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/towing. Steptronic transmission: transporting the vehicle General information The vehicle is not permitted to be towed. Safety information NOTICE The vehicle can be damaged when towing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. The vehicle should only be trans‐ ported on a loading platform. NOTICE The vehicle can become damaged when lifting and securing it. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. ▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means. ▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow fitting, body parts, or suspension parts. Pushing the vehicle To remove a broken-down vehicle from the haz‐ ardous area, it can be pushed for a short dis‐ tance. 387 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Breakdown Assistance MOBILITY Additional information: Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 151. NOTICE If the tow bar or tow rope is attached incor‐ rectly, damage to other vehicle parts can occur. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the tow fitting. Tow truck Tow bar The tow fittings used should be on the same side on both vehicles. The vehicle should only be transported on a loading platform. Towing other vehicles General information Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐ ing on local regulations. If the electrical system has failed, clearly identify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign or a warning triangle in the rear window. Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting the tow bar at an inclination, please follow the follow‐ ing: ▷ Free movement is limited going around cor‐ ners. ▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is secured with an inclination. Tow rope Observe the following notes when using the tow rope: ▷ Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable the vehicle to be towed without jerking. ▷ Make sure the tow rope is not twisted when fastening. Safety information Warning If the approved gross vehicle weight of the tow‐ ing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will not be possible to control handling. There is a risk of accident. Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of the towing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be towed. ▷ Check the attachment of the tow fitting and tow rope in regular intervals. ▷ Do not exceed a towing speed of 30 mph/50 km/h. ▷ Do not exceed a towing distance of 3 miles/5 km. ▷ When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure that the tow rope is taut. 388 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Breakdown Assistance Tow fitting MOBILITY Safety information General information NOTICE If the tow fitting is not used as intended, there may be damage to the vehicle or to the tow fit‐ ting. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Follow the notes on using the tow fitting. Screw thread for tow fitting The screw-in tow fitting should always be carried in the vehicle. The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front or rear of the vehicle. The tow fitting is found in the onboard vehicle tool kit. Observe the following notes when using the tow fitting: ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the ve‐ hicle. Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to push it out. ▷ Turn the tow fitting at least 5 turns clockwise and screw it in as far as it will go. If necessary, tighten with a suitable object. Tow-starting ▷ After use, unscrew the tow fitting counterclockwise. Start the engine by jump-starting, if possible. ▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for in‐ stance do not lift the vehicle by the tow fit‐ ting. Do not tow-start the vehicle. Have the reasons for the starting difficulties cor‐ rected by a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Additional information: Jump-starting, refer to page 386. ▷ Check the attachment of the tow fitting in regular intervals. Additional information: Onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 379. 389 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Vehicle Care MOBILITY Vehicle Care Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. Washing the vehicle General information Regularly remove foreign objects such as leaves in the area below the windshield when the hood is raised. Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in win‐ ter. Intense contamination and road salt can damage the vehicle. Steam cleaner and high pressure cleaner Safety information Distances and temperature ▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃. ▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm. ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof: 31.5 in/80 cm. Automatic washing systems or car washes Safety information NOTICE Improper use of automatic washing systems or car washes can cause damage to the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Follow the following in‐ structions: ▷ Give preference to cloth car washes or those that use soft brushes in order to avoid paint damage. ▷ Do not drive through a car wash with guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to the body. ▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to avoid damage to tires and rims. ▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to the exterior mirrors. NOTICE When cleaning with high pressure cleaners, components can be damaged due to the pres‐ sure or temperatures being too high. There is a risk of damage to property, among other poten‐ tial damage. Maintain sufficient distance and do not spray too long continuously. Follow the op‐ erating instructions for the high pressure clean‐ ers. ▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain sensor to avoid damage to the window wiper system. 390 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Vehicle Care MOBILITY Driving into a car wash with a Steptronic transmission be reduced. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion. Safety information Completely remove all residues on the windows, to minimize loss of visibility due to smearing and to reduce wiper noises and wiper blade wear. NOTICE Selector lever position P is automatically en‐ gaged when standby state is switched off. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Do not switch standby state off in car washes. Vehicle care Vehicle care products General information General information In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll freely. Some car washes do not permit persons in the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from the outside when in selector lever position N. A sig‐ nal sounds when an attempt is made to lock the vehicle. Additional information: BMW recommends using vehicle care and cleaning products from BMW. Suitable vehicle care products are available from a dealer’s serv‐ ice center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Safety information Warning Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to page 151. Driving out of a car wash Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. Turn on drive readiness. Additional information: Drive-ready state, refer to page 40. Headlights Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents. Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance from insects, with auto shampoo and wash off with water. Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice scraper. After washing the vehicle After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking effect can Cleansers can contain substances that are dan‐ gerous and harmful to your health. There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the interior, open the doors or windows. Only use products in‐ tended for cleaning vehicles. Follow the in‐ structions on the container. Vehicle paintwork General information Regular vehicle care contributes to driving safety and value retention. Environmental influences in areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐ taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can affect the vehicle paintwork. Tailor the frequency and extent of your vehicle care to these influences. Corrosive substances such as spilled fuel, oil, grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐ mediately to prevent the finish from being altered or discolored. 391 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 MOBILITY Vehicle Care Matte paintwork Caring for special components Only use cleaning and care products suitable for vehicles with matte paintwork. Light-alloy wheels Leather care Remove dust from the leather regularly, using a cloth or vacuum cleaner. Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime chafe in pores and folds, and lead to heavy wear and premature degradation of the leather surface. To guard against discoloration, such as from clothing, clean leather and provide leather care roughly every two months. Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐ cause contamination on such surfaces is sub‐ stantially more visible. Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and grease will gradually break down the protective coating of the leather surface. Upholstery material care General information Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vacuum cleaner. If upholstery is very contaminated, for instance with beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro‐ fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. Clean the upholstery down to the seams using large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the ma‐ terial vigorously. When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral rim cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam cleaners above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents can destroy the protective coating of adjacent com‐ ponents, such as the brake disc. After cleaning, apply the brakes shortly to dry them. The heat generated during braking dries brake discs and brake pads and protects them against corrosion. Chrome surfaces Carefully clean Chrome surfaces, especially in case of exposure to road salt, with plenty of wa‐ ter and added auto shampoo as needed. Rubber components Environmental influences can cause surface con‐ tamination of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use only water and suitable cleaning agents for cleaning. Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber care products at regular intervals. When cleaning rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing vehicle care products in order to avoid damage or noises. Fine wood parts Safety information Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐ nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a soft cloth. NOTICE Open hook and loop fasteners on articles of clothing can damage the seat covers and other cloth upholstery in the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Ensure that any Velcro® fasteners are closed. Kenaf Only treat parts made of Kenaf fibers using suita‐ ble care products. 392 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Vehicle Care Plastic components NOTICE Cleaning agents that contain alcohol or sol‐ vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty grease removers, fuel and such, can damage plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ erty, among other potential damage. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if needed. Do not soak the headliner. Safety belts MOBILITY Make sure that there is sufficient clearance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are se‐ curely fastened again after they were removed, for instance for cleaning. The floor mats can be removed from the car's in‐ terior for cleaning. If the floor carpets are very contaminated, clean with a microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and forth in the driving direction only. Sensors and camera lenses To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a cloth moistened with a small amount of glass deter‐ gent. Displays, screens, and protective glass of the Head-up Display Warning Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect of the safety belts. There is a risk of injury or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the safety belts. Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and thus have a negative impact on safety. Use only a mild soapy solution for cleaning the installed belt straps. Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if they are dry. Carpets and floor mats Warning Objects in the driver's floor area can limit the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow objects in the vehicle such that they are secured and cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats and do not layer several floor mats. NOTICE Chemical cleaning agents, moisture or fluids of any kind can damage the surface of displays and screens. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ erty, among other potential damage. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth. NOTICE The surface of displays can be damaged with improper cleaning. There is a risk of damage to property, among other potential damage. Avoid pressure that is too high and do not use any scratching materials. Use a dry, clean antistatic microfiber cloth. Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐ play using a microfiber cloth and commercially available dish-washing soap. Taking the vehicle out of service When the vehicle is shut down for longer than three months, special measures must be taken. 393 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 MOBILITY Vehicle Care Further information is available from a dealer's service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. 394 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Vehicle Care MOBILITY 395 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Technical data REFERENCE Technical data Vehicle features and options This chapter describes all standard, country-spe‐ cific and optional features offered with the series. It also describes features and functions that are not necessarily available in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected options or country versions. This also applies to safety-related functions and sys‐ tems. When using these functions and systems, the applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐ served. General information The technical data and specifications in the Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, for instance due to the selected optional equip‐ ment, country version or country-specific meas‐ uring procedure. Detailed values can be found in the approval documents, on labels on the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’s service center or another qualified service center or repair shop. Dimensions The dimensions can vary depending on the model version, equipment version or countryspecific measurement procedure. The height of the vehicle can also differ, e.g. due to tires and vehicle load. BMW 7er Sedan Width with mirrors in/mm 85.4/2,169 Width without mirrors in/mm 74.9/1,902 Height in/mm 57.8/1,467 Height L-models in/mm 58.2/1,479 Length in/mm 201.8/5,127 Length L-models in/mm 207.4/5,267 Wheelbase in/mm 120.9/3,070 Wheelbase L-models in/mm 126.4/3,210 Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 41.3/12.6 Smallest turning radius diam. L-models ft/m 43.0/13.1 396 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Technical data REFERENCE Weights Canada only: 750i xDrive Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,820/2,640 Payload lbs/kg 959/435 Approved front axle weight lbs/kg 2,932/1,330 Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 3,042/1,380 Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,512/2,500 Payload lbs/kg 904/410 Approved front axle weight lbs/kg 2,657/1,205 Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 3,020/1,370 Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,633/2,555 Payload lbs/kg 888/403 Approved front axle weight lbs/kg 2,767/1,255 Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 3,020/1,370 Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,897/2,675 Payload lbs/kg 849/385 Approved front axle weight lbs/kg 2,972/1,348 Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 3,075/1,395 Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 6,261/2,840 Payload lbs/kg 1,034/469 740Li 740Li xDrive 750Li xDrive M760Li xDrive powered by BMW M 397 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 REFERENCE Technical data M760Li xDrive powered by BMW M Approved front axle weight lbs/kg 3,109/1,410 Approved rear axle weight lbs/kg 3,285/1,490 Capacities BMW 7er Sedan US gal/liters Fuel tank, approx. 20.6/78.0 Observe further information on fuel quality, refer to page 370. 398 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Appendix REFERENCE Appendix General information Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the vehi‐ cle are listed here. 399 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Everything from A to Z REFERENCE Everything from A to Z Index 0-9 3D View, see Surround View 261 A ABS Antilock Braking System 219 Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Control 153 Accessories and parts 8 Accident prevention, see Active Protection 216 ACC, see Active Cruise Control 227 Activated charcoal filter 282 Active Blind Spot Detection 206 Active comfort chassis, see Executive Drive Pro 276 Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function ACC 227 Active Guard Plus, see Intelligent Safety 187 Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 187 Active PDC, see Emergency brake function 250 Active Protection 216 Active roll stabilization 277 Active seat ventilation 129 Active Steering, integral 222 Adaptive brake assistant 219 Adaptive chassis 276 Adaptive Light Control 177 ADAPTIVE, see Driving Dynamics Control 142 Adding engine oil types 373 Adding oil 372 Additives, engine oil types 373 Adjusting contents, iDrive 47 Adjusting engine sound 277 Adjusting sound of the engine 277 Adjustments, steering wheel 125 Airbags 183 Airbags, indicator and warning light 185 Air circulation, see Recirculated-air mode 281 air conditioning, climate 280 Air distribution, manual 281 Air drying, see air conditioning 280 Air flow, automatic climate control 281 Air outlets, see Ventilation 282 Air pressure, tires 336 Air quality 278 Air suspension 275 Alarm system 103 Alarm, unintentional 104 All-season tires, see Winter tires 345 All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 221 Ambient air package 290 Ambient highlight 182 Ambient light 181 Android Auto, connection to the vehicle 79 Android Auto preparation, connection to the ve‐ hicle 79 Android Auto preparation, smartphone integra‐ tion 79 Animal detection, see Night Vision 199 Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 376 Antilock Braking System ABS 219 Anti-slip control, see DSC 219 Anti-theft protection, locking 83 Anti-theft protection, lug bolt lock 362 Apple CarPlay preparation, connection to the ve‐ hicle 79 Apple CarPlay preparation, smartphone integra‐ tion 79 Approach control warning with City braking func‐ tion 188 Approach control warning with light braking func‐ tion 188 Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ tertainment, Communication 6 Aquaplaning 323 Armrest heating 128 Ashtray 298 Ashtray, rear 299 Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off assis‐ tant 219 400 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Everything from A to Z Assistance with breakdown 383 Assisted Driving Mode, see Steering Assis‐ tant 237 Assisted Driving Plus 241 Assisted Driving View 156 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment and Communication 6 AUTO H button, see Parking brake 142 Automatic activation, see Climate control rules 130 Automatic car wash 390 Automatic climate control 278 Automatic control, headlight 175 Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mirror 124 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passenger air‐ bags 186 Automatic headlight control 175 Automatic High Beam Assistant 178 Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 142 Automatic locking 102 Automatic Parking Assistant 254 Automatic Recirculating Air Control 281 Automatic time setting 63 Automatic transmission, see Steptronic trans‐ mission 149 Automatic unlocking 102 Automating routines, BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 53 AUTO program, automatic climate control 280 AUTO program, intensity 280 Auto Start/Stop function 137 Average consumption, see Trip data 171 Axle loads, approved 397 B Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 113 Backrest, seats 112 Backrest tilt 113 Backrest tilt, rear seats 116 Backrest, width 114 Bandages, see First-aid kit 383 Bar for tow-starting/towing 388 Basic position, rear seats 115 Battery, disposing of 381 Battery, vehicle 380 REFERENCE Being towed, see Tow-starting and towing 387 Belts, see Safety belts 117 Blind spot collision warning 206 Blocking, power window, see Safety switch 106 Bluetooth connection 76 Blu-ray, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 BMW Accident Assistance 384 BMW Assist, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 BMW display key 87 BMW display key, malfunction 90 BMW Drive Recorder 214 BMW Gesture Control 54 BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 50 BMW maintenance system 377 BMW Roadside Assistance 384 BMW Touch Command, operation 57 Bonus range, ECO PRO 331 Bottle holder, front, see Cup holder, front 313 Bottle holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 314 Bracket, flag 325 Brake assistant 219 Brake assistant, adaptive 219 Brake discs, see Brake system 322 Brake-in 322 Brake pads, see Brake system 322 Brake system 322 Braking, information 324 Breakdown assistance 383 Breaking in 322 Break recommendation, see Fatigue alert 218 Brightness, Control Display 65 Button, central locking system 92 Buttons on the steering wheel 30 Button, SOS, see Intelligent emergency call 385 Button, Start/Stop 137 Bypassing, see Jump-starting 386 C Cable for tow-starting/towing 388 Calendar day, see Date 63 California Proposition 65 Warning 8 Call, gesture control 55 401 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 REFERENCE Everything from A to Z Camera-based assistance systems, see Intelli‐ gent Safety 187 Camera instrument cluster, see Driver Attention Camera 64 Camera lenses, care 393 Camera, rearview camera, see Surround View 261 Camera, rearview camera, without Surround View 251 Camera, see Surround View 261 Cameras, see Sensors of the vehicle 35 CANCEL button, Active Cruise Control 227 CANCEL button, cruise control 225 Can holder, front, see Cup holder, front 313 Can holder, rear, see Cup holder, rear 314 Captain’s Chair, see Executive Lounge Seat‐ ing 126 Care 390 Care, Head-up Display 393 Care, light-alloy wheels 392 Care of displays, screens 393 Care, vehicle 391 Cargo 316 Cargo area 316 Cargo area with emergency wheel, enlarg‐ ing 319 Cargo, stowing and securing 317 Cargo straps, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 317 Caring Car, BMW Intelligent Personal Assis‐ tant 54 Car key, see Vehicle key 82 Carpet, care 393 CarPlay, connection to the vehicle 79 Car seats, see Transporting children safely 131 Cartridge replacement, see Ambient air pack‐ age 290 Car wash 390 Car wash, automatic 390 Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas sys‐ tem 323 CBS Condition Based Service 377 Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Center armrest, front 312 Center armrest, rear 312 Center console 33 Central Information Display (CID), see Control Display 45 Central locking switch, see Central locking sys‐ tem 92 Central locking system 92 Central screen, see Control Display 45 Changes, technical, see For Your Own Safety 8 Change, wheels and tires 344 Changing parts 379 Changing wheels 361 Charging smartphone, see Wireless charging tray 303 Charging tray for smartphones, see Wireless charging tray 303 Chassis number, see Vehicle identification num‐ ber 12 Check Control 158 Checking the engine oil level electronically 372 Children, seating position 131 Children, transporting safely 131 Child restraint systems, mounting 132 Child restraint systems, see Transporting chil‐ dren safely 131 Child safety locks 136 Child seat, mounting 132 Child seat mountings LATCH 133 Child seats, see Transporting children safely 131 Chrome-plated surfaces, care 392 Chrome surfaces, care 392 Cigarette lighter 299 Cigarette lighter, front 300 Cigarette lighter, rear 300 Cleaning displays, screens 393 Cleaning, Head-up Display 393 Clearance, water 324 Climate comfort laminated safety glass 323 Climate comfort windshield 323 Climate control 278 Climate control rules 130 Clothes hooks 315 Coasting 331 Coasting with engine decoupled, see Coast‐ ing 331 Coasting with idling engine 331 402 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Everything from A to Z Combination switch, see Turn signals 145 Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys‐ tem 146 Comfort Access 93 COMFORT PLUS, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ trol 140 COMFORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 140 Communication, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Compact wheel, see Emergency wheel 365 Comparison of entries, see Entry comparison 43 Compartments in the doors 311 Compatible devices, see Suitable devices 74 Compressor 347 Concierge Service, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Condensation water under the parked vehi‐ cle 325 Condensation, windshield 282 Condition Based Service CBS 377 Confirmation signal from the vehicle 101 Connect device 73 ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Connecting electrical devices, see Sockets 300 Connecting, mobile devices 73 Connections, Screen Mirroring 78 Consumption display, ECO PRO 331 Consumption display, widget in the instrument cluster 157 Consumption, see Current consumption 157 Consumption, see Trip data 171 Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Container for washer fluid 376 Continued driving with a flat tire 357, 360 Control Display 45 Control Display, brightness 65 Control display, pop-ups 65 Controller 46 Control systems, driving stability 219 Convenient closing, vehicle key 84 Convenient opening, vehicle key 83 Coolant 375 Coolant level 375 REFERENCE Coolant temperature, see Engine tempera‐ ture 166 Cooler box 307 Cooler, rear 307 Cooling, maximum 280 Cooling system 375 Cornering light 178 Corrosion on brake discs 325 Cosmetic mirror 298 Cross traffic warning 272 Cruise control 225 Cruise control, active with Stop&Go func‐ tion 227 Cruise control, see Active Cruise Control 227 Cruise control with distance control, see Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function 227 Cruise control without distance control, see Cruise control 225 Cruising range 167 Cup holder, front 313 Cup holder, rear 314 Current consumption 157 Cushions for the electric head restraints 122 Customer service, see Owner's Manual for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 D Damage, tires 343 Dashboard 30 Dashboard, see Instrument cluster 155 Dashcam, see BMW Drive Recorder 214 Data memory 10 Data protection, settings 68 Data, see Deleting personal data 68 Data, technical 396 Date 63 Daytime driving lights 177 Daytime running lights 177 DCC, see Cruise control 225 Defrosting, see Defrosting windshield 282 Defrosting, windshield 282 Deleting personal data 68 Departure schedule, see Pre-ventilation 286 Departure time, pre-conditioning 289 Departure time, pre-ventilation 287 403 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 REFERENCE Everything from A to Z Destination input 6 Device list 74 Diagnosis connection 378 Dimensions 396 Dimmable exterior mirrors 124 Dimmable interior mirror 124 Direct dial buttons, see Programmable memory buttons 44 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 145 Display, iDrive 42 Display in the windshield, see Head-up Dis‐ play 173 Display key 87 Display key, malfunction 90 Display key, see BMW display key 87 Display lighting, see Instrument lighting 180 Display, notifications, BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 66 Display panel, see Instrument cluster 155 Displays 155 Displays and symbols 7 Displays, ECO PRO 329 Display speed limit, see Speed Limit Info 168 Disposal, coolant 376 Disposal, vehicle battery 381 Distance control, see PDC 247 Door handle lighting, see Welcome lights 176 Door opening angle, Surround View 262 Drive-off assistant 219 Drive-off assistant, see DSC 219 Drive power reduced, see Heavily discharged high-voltage battery 165 Driver activity, see Driver Attention Camera 64 Driver assistance, driving, see Intelligent Safety 187 Driver assistance, parking, see Parking assis‐ tance systems 246 Driver assistance, see Intelligent Safety 187 Driver assistance systems 223 Driver Attention Camera 64 Drive readiness, see Operating condition of the vehicle 39 Drive-ready state, engine start 40 Driver Fatigue Alert, see Driver Attention Cam‐ era 64 Driver profiles 69 Driver profile, setup 69 Driver profiles, welcome screen 69 Driving 137 Driving Assistant, see Intelligent Safety 187 Driving comfort 275, 276 Driving Dynamics Control 140 Driving instructions, breaking in 322 Driving mode, ECO PRO 329 Driving mode, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ trol 140 Driving notes, general 323 Driving out of parking space 258 Driving stability control systems 219 Driving, Start/Stop button 137 Driving style analysis, ECO PRO 333 Driving through water 324 Driving tips 323 DSC Dynamic Stability Control 219 DTC Dynamic Traction Control 221 Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chassis 276 Dynamic Stability Control 219 Dynamic Stability Control DSC 219 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 221 E ECO PRO 329 ECO PRO, bonus range 331 ECO PRO, driving style analysis 333 ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics Control 140 ECO PRO, see Driving Dynamics Control 140 Efficiency display, widget in the instrument clus‐ ter 157 Efficient4x4, see xDrive 221 Electronic oil measurement 372 Electronic Stability Program ESP, see DSC 219 E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Emergency brake function when parking, Active PDC 250 Emergency brake, see Emergency stop assis‐ tant 213 Emergency braking, see PostCrash - iBrake 217 Emergency call 385 404 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Everything from A to Z Emergency service, see BMW Accident Assis‐ tance 384 Emergency service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ tance 384 Emergency stop assistant 213 Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 335 Emergency unlocking, transmission lock 153 Emergency unlocking, trunk lid 99 Emergency wheel 365 Energy recovery 157 Energy savings, see Gear shift indicator 168 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 137 Engine compartment 367 Engine coolant 375 Engine idling when driving, see Coasting 331 Engine oil, adding 372 Engine oil change 374 Engine oil filler neck 372 Engine oil temperature 166 Engine oil types to add 373 Engine start, see Drive-ready state 40 Engine start, see Jump-starting 386 Engine stopping, see Drive-ready state 40 Engine temperature 166 Entering a destination, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ tion 6 Entering an address, navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Com‐ munication 6 Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Entertainment, selection list in the instrument cluster 170 Entry comparison 43 Equipment, interior 295 Error indicators, see Check Control 158 ESP Electronic Stability Program, see DSC 219 Evasion Assistant 191 Exchange, wheels and tires 344 Executive Drive Pro 276 Executive Lounge Seating 126 Exhaust gas system 323 Exhaustion warner 218 Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 323 REFERENCE Experience Modes, BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant 53 Exterior lighting during unlocking 83 Exterior lighting with the vehicle locked 84 Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor 124 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming feature 124 Exterior mirrors 123 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 123 External start, see Jump-starting 386 Eyelet for towing 389 Eyes, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 317 F Factory settings, see reset vehicle data 65 Failure message, see Check Control 158 Fan, see Air flow 281 Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 117 Fatigue alert 218 Fault indicators, see Check Control 158 Filler neck for engine oil 372 Filter, see Interior filter 278 Fine wood parts, care 392 First-aid kit 383 First Steps, see Setup Wizard 69 Flag bracket 325 Flat tire, changing wheels 361 Flat tire, continued driving 357, 360 Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 358 Flat tire message, FTM 359 Flat tire message, Tire Pressure Monitor 354 Flat Tire Monitor TPM 358 Flat tire, repairing 346 Flat tire, see Tire Pressure Monitor 351 Flat tire warning light, FTM 359 Flat tire warning light, see Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor 354 Flooding, driving through 324 Floor carpet, care 393 Floor mats, care 393 Fold-away position, wiper 148 Folding table, rear 306 Folding table, see Folding table, rear 306 Foot brake 324 Forward collision mitigation, see Intelligent Safety 187 405 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 REFERENCE Everything from A to Z For Your Own Safety 8 Fragrance cartridge, see Ambient air pack‐ age 290 Fragrance, see Ambient air package 290 Fragrancing, see Ambient air package 290 Front airbags 183 Front collision mitigation 188 Front collision mitigation, see Forward Collision Warning 188 Front collision mitigation, see Intersection Colli‐ sion Warning 193 Front collision mitigation, see Pedestrian Warn‐ ing 197 Front fog lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 380 Front lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 380 Front passenger airbags 186 Front passenger airbags, automatic deactiva‐ tion 186 Front passenger seat, adjusting from the rear 117 Front passenger seat functionality 114 Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator light 186 Front seats 112 Fuel 370 Fuel cap 334 Fuel filler flap 334 Fuel filler flap, unlocking manually 335 Fuel gauge 164 Fuel quality 370 Fuel recommendation 370 Fuel tank, see Filling capacity 398 Fuses 381 G Garage door opener, see Integrated Universal Remote Control 295 Gasoline 370 Gasoline quality 371 Gear change, Steptronic transmission 149 Gear shift indicator 168 General driving notes 323 General settings 63 Gentleman function, see Front passenger seat functionality 114 Gesture Control 54 Gestures, see BMW Gesture Control 54 Glare shield, see Sun visor 298 Glass sunroof, electric 108 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 110 Glopal Positioning System, navigation 6 Glove compartment 310 G-meter, widget in the instrument cluster 157 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Gross vehicle weight, approved 397 H Handbrake, see Parking brake 142 Hand-held transmitter, alternating code 296 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Hazard warning system 383 Head airbag 184 Headlight control, automatic 175 Headlight flasher 146 Headlight glass 380 Headlights, care 391 Headlights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 380 Head restraints and seats 112 Head restraints, front 119 Head restraints, rear 121 Head-up Display 173 Head-up Display, care 393 Head-up Display, store position, see Memory function 125 Heated steering wheel 125 Heated steering wheel, climate control rules 130 Heavy cargo, stowing 317 Height, vehicle 396 High-beam Assistant 178 High beams 146 High beams/low beams, see High-beam Assis‐ tant 178 Higher speed range 326 Hills 325 Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assistant 219 Holder for beverages, front 313 Holder for beverages, rear 314 406 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Everything from A to Z HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Control 295 Homepage, see Internet 6 Hood 368 Horn 30 Hotel function, see Valet parking mode 100 Hot exhaust gas system 323 Hour, see Time 63 Humidity in the headlight, see Headlight glass 380 HYBRID COMFORT, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ trol 140 I iBrake - PostCrash 217 Ice, see Outside temperature 166 Ice warning, see Outside temperature 166 Identification marks, tires 341 Identification number, see Vehicle identification number 12 iDrive 42 ID transmitter, see Vehicle key 82 Ignition key, see Vehicle key 82 Indicator light, front-seat passenger airbags 186 Indicator lights 159 Individual air distribution 281 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 69 Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wireless charging tray 303 Inflation pressure, tires 336 Inflation pressure warning TPM, tires 358 Information 6 Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 359 Input, iDrive 42 Instrument cluster 155 Instrument lighting 180 Instrument panel, see Instrument cluster 155 Integral Active Steering 222 Integrated key 91 Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle 14 Integrated Universal Remote Control 295 Intelligent emergency call 385 Intelligent Personal Assistant 50 Intelligent Safety 187 Intended use 8 REFERENCE Intensity, AUTO program 280 Interior equipment 295 Interior filter 278 Interior lights 180 Interior lights during unlocking 83 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 84 Interior mirror, automatic dimming feature 124 Interior mirrors 124 Interior motion sensor 104 Internet hotspot 77 Internet page 6 Intersection collision warning 193 Interval indicator, see Service notifications 167 Ionization, see Ambient air package 290 J Jacking points for the vehicle jack 363 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 110 Jam protection system, windows 105 Joystick, Steptronic transmission 149 Jump-starting 386 Jump-starting terminals 386 K Kenaf, care 392 Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 93 Key, mechanical 91 Key, see BMW display key 87 Key, see Vehicle key 82 Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 149 Knee airbag 184 L Label on recommended tires 344 Lane change assistant 243 Lane control assistant with active side collision protection, see Side collision mitigation 209 Lane departure warning 203 Lane lines, Surround View 262 Lane threshold, warning 203 Language, setting 64 Laser headlights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 380 407 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 REFERENCE Everything from A to Z Laser high beams 180 Lashing eyes in the cargo area 317 LATCH child seat mountings 133 Launch Control 153 Leather care 392 LED headlights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 380 LED light carpet, see Welcome light 176 Length, vehicle 396 Letters and numbers, entering 43 Light-alloy wheels, care 392 Light control, adaptive 177 Lighter, cigarettes 299 Lighting 175 Lighting, loudspeaker, see Bowers & Wil‐ kins 181 Light in the exterior mirror, see Active Blind Spot Detection 206 Light in the exterior mirror, see Cross traffic warning 272 Light replacement, see Lights and bulbs 380 Lights 175 Lights and bulbs 380 Light switch 175 LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 223 List, instrument cluster, see Selection lists 170 List of all messages 66 List of all notifications 66 Load 317 Loading 316 Loading the cargo area, see Stowing cargo 317 Local time, see Time 63 Locking, automatic 102 Locking, see Opening and Closing 82 Locking, settings 101 Locking the trunk lid, see Valet parking mode 100 Locking, vehicle key 83 Lock, lug bolts 362 Loudspeaker lighting, see Bowers & Wilkins 181 Low beams, automatic, see High-beam Assis‐ tant 178 Low beams, operation 176 Lower back support, see Lumbar support 113 Lug bolt lock 362 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage rack 326 Lumbar support 113 M Maintenance 377 Maintenance recommendations 377 Maintenance recommendations, see Condition Based Service CBS 377 Maintenance, see Service notifications 167 Maintenance system, BMW 377 Make-up mirror 298 Malfunction, BMW display key 90 Malfunction, vehicle key 86 Managing devices 74 Manual brake, see Parking brake 142 Manual control, air distribution 281 Manual control, air flow 281 Manual mode, Steptronic transmission 149 Manual operation, fuel filler flap 335 Manual Speed Limiter 223 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Marking, run-flat tire 345 Massage seat, front 127 Massage seat, rear 127 Matt paint, care 392 Maximum cooling 280 Maximum speed, display, see Speed Limit Info 168 Maximum speed, winter tires 345 M Driver's Package, driving instructions 326 Media of the Owner's Manual 14 Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 383 Memory function 125 Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection lists 170 Menus, operating, iDrive 42 Messages 66 Messages, see Check Control 158 Meters, see Instrument cluster 155 Microfilter 282 Minimum tread depth, tires 343 Mobile communication devices in the vehi‐ cle 323 408 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Everything from A to Z Mobile devices, managing 74 Mobile phone, connecting 73 Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga‐ tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Mobile Service, see BMW Accident Assis‐ tance 384 Mobile Service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ tance 384 Mobility System, see Tire repair set 346 MODE button, see Active Cruise Control 227 Mode, ECO PRO 329 Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Safety 8 Monitor, see Control Display 45 Mounting of child restraint systems 132 MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Multifunction hook 317 Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 30 Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 N Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints front 119 Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints rear 121 Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels, care 392 Night Vision device, see Night Vision 199 Night Vision with pedestrian and animal detec‐ tion 199 Notifications 66 No-touch opening and closing of the trunk lid 95 Nylon rope for tow-starting/towing 388 O OBD Onboard Diagnosis 378 OBD, see OBD Onboard Diagnosis 378 Object detection, see Night Vision 199 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 252 Obstacle marking, Surround View 262 Octane number, see Gasoline quality 371 REFERENCE Odometer, see Trip data 171 Oil, adding 372 Oil change 374 Oil filler neck 372 Oil level, checking electronically 372 Oil service interval, see Service notifications 167 Oil types to add, engine 373 Old battery 381 Onboard literature, printed 14 Onboard vehicle tool kit 379 On-call service, see BMW Accident Assis‐ tance 384 On-call service, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ tance 384 Opening and closing 82 Operating concept, iDrive 42 Operating condition of the vehicle 39 Operation via voice 50 Optional equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7 Outside air, see Automatic Recirculating Air Con‐ trol 281 Outside temperature 166 Overheating of the engine, see Engine tempera‐ ture 166 Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor‐ age 393 Owner's Manual, printed 14 Owner's Manual via voice operation, BMW Intelli‐ gent Personal Assistant 52 P Paint, car care 391 Pair device 73 Pairing, mobile devices, see Connections 73 Panic alarm, see Panic mode 103 Panic mode 103 Panorama View 266 Panoramic glass sunroof, see Glass sunroof 108 Park Distance Control PDC 247 Parking aid, see PDC 247 Parking assistance systems 246 Parking assistant 254 Parking Assistant, driving out of parking space 258 409 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 REFERENCE Everything from A to Z Parking Assistant for driving out of parking space 258 Parking assistant Plus, see Surround View 261 Parking Assistant, see Automatic Parking Assis‐ tant 254 Parking, Automatic Hold, see Parking brake 142 Parking brake 142 Parking lights 176 Parts and accessories 8 Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down, see Automatic Curb Monitor 124 Pathway lighting 177 Pathway lighting, switching on 85 Pathway lines, rearview camera 252 Payload, technical data 397 PDC Park Distance Control 247 Pedestrian detection, see Night Vision 199 Pedestrian Warning with braking function 197 Personal Assistant 50 Personal data, deleting 68 Personal profile, see Driver profiles 69 Personal settings 68 Phone, connecting 73 Physical units, see Set units of measurement 64 Plastic parts, care 393 Pop-ups, control display 65 Possible gestures, gesture control 55 PostCrash - iBrake 217 Power Display, instrument cluster 165 Power failure 381 Power gauge, see Sport displays 172 Power Meter, see Power Display 165 Power windows 104 Pre-conditioning 288 Pressure test tire, see Tire Pressure Moni‐ tor 351 Pressure, tires 336 Pre-ventilation 286 Printed onboard literature 14 Profiles, see Driver profiles 69 Programmable memory buttons, iDrive 44 Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam pro‐ tection system 110 Protective function, windows, see Jam protec‐ tion system 105 Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 46 Q Queuing Assistant, see Assisted Driving Plus 241 R Racing track 327 Radar sensors, see Sensors of the vehicle 35 Radiator fluid 375 Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment and Communication 6 Rain sensor 147 Rear automatic climate control 284 Rear axle steering, see Integral Active Steer‐ ing 222 Rear cooler 307 Rear-end collision preparation 212 Rear-end collision warning, see Rear-end colli‐ sion preparation 212 Rear lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 380 Rear seat backrest tilt 116 Rear seats 115 Rear storage 312 Rear vanity mirror 124 Rearview camera, see Surround View 261 Rearview camera, without Surround View 251 Rear-view mirrors, exterior 123 Rear-view mirrors, interior 124 Rear window defroster 282 Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/activatedcharcoal filter 282 Recirculated-air mode 281 Recommended tire brands 344 Reduced drive power, see Heavily discharged high-voltage battery 165 Refueling 334 Remote 3D View 268 Remote control for audio, see Owner's Hand‐ book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ cation 6 Remote Control Parking 269 Remote control, see Vehicle key 82 Remote control, universal 295 Remote Engine Start, see Stationary climate control 288 410 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Everything from A to Z Remote services, app, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communica‐ tion 6 Remote Software Upgrade 59 Renewal, wheels and tires 344 Replacement, wheels and tires 344 Replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 380 Replacing light diodes, see Lights and bulbs 380 Replacing parts 379 Replacing the battery, vehicle key 85 Reporting safety malfunctions 13 RES CNCL button, Active Cruise Control ACC 227 RES CNCL button, cruise control 225 Reserve warning, see Range 167 Reset settings, vehicle 65 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor 353 Reset, vehicle data 65 Reset, vehicle settings 65 RESUME button, Active Cruise Control 227 RESUME button, cruise control 225 Retreaded tires 345 Reversing Assistant 259 Roadside parking lights 176 Roller sunblind, rear window 106 Roller sunblinds, rear side windows 107 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 296 RON, gasoline quality 371 Roofliner 34 Roof-mounted luggage rack 326 Rope for tow-starting/towing 388 Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 RSC Runflat System, see Runflat tire 345 RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, En‐ tertainment, Communication 6 Rubber components, care 392 Run-flat tire 345 S Safe braking 324 Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and front passenger seat 119 Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 119 Safety belts 117 REFERENCE Safety belts, care 393 Safety belts, rear 118 Safety locks, doors, and windows 136 Safety package, see Active Protection 216 Safety switch, windows 106 Safety systems, see Airbags 183 Safety systems, see Intelligent Safety 187 Saving fuel 328 Screen Mirroring, connection 78 Screen, see Control Display 45 Screen tilt, front passenger side, see Adjusting the front passenger seat 117 Sealing compound, see Tire repair set 346 Seat and armrest heating 128 Seat heating 128 Seat heating, climate control rules 130 Seating position for children 131 Seats and head restraints 112 Seats, front 112 Seats, rear 115 Seat ventilation, climate control rules 130 Securing, cargo 317 Selection list in the instrument cluster 170 Selector lever, Steptronic transmission 149 Self-leveling suspension, see Air suspen‐ sion 275 Self-supporting tires, see Run-flat tires 345 Sensors, care 393 Sensors of the vehicle 35 Service and warranty 9 Service Center, see BMW Accident Assis‐ tance 384 Service Center, see BMW Roadside Assis‐ tance 384 Service notifications 167 Service notifications, see Condition Based Serv‐ ice CBS 377 Services, ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communica‐ tion 6 SET button, Active Cruise Control 227 SET button, cruise control 225 Set clock 63 Set day, see Date 63 Set speed, see Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function 227 411 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 REFERENCE Everything from A to Z Set system language, see Language 64 Set time, see Time 63 Setting, Control Display 65 Settings, general 63 Settings, locking/unlocking 101 Settings, seats and head restraints 112 Setup Wizard 69 Shift lights 165 Shift paddles on the steering wheel 149 Shift point indicator, tachometer 165 Side airbag 183 Side collision mitigation 209 Side parking aid, Surround View 262 Side parking aid without Surround View 250 Side protection aid, Surround View, see Side parking aid 262 Side protection aid without Surround View, see Side parking aid 250 Signaling, horn 30 Signals when unlocking, see Confirmation sig‐ nals from the vehicle 101 Sitting safely 112 Ski and snowboard bag 320 Sleep mode, see Operating condition of the ve‐ hicle 39 Slide/tilt glass roof, see Glass sunroof 108 Slipperiness, see Outside temperature 166 Slippery road, see Outside temperature 166 Smallest turning circle, vehicle 396 Smartphone, connecting 73 Smartphone Integration, Android Auto prepara‐ tion 79 Smartphone Integration, Apple CarPlay prepara‐ tion 79 Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Smartphone, using via voice control 53 Smoker's package 298 SMS, see Short messages, see Owner's Hand‐ book for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi‐ cation 6 Socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis 378 Sockets, electrical devices 300 Soft-close automatic, doors 99 Software Update, see Remote Software Up‐ grade 59 Software Upgrade, see Remote Software Up‐ grade 59 SOS button, see Intelligent emergency call 385 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 365 Speech recognition 50 Speed Limit Assist 235 Speed Limit Assistant 235 Speed Limit Device, Speed Limiter 223 Speed limit display, see Speed Limit Info 168 Speed Limit Info 168 Speed warning 65 Sport displays 172 SPORT INDIVIDUAL, see Driving Dynamics Control 140 Sport program, Steptronic transmission 149 SPORT, see Driving Dynamics Control 140 Stability control systems 219 Standard equipment, see Vehicle equipment 7 Standby, see Operating condition of the vehi‐ cle 39 Start/stop, automatic function 137 Start/Stop button 137 Starting aid terminals 386 Starting, see Drive-ready state 40 Starting the engine, see Drive-ready state 40 Stationary climate control via Remote Engine Start 288 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook for Navigation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Status control display, tires 353 Status information, iDrive 43 Status of Owner's Manual 7 Status, vehicle 172 Steering and Lane Control Assistant 237 Steering Assistant, see Steering and Lane Con‐ trol Assistant 237 Steering column adjustment 125 Steering, see Integral Active Steering 222 Steering wheel, adjusting 125 Steering wheel, buttons 30 Steering wheel heating 125 Steering wheel heating, climate control rules 130 412 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Everything from A to Z Steptronic Sport transmission, see Steptronic transmission 149 Steptronic transmission 149 Stopping the engine, see Drive-ready state 40 Storage compartment, cargo area 318 Storage compartment, center console 311 Storage compartment, rear seats 312 Storage compartments 310 Storage compartments, locations 310 Storage, tires 345 Store Mirror position, see Memory function 125 Store seat position, see Memory function 125 Store steering wheel position, see Memory func‐ tion 125 Storing the vehicle 393 Stowing, cargo 317 Straps for cargo, see Lashing eyes in the cargo area 317 Suitable devices 74 Suitable mobile phones 74 Summer tires, tread 342 Sun visor 298 Sun visor, sliding 298 Supplementary Owner's Manuals 14 Surface heating, see Seat and armrest heat‐ ing 128 Surround View 261 Surround View, gesture control 55 Suspension settings, see Driving Dynamics Con‐ trol 140 Switches, see Dashboard 30 Switch for driving dynamics, see Driving Dynam‐ ics Control 140 Symbols and displays 7 SYNC program, automatic climate control 282 System settings, see General settings 63 T Table, see Folding table, rear 306 Tablet, BMW Touch Command 57 Tachometer 164 Tail lights, replacing, see Lights and bulbs 380 Taking the vehicle out of service 393 Tank capacity 398 Technical changes, see For Your Own Safety 8 REFERENCE Technical data 396 Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment and Communication 6 Telephone, selection list in the instrument clus‐ ter 170 Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga‐ tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Temperature, automatic climate control 279 Temperature display electric motor, see Sport displays 172 Temperature display, see outside tempera‐ ture 166 Temperature, engine oil 166 Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 103 Thermal camera, see Night Vision 199 Thigh support 113 Through-loading system 318 Tilt alarm sensor 104 Tilt, backrest 113 Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror, see Automatic Curb Monitor 124 Time 63 Time of day, see Time 63 Time setting, automatic 63 Tire brands, recommended 344 Tire chains 350 Tire change 344 Tire damage 343 Tire identification marks 341 Tire inflation pressure 336 Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see TPM 358 Tire inflation pressure monitor TPM 358 Tire marking 341 Tire pressure 336 Tire Pressure Monitor 351 Tire Pressure Monitor, reset 353 Tire repair set 346 Tires and wheels 336 Tire sealant, see Tire repair set 346 Tire settings 352 Tires, run-flat 345 Tire tread 342 Title, gesture control 55 Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐ tainment and Communication 6 Tools 379 413 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 REFERENCE Everything from A to Z Top View, see Surround View 261 Torque indicator electric motor, see Sport dis‐ plays 172 Torque indicator, see Sport displays 172 Touch Command 57 Touchpad, Controller 48 Tow bar 388 Tow fitting 389 Towing 387 Tow rope 388 Tow-starting 387 TPM Flat Tire Monitor 358 Traction control 221 TRACTION, driving dynamics 221 Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ gation, Entertainment, Communication 6 Traffic Jam Assistant, see Assisted Driving Plus 241 Traffic jam assistant, see Steering and Lane Control Assistant 237 Transmission lock, electronic unlocking 153 Transmission, see Steptronic transmission 149 Transporting children safely 131 Tread, tires 342 Trip computer, see Trip data 171 Trip data 171 Triple turn signal activation 146 Trip odometer, see Trip data 171 Trunk, emergency unlocking 99 Trunk lid 97 Trunk lid, emergency unlocking 99 Trunk lid, opening and closing with no-touch ac‐ tivation 95 Trunk lid, see Trunk lid 97 Trunk lid, vehicle key 84 Trunk, see Cargo area 316 Turning circle lines, rearview camera 252 Turning circle line, Surround View 262 Turning circle, vehicle 396 Turn signal, indicator light 162 Turn signal, replacing bulbs, see Lights and bulbs 380 Turn signals, high beams, headlight flasher 145 U Ultrasonic sensors, see Sensors of the vehi‐ cle 35 Unintentional alarm, avoiding 104 Units of measurement 64 Units, see Set units of measurement 64 Universal remote control 295 Unlock button, Steptronic transmission 149 Unlocking, automatic 102 Unlocking, see Opening and Closing 82 Unlocking, settings 101 Unlocking, vehicle key 83 Unwarranted alarm, see Avoiding unintentional alarms 104 Updates made after the editorial deadline 7 Upgrade, see Remote Software Upgrade 59 Upholstery material care 392 Upper backrest, front 114 Upper backrest, rear 115 Upper retaining strap, top tether 135 USB connection 80 USB port, position in vehicle 302 Used battery, disposing of 381 Use, intended 8 V Valet parking mode 100 Vanity mirror 298 Variable steering, see Integral Active Steer‐ ing 222 Vehicle battery 380 Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis‐ tance 383 Vehicle, breaking in 322 Vehicle care 391 Vehicle care products 391 Vehicle data, reset 65 Vehicle equipment 7 Vehicle identification number 12 Vehicle key 82 Vehicle key, additional 85 Vehicle key, integrated key 91 Vehicle key, loss 86 Vehicle key, malfunction 86 414 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 Everything from A to Z Vehicle key, replacing the battery 85 Vehicle key with display, malfunction 90 Vehicle key with display, see BMW display key 87 Vehicle paint, care 391 Vehicle status 172 Vehicle storage 393 Vehicle washing 390 Ventilation 282 Ventilation, see Pre-ventilation 286 Venting, see Ventilation 282 Vent, see Ventilation 282 Version Software, see Remote Software Up‐ grade 59 Video recording, see BMW Drive Recorder 214 Video, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, En‐ tertainment and Communication 6 VIN, see Vehicle identification number 12 Voice command response 50 Voice control 50 Voice control, gesture control 55 Voice control, see BMW Intelligent Personal As‐ sistant 50 Voice control system 50 Volume, gesture control 55 W Wake word 51 Warning against cross traffic 272 Warning function, rear-end collision 212 Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Active Blind Spot Detection 206 Warning light in the exterior mirror, see Cross traffic warning 272 Warning lights 159 Warning messages, see Check Control 158 Warning triangle 383 Warranty 8 Warranty Booklet 8 Washer fluid 376 Washer nozzles, windshield 148 Washer system 146 Washing the vehicle 390 Washing, vehicle 390 Wash view, Surround View 262 REFERENCE Water on roads 324 Water, see Condensation water under the parked vehicle 325 Website, see Internet 6 Weights 397 Welcome light during unlocking 83 Welcome lights 176 Welcome screen, driver profiles 69 Wheel base, vehicle 396 Wheels and tires 336 Wheels and tires, exchange 344 Widgets, iDrive 43 Widgets, instrument cluster 157 Width, vehicle 396 Wi-Fi connection 77 WiFi connection, see WLAN connection 77 Wi-Fi hotspot 77 Window, defrosting 282 Windows, powered 104 Windshield, climate comfort 323 Windshield, defrosting 282 Windshield washer fluid, see Washer fluid 376 Windshield washer nozzles 148 Windshield wiper, see Wiper system 146 Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor‐ age 393 Winter tires 345 Winter tires, tread 343 Wiper blades, replacing 379 Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 376 Wiper, fold-away position 148 Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 146 Wiper system 146 Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wireless charging tray 303 Wireless charging tray for smartphones 303 WLAN connection 77 Wood parts, care 392 Wordmatch principle, see Entry comparison 43 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle tool kit 379 X xDrive 221 415 Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 *BL5A3838300E* 01405A38383 ue Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 California Proposition 65 Warning For vehicles sold in California: Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21 The Ultimate Driving Machine® BMW DRIVER'S GUIDE APP. Your customized information about the vehicle in an app. Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline. *BL5A3838300E* 01405A38383 ue Online Edition for Part no. 01405A38383 - VI/21